Delta Standard Compact Drive MS300 Series User Manual

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.deltaacdrives.com Email: info@deltaacdrives.
com
Delta Standard Compact Drive

MS300 Series User Manual
CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.deltaacdrives.com Email: info@deltaacdrives.com

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

 AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
 Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
DANGER capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Please do not
touch the internal circuit and components.
 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These
components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Please do not touch these
components or the circuit boards before taking anti-static measures.
 Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
 Ground the AC motor drive using the ground terminal. The grounding method must
comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed.
 DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct
sunlight and inflammables.
 Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 directly to the
AC mains circuit power supply.
CAU TION
 The rated voltage of the AC motor drive must be  115V for 110V models,  240V for
230V models, and  480V for 460V models.
 Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor drives.
 Even if the 3-phase AC motor is stop, a charge may still remain in the main circuit
terminals of the AC motor drive with hazardous voltages.
 If the AC motor drive is stored in no charge condition for more than 3 months, the
ambient temperature should not be higher than 30°C. Storage longer than one year is
not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors.
 Pay attention to the following when transporting and installing this package (including
wooden crate, wood stave and carton box)
1. If you need to sterilize, deform the wooden crate or carton box, please do not
use steamed smoking sterilization or you will damage the VFD.
2. Please use other ways to sterilize or deform.
3. You may use high temperature to sterilize or deform. Leave the packaging
materials in an environment of over 56°C for 30 minutes.
 Type of electrical supply system (3WYE) to which the drive shall be connected.
NOTE
 For a detailed explanation of the product specification, the cover or the safety shields will be disassembled, as
described in graphic mode. As for the product in operation, please install the top cover and wiring correctly
according to the provisions. Refer to the manual operation to ensure safety.
 The figures in this instruction are only for reference, they may be slightly different from the one you have, but it will
not affect your customer rights.
 The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the
latest version at
http://www.deltaww.com/services/DownloadCenter2.aspx?secID=8&pid=2&tid=0&CID=06&itemID=060101&typeID
=1&downloadID=&title=&dataType=&check=0&hl=en-US
I
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 1-1
1-1 Nameplate Information................................................................................................1-2
1-2 Model Name...............................................................................................................1-3
1-3 Serial Number..............................................................................................................1-3
1-4 RFI Jumper..................................................................................................................1-4
CHAPTER 2 DIMENSION ........................................................................................................ 2-1

Frame A……………………………………………………..……………………………………2-1
Frame B……………………………………………………………..……………………………2-2
Frame C……………………………………………………………..……………………………2-3
Frame D…………………………………………………………..………………………………2-4
Frame E…………………………………………………………..………………………………2-5
Frame F…………………………………………………………..………………………………2-6
Digital Keypad…………..……………………………………………………………………….2-7
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 WIRING ............................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Wiring...........................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 System Wiring Diagram...............................................................................................4-6
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ............................................................................ 5-1

5-1 Main Circuit Diagram....................................................................................................5-4
5-2 Main Circuit Terminals..................................................................................................5-5
Frame A………………..………………………………..……………………………………5-6
Frame B………..………………………………………………..……………………………5-7
Frame C………..………………………………………………..……………………………5-8
Frame D………...……………………………………………….……………………………5-9
Frame E…………...…..………………………………………….…………………………5-10
Frame F………….…….……………………………………….……………………………5-11
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ..................................................................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ............................................................................... 7-1

7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives...................................7-2
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker............................................................................................7-5
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart ...........................................................................................7-7
7-4 AC/DC Reactor...........................................................................................................7-9
7-5 Zero Phase Reactor.................................................................................................7-23
II
7-6 EMC Filter.................................................................................................................7-26

7-7 EMC Shield Plate....................................................................................................7-30
7-8 Capacitive Filter.........................................................................................................7-33
7-9 Conduit Box…..........................................................................................................7-35
7-10 Fan Kit.....................................................................................................................7-43
7-11 Keypad Panel Mounting ……..................................................................................7-44
7-12 DIN-Rail Mounting...................................................................................................7-45
7-13 Mounting Adapter Plate………………………………….……………………………7-47
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS..................................................................................................8-1

8-1 Option Card Installation................................................................................................8-2
8-2 CMM-MOD01 Modbus/TCP Option Card.....................................................................8-7
8-3 CMM-PD01 PROFIBUS Option Card.........................................................................8-10
8-4 CMM-DN01 DeviceNet Option Card..........................................................................8-12
8-5 CMM-EIP01 Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP Option Card..................................................8-15
8-6 CMM-COP01 CANopen Option Card.........................................................................8-18
8-7 EMM-BPS01 Back-up Power Supply Card................................................................8-20
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................9-1

9-1 115V Series…………………………….......................................................................9-2
9-2 230V Series………………………………......................................................................9-3
9-3 460V Series………………………………......................................................................9-5
9-4 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation……………………...............9-8
9-5 Derating of Ambient Temperature and Altitude……………………................................9-9
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................10-1
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS SETTINGS .................................................. 11-1
CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS .......................................... 12-00-1
12-1 Description of Parameter Settings……………………..……………………………12-00-1

12-2 Adjustment & Application…………………………………………………………….. 12.2-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................13-1
CHAPTER 14 ERROR CODES ..............................................................................................14-1
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ...................................................................................15-1
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................16-1
CHAPTER 17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION….………………………..…………………….17-1
17-1 Basic Function Description………….......................................................................17-2

17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description......................................................17-3
III
17-3 Wiring Diagram.......................................................................................................17-4

17-4 Failure Rate of the Drive Safety Function...............................................................17-5
17-5 Reset the Parameter Settings….............................................................................17-5
17-6 Timing Diagram Description...................................................................................17-6
17-7 Error Code and Troubleshooting Instructions…………………………………………17-9
17-8 Test and Fault Confirmation……………………………………………………….…..17-11
Application Control Board: V 1.0
IV
Chapter 1 IntroductionMS300
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1 Nameplate Information
1-2 Model Name
1-3 Serial Number
1-4 RFI Jumper
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction MS300
After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
1. Please inspect the unit after unpacking to ensure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure
that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Make sure that the mains voltage is within the range as indicated on the nameplate. Please install
the AC motor drive according to this manual.
3. Before applying the power, please make sure that all devices, including mains power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3” and output terminals”U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” are correct to prevent damage to the drive.
5. When power is applied, select the language and set parameters via the digital keypad (KPMS-LE01).
When executing a trial run, please begin with a low speed and then gradually increase the speed
until the desired speed is reached.
1-1 Nameplate Information
1-2
1-2 Model Name
1-3 Serial Number
1-3
1-4 RFI Jumper

(1) In the drive there are Varistor / MOVs, which are connected from phase to phase and from phase to
ground, to protect the drive against mains surges or voltage spikes.
Because the Varistors / MOVs from phase to ground are connected to ground via the RFI jumper, the
protection will be ineffective when the RFI jumper is removed.
(2) In the models with built-in EMC filter the RFI jumper connects the filer capacitors to ground to form a
return path for high frequency noise to isolate the noise from contaminating the mains power.
Removing the RFI jumper strongly reduces the effect of the buiolt-in EMC filter.
(3) Although a single drive complies with the international standards for leakage current, an installation
with several drives with built-in EMC filter can trigger the RCD. Removing the RFI jumper helps, but
the EMC performance of each drive would is no longer guaranteed.
Frame A~F Screw Torque: 4~6 kg-cm / [3.5~5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39~0.59 Nm]
Loosen the screw and remove the RFI Jumper (as shown below). Fasten the screw again after the RFI
Jumper is removed.
Frame B~F (model with built-in EMC filter)

Remove the RFI Jumper with a screwdriver (as shown below).
1-4
Isolating main power from ground:

When the power distribution system of the drive is a floating ground system (IT) or an asymmetric ground
system (TN), the RFI Jumper must be removed. Removing the RFI Jumper disconnects the internal
capacitors from ground to avoid damaging the internal circuits and to reduce the ground leakage current.
Important points regarding ground connection

 To ensure the safety of personnel, proper operation, and to reduce electromagnetic radiation, the
drive must be properly grounded during installation.
 The diameter of the cables must comply with the local safety regulations.
 The shield of shielded cables must be connected to the ground of the drive to meet safety regulations.
 The shield of shielded power cables can only be used as the ground for equipment when the
aforementioned points are met.
 When installing more drives, do not connect the grounds of the drives in series but connect each drive
to ground.
G r o u n d te r mi n a l
Wr o n g wi r i n g se tu p fo r g r o u n d wi r e s
Pay particular attention to the following points:

 Do not remove the RFI jumper while the power is on.
 Removing the RFI jumper will also disconnect the built-in EMC filter capacitors. Compliance with the
EMC specifications is no longer guaranteed.
 The RFI jumper may not be removed if the mains power is a grounded power system.
 The RFI jumper may not be removed while conducting high voltage tests. When conducting a high
voltage test to the entire facility, the mains power and the motor must be disconnected if the leakage
current is too high.
Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

A floating ground system is also called an IT system, an ungrounded system, or a high
impedance/resistance (greater than 30 Ω) grounded system.
 Disconnect the RFI Jumper.
 Check whether there is excess electromagnetic radiation affecting nearby low-voltage circuits.
 In some situations, the transformer and cable naturally provide enough suppression. If in doubt, install
an extra electrostatic shielded cable on the power supply side between the main circuit and the control
terminals to increase security.
 Do not install an external EMC filter. The EMC filter is connected to ground through the filter
capacitors, thus connecting power input to ground. This is very dangerous and can easily damage the
drive.
1-5
Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Caution: Do not remove the RFI jumper while the input terminal of the drive carries power.
In the following four situations, the RFI jumper must be removed. This is to prevent the system from
grounding through the RFI and filter capacitors, damaging the drive.
RFI jumper must be removed
1. Grounding at a corner in a triangle configuration 2. Grounding at a midpoint in a polygonal
configuration
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
3. Grounding at one end in a single-phase 4. No stable neutral grounding in a three-phase
configuration autotransformer configuration
L1 L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
N
L3
RFI jumper can be used

Internal grounding through RFI capacitors, which reduce L1
electromagnetic radiation. In a symmetrically grounding
power system with higher EMC requirements, an EMC filter
can be installed. As a reference, the diagram on the right is
a symmetrical grounding power system.
L2
L3
1-6
Chapter 2 Dimensions MS300
Chapter 2 Dimension
Frame A
A1: VFD1A6MS11ANSAA; VFD1A6MS11ENSAA; VFD1A6MS21ANSAA; VFD1A6MS21ENSAA;
VFD1A6MS23ANSAA; VFD1A6MS23ENSAA
A2: VFD2A8MS23ANSAA; VFD2A8MS23ENSAA
A3: VFD2A5MS11ANSAA; VFD2A5MS11ENSAA; VFD2A8MS21ANSAA; VFD2A8MS21ENSAA
A4: VFD1A5MS43ANSAA; VFD1A5MS43ENSAA
A5: VFD4A8MS23ANSAA; VFD4A8MS23ENSAA; VFD2A7MS43ANSAA; VFD2A7MS43ENSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 D1 S1
A1 68.0 [2.68] 128.0 [5.04] 96.0 [3.78] 56.0 [2.20] 118.0 [4.65] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
A2 68.0 [2.68] 128.0 [5.04] 110.0 [4.33] 56.0 [2.20] 118.0 [4.65] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
A3 68.0 [2.68] 128.0 [5.04] 125.0 [4.92] 56.0 [2.20] 118.0 [4.65] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
A4 68.0 [2.68] 128.0 [5.04] 129.0 [5.08] 56.0 [2.20] 118.0 [4.65] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
A5 68.0 [2.68] 128.0 [5.04] 143.0 [5.63] 56.0 [2.20] 118.0 [4.65] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
S1
Mounting Hole
S1
Mo u n tin g H o l e
2-1
Frame B
B1: VFD7A5MS23ANSAA; VFD7A5MS23ENSAA; VFD4A2MS43ANSAA; VFD4A2MS43ENSAA
B2: VFD4A8MS21ANSAA; VFD4A8MS21ENSAA
B3: VFD1A6MS21AFSAA; VFD2A8MS21AFSAA; VFD4A8MS21AFSAA; VFD1A5MS43AFSAA;
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA; VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
B1 72.0 [2.83] 142.0 [5.59] 143.0 [5.63] 60.0 [2.36] 130.0 [5.63] 6.4 [0.25] 5.2 [0.20]
B2 72.0 [2.83] 142.0 [5.59] 143.0 [5.63] 60.0 [2.36] 130.0 [5.63] 3.0 [0.12] 5.2 [0.20]
B3 72.0 [2.83] 142.0 [5.59] 159.0 [6.26] 60.0 [2.36] 130.0 [5.63] 4.3 [0.17] 5.2 [0.20]
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
S1
Mounting Hole
S1
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
2-2
Frame C
C1: VFD4A8MS11ANSAA; VFD4A8MS11ENSAA; VFD7A5MS21ANSAA; VFD7A5MS21ENSAA;
VFD11AMS21ANSAA; VFD11AMS21ENSAA; VFD11AMS23ANSAA; VFD11AMS23ENSAA;
VFD17AMS23ANSAA; VFD17AMS23ENSAA; VFD5A5MS43ANSAA; VFD5A5MS43ENSAA;
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA; VFD9A0MS43ENSAA
C2: VFD7A5MS21AFSAA; VFD11AMS21AFSAA; VFD5A5MS43AFSAA; VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
C1 87.0 [3.43] 157.0 [6.18] 152.0 [5.98] 73.0 [2.87] 144.5 [5.69] 5.0 [0.20] 5.5 [0.22]
C2 87.0 [3.43] 157.0 [6.18] 179.0 [7.05] 73.0 [2.87] 144.5 [5.69] 5.0 [0.20] 5.5 [0.22]
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
S1
Mounting Hole
S1
Mounting Hole
2-3
Frame D
D1: VFD25AMS23ANSAA; VFD25AMS23ENSAA; VFD13AMS43ANSAA; VFD13AMS43ENSAA;

VFD17AMS43ANSAA; VFD17AMS43ENSAA
D2: VFD13AMS43AFSAA; VFD17AMS43AFSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
D1 109.0 [4.29] 207.0 [8.15] 154.0 [6.06] 94.0 [3.70] 193.8 [7.63] 6.0 [0.24] 5.5 [0.22]
D2 109.0 [4.29] 207.0 [8.15] 187.0 [7.36] 94.0 [3.70] 193.8 [7.63] 6.0 [0.24] 5.5 [0.22]
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
S1
Mounting Hole
S1
Mounting Hole
2-4
Frame E
E1: VFD33AMS23ANSAA; VFD33AMS23ENSAA; VFD49AMS23ANSAA; VFD49AMS23ENSAA;
VFD25AMS43ANSAA; VFD25AMS43ENSAA; VFD32AMS43ANSAA; VFD32AMS43ENSAA
E2: VFD25AMS43AFSAA; VFD32AMS43AFSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
E1 130.0 [5.12] 250.0 [9.84] 185.0 [7.83] 115.0 [4.53] 236.8 [9.32] 6.0 [0.24] 5.5 [0.22]
E2 130.0 [5.12] 250.0 [9.84] 219.0 [8.62] 115.0 [4.53] 236.8 [9.32] 6.0 [0.24] 5.5 [0.22]
W D
W1 D1
H1
H
S1
Mounting Hole
S1
Mo unti ng H ole
2-5
Frame F
F1: VFD65AMS23ANSAA; VFD65AMS23ENSAA; VFD38AMS43ANSAA; VFD38AMS43ENSAA;
VFD45AMS43ANSAA; VFD45AMS43ENSAA
F2: VFD38AMS43AFSAA; VFD45AMS43AFSAA
Unit: mm [inch]
F1 175.0 [6.89] 300.0 [11.81] 192.0 [7.56] 154.0 [6.06] 279.5 [11.00] 6.5 [0.26] 8.4 [0.33]
F2 175.0 [6.89] 300.0 [11.81] 244.0 [9.61] 154.0 [6.06] 279.5 [11.00] 6.5 [0.26] 8.4 [0.33]
W D
W1 D1
H1
S1
Mounting Hole
S1 Mounting Hole
2-6
Digital Keypad
KPMS-LE01
Unit: mm [inch]
W W1 W2 W3 H H1 H2
68.0 [2.67] 63.8 [2.51] 45.2 [1.78] 8.0 [0.31] 46.8 [1.84] 42.0 [1.65] 26.0 [1.02]
H3 D D1 D2 D3 D4 S1
7.5 [0.31] 30.0 [1.18] 22.7 [0.89] 2.0 [0.08] 2.2 [0.09] 1.3 [0.05] M3*0.5(2X)
W D
H3
W2 W3
H2
H1
H
S1
D1 D2
D3
D4
W1
2-7
[ This page intentionally left blank ]
2-8
Chapter 3 Installation MS300
Chapter 3 Installation
Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation
 Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering
to the heat sink
 Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to prevent the risk of
accidental fire.
 Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only: normally only nonconductive
pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by condensation is expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction: inflow outflow distance
Single drive installation Side-by-side horizontal installation
Minimum mounting clearance

Ambient temperature (oC)
Installation method A (mm) B (mm) C (mm)
Max. (Without derating) Max. (Derating)
Single drive installation 50 30 - 50 60
Side-by-side horizontal installation 50 30 30 50 60
Zero stack installation 50 30 0 40 50
NOTE
The minimum mounting clearances A~C stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives installation. Failing to
follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problems.
3-1
Air flow rate for cooling Power Dissipation

Frame
Flow Rate Flow Rate Loss External Internal Total
Model No.
(Unit: cfm) (Unit: m3 / hr) (Heat sink, unit: W) (Unit: W) (Unit: W)
VFD1A6MS11ANSAA
8.0 10.0 18.0
VFD1A6MS11ENSAA
VFD2A5MS11ANSAA
14.2 13.1 27.3
VFD2A5MS11ENSAA
VFD1A6MS21ANSAA
8.0 10.3 18.3
VFD1A6MS21ENSAA
VFD2A8MS21ANSAA
16.3 14.5 30.8
VFD2A8MS21ENSAA
VFD1A6MS23ANSAA
A 0.0 0.0 8.6 10.0 18.6
VFD1A6MS23ENSAA
VFD2A8MS23ANSAA
16.5 12.6 29.1
VFD2A8MS23ENSAA
VFD4A8MS23ANSAA
31.0 13.2 44.2
VFD4A8MS23ENSAA
VFD1A5MS43ANSAA
17.6 11.1 28.7
VFD1A5MS43ENSAA
VFD2A7MS43ANSAA
30.5 17.8 48.3
VFD2A7MS43ENSAA
VFD1A6MS21AFSAA 0.0 0.0 8.0 10.3 18.3
VFD2A8MS21AFSAA 10.0 16.99 16.3 14.5 30.8
VFD4A8MS21ANSAA
0.0 0.0 29.1 20.1 49.2
VFD4A8MS21ENSAA
VFD4A8MS21AFSAA 29.1 20.1 49.2
B VFD7A5MS23ANSAA
50.1 24.2 74.3
VFD7A5MS23ENSAA
VFD1A5MS43AFSAA 17.6 11.1 28.7
10.0 16.99
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA 30.5 17.8 48.3
VFD4A2MS43ANSAA
VFD4A2MS43ENSAA 45.9 21.7 67.6
VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
VFD4A8MS11ANSAA
29.1 23.9 53.0
VFD4A8MS11ENSAA
VFD7A5MS21ANSAA
VFD7A5MS21ENSAA 46.5 31.0 77.5
VFD7A5MS21AFSAA
VFD11AMS21ANSAA
VFD11AMS21ENSAA 70.0 35 105
VFD11AMS21AFSAA
C 16.0 27.2
VFD11AMS23ANSAA
76.0 30.7 106.7
VFD11AMS23ENSAA
VFD17AMS23ANSAA
108.2 40.1 148.3
VFD17AMS23ENSAA
VFD5A5MS43ANSAA
VFD5A5MS43ENSAA 60.6 22.8 83.4
VFD5A5MS43AFSAA
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA 93.1 42 135.1
3-2
Air flow rate for cooling Power Dissipation

Frame
Flow Rate Flow Rate Loss External Internal Total
Model No.
(Unit: cfm) (Unit: m3 / hr) (Heat sink, unit: W) (Unit: W) (Unit: W)
VFD9A0MS43ENSAA
VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
VFD25AMS23ANSAA
192.8 53.3 246.1
VFD25AMS23ENSAA
VFD13AMS43ANSAA
VFD13AMS43ENSAA 132.8 39.5 172.3
D 23.4 39.7
VFD13AMS43AFSAA
VFD17AMS43ANSAA
VFD17AMS43ENSAA 164.7 55.8 220.5
VFD17AMS43AFSAA
VFD33AMS23ANSAA
244.5 79.6 324.1
VFD33AMS23ENSAA
VFD49AMS23ANSAA
374.2 86.2 460.4
VFD49AMS23ENSAA
VFD25AMS43ANSAA
E 53.7 91.2
VFD25AMS43ENSAA 234.5 69.8 304.3
VFD25AMS43AFSAA
VFD32AMS43ANSAA
VFD32AMS43ENSAA 319.8 74.3 394.1
VFD32AMS43AFSAA
VFD65AMS23ANSAA
492.0 198.2 690.2
VFD65AMS23ENSAA
VFD38AMS43ANSAA
VFD38AMS43ENSAA 423.5 181.6 605.1
F 67.9 115.2
VFD38AMS43AFSAA
VFD45AMS43ANSAA
VFD45AMS43ENSAA 501.1 200.3 701.4
VFD45AMS43AFSAA
3-3
3-4
Chapter 4 WiringMS300
Chapter 4 Wiring
4-1 Wiring
4-2 System Wiring Diagram
4-1
After removing the front cover, please check if the power and control terminals are clearly visible.
Please read following precautions to avoid wiring mistakes.
 It is crucial to cut off the AC motor drive power before doing any wiring. A charge
may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even after the
power has been turned off a short time. Therefore it is suggested to measure the
DANGER
remaining voltage with a DC voltmeter on +1/DC+ and DC- before doing any
wiring. For your personnel saftery, please do not start wiring before the voltage
drops to a safe level < 25 Vdc. Wiring the installation with a remaning voltage
condition may cause injuries, sparks and short circuits.
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shocks.
 The terminals R/L1、S/L2、T/L3 are for mains power input. If mains power is
wrongly connected to other terminals, it may result in damage to the equipment.
The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate
(see Chapter 1-1).
 All units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent
electrical shocks or damage by lightning.
 Please make sure to tighten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent
sparks due to the loosening of vibrations.
 When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complies with local
regulations for your personal safety.
 Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Any loose wires?
3. Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?
4-2
4-1 Wiring
4-3
Figure 1
4-4
Figure 2
SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) Mode
S i n k Mo d e S o u r ce Mo d e
wi th i n te r n a l p o we r ( +2 4 V d c) wi th i n te r n a l p o we r ( +2 4 V d c)
i n te rn a l i n te rn a l
ci rcu i t ci rcu i t
wi th e xte r n a l p o we r wi th e xte r n a l p o we r
internal internal
circuit circuit
external power + 24V external power + 24V
4-5
4-2 System Wiring Diagram
4-6
Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsMS300
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
5-2 Main Circuit Terminals
5-1
 Fasten the main circuit terminal screws to prevent sparking by loose screws
due to vibration.
 When needed, only use an inductive filter at the motor output terminals
DANGER U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 of the AC motor drive. DO NOT use phase-compensation
capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C
(Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta.
 DO NOT connect brake resistor directly to +1/DC+ to DC-, +2/B1 to DC- to
prevent damage to the drive.
 Ensure proper insulation of main circuit wiring in accordance with the
relevant safety regulations.
Main power terminals
 R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 have no phase-sequence requirement; they can be

connected in any sequence.
 It is recommended adding a magnetic contactor (MC) at the power input to
cut off power quickly and reduce malfunctioning when the protection
function of the AC motor drive is activated. Both ends of the MC should have
an R-C surge absorber.
 Please ensure voltages and currents are within specification.
 When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a
sensitivity ≥200mA and ≥0.1s operation time to avoid nuisance tripping.
 Please use conduits or shielded cables for the power wiring and ground
both ends of the conduit or shielded cables.
 DO NOT run/stop the drive by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop the
drive by RUN/STOP command. If you still need to run/stop the drive by
turning power ON/OFF, it is strongly recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.
 To comply with UL standards, connect the drive to a 3WYE type of mains
power system.
Output terminals for main circuit
 Use a well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.

 When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to
the motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respectively, the motor will rotate
counterclockwise (as viewed on the shaft end of the motor) when a forward
operation command is received. To permanently reverse the direction of
rotation, switch over any two motor leads.
Fo wa rd
Running
5-2
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor and DC

circuit
 These are the terminals for connecting the DC-reactor to improve the power
factor and harmonics. At delivery they are shorted by a jumper. Please
remove it before connecting the DC reactor.
 The jumper must be fastened tight when it does not connect DC reactor, use
DC+/+1, +2/B1 to execute common DC bus, or connect with brake resistor,
otherwise the drive might lose power or the terminals will be broken.
DC react or ( optional )
DC +/+1 +2 /B1
 Connect a brake resistor in applications with frequent deceleration, short
deceleration time, too low braking torque or requiring increased braking
torque.
Brake resistor
(optional)
+2/B1 B2
 The external brake resistor should connect to the terminals [+2 / B1], [B2] of
AC motor drives.
 DO NOT short circuit or connect a brake resistor directly to DC+/+1 and
DC-, +2/B1 to DC- otherwise the drive will be damaged.
 DC+ and DC- are to be connected in common DC bus applications, please
refer to Chapter 5-1(Main Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal
specification and the wire gauge information.
Remove the front cover

 The front cover shall be removed before connecting the main circuit terminals and control circuit
terminals. Removing the cover acc. to the figure below.
 The figure below shows Frame A model for example. Removing the cover on other frame sizes is
similar.
Press the clip on both sides, and take out by rotating.
5-3
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
Terminals Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2 Mains input terminals 1-phase
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 Mains input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Motor output terminals for connecting 3-phase IM and PM motors.
Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor and harmonics.
+1, +2
The jumper needs to be removed in that case.
Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
DC+, DC-
Common DC Bus
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
5-4
5-2 Main Circuit Terminals
 It needs following additional terminal when wiring. The additional terminal dimension should comply
with the following figure 1.
 After crimping the wire to the ring lug (must UL approved), UL and CSA approved R/C (YDPU2)
heat shrink tubing rated min 600Vac insulation shall be install over the live part. Please refer to the
following figure 2.
Dimensions of Ring Lug

A B C D d2 E F W t
Frame AWG Kit P/N
(MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX)
RNBS
18
1-3.7
RNBS
A 16 9.8 3.2 4.8 4.1 3.7 13.0 4.2 6.6 0.8
2-3.7
RNBS
14
2-3.7
14 RNBS2-4
B 12.1 3.6 6.1 5.6 4.3 13.0 4.5 7.2 1
12 RNBS5-4
14 RNBS2-4
12 RNBS5-4
C 17.8 5.0 6.1 7.2 4.3 13.0 5.5 8.0 1.2
10 RNBS5-4
8 RNBS8-4
12 RNBS5-4
D 10 RNBS5-4 17.8 5.0 6.1 7.2 4.3 13.0 5.5 8.0 1.2
8 RNBS8-4
8 RNBS8-5
E 6 RNB14-5 27.1 6.1 10.5 11.5 5.3 13.0 6.5 12.2 1.7
4 RNBS22-5
6 RNBS14-6
F 4 RNBS22-6 35.0 9.0 13.3 14.0 6.2 13.0 19.5 18.0 1.8
2 RNBS38-6
Unit: mm
5-5
Frame A
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, ,DC-, DC+/+1, +2/B1, B2,
Note: 1-phase model with no T/L3 terminal
Max.
Min. Wire Torque
Models Wire Screw
Gauge (±10%)
Gauge
VFD1A6MS11ANSAA 16AWG
VFD1A6MS11ENSAA [1.3mm2]
VFD1A6MS21A SAA 16AWG
9 kg-cm
VFD1A6MS23ANSAA 14 AWG
2 M 3.5 [7.8 lb-in.]
VFD1A6MS23ENSAA [2.1 mm ] 18AWG [0.88 Nm]
VFD2A8MS23ANSAA [0.82mm2]
VFD2A8MS23ENSAA
VFD1A5MS43ANSAA
VFD1A5MS43ENSAA 18AWG
VFD2A7MS43ANSAA [0.82mm2]
VFD2A7MS43ENSAA
 If you install at Ta 45°C above environment, please select copper
wire which have voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant 90°C
or above.
 If you install at Ta 45°C environment, please select copper wire
which have voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant 75°C or
90°C.
 For UL installation compliant, you have to use copper wires when
installation, the wire gauge is based on temperature resistant 75°C
which is according to the requirements and recommendations from
UL. Do not reduce the wire gauge when using higher temperature
wire.
5-6
Frame B
Max. Wire Min. Wire Torque

Models Screw
Gauge Gauge (±10%)
VFD1A6MS21AFSAA
VFD2A8MS21AFSAA
VFD4A8MS21ANSAA
VFD4A8MS21ENSAA
VFD4A8MS21AFSAA
15 kg-cm
VFD7A5MS23ANSAA 12 AWG 14 AWG
M4 [13.0 lb-in]
VFD7A5MS23ENSAA [3.3 mm2] [2.1 mm2]
[1.47 Nm]
VFD1A5MS43AFSAA
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA
VFD4A2MS43ANSAA
VFD4A2MS43ENSAA
VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
or above.
90°C.
wire.
5-7
Frame C

Models Screw
Gauge Gauge (±10%)
VFD4A8MS11ANSAA
VFD4A8MS11ENSAA
10 AWG
VFD7A5MS21ANSAA
[5.3mm2]
VFD7A5MS21ENSAA
VFD7A5MS21AFSAA
VFD11AMS21ANSAA
8 AWG
VFD11AMS21ENSAA
[8.4mm2]
VFD11AMS21AFSAA
20 kg-cm
VFD11AMS23ANSAA 8 AWG 12 AWG
M4 [17.4 lb-in.]
VFD11AMS23ENSAA [8.4 mm2] [3.3 mm2]
[1.96 Nm]
VFD17AMS23ANSAA 10 AWG
VFD17AMS23ENSAA [5.3 mm2]
VFD5A5MS43ANSAA
VFD5A5MS43ENSAA
VFD5A5MS43AFSAA 14 AWG
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA [2.1 mm2]
VFD9A0MS43ENSAA
VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
or above.
90°C.
wire.
5-8
Frame D
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , DC-, DC+/+1, +2/B1, B2,

Models Screw
Gauge Gauge (±10%)
VFD25AMS23ENSAA [8.4mm2]
VFD13AMS43ANSAA
20kg-cm
VFD13AMS43ENSAA 8 AWG
M4 [17.4 lb-in.]
VFD13AMS43AFSAA [8.4mm2] 10 AWG [1.96Nm]
VFD17AMS43ANSAA [5.3mm2]
VFD17AMS43ENSAA
VFD17AMS43AFSAA
or above.
90°C.
wire.
5-9
Frame E

Models Screw
Gauge Gauge (±10%)
VFD33AMS23ANSAA 6 AWG 6 AWG
VFD33AMS23ENSAA [13.3 mm2] [13.3 mm2]
VFD49AMS23ANSAA** 4 AWG 4 AWG
VFD49AMS23ENSAA** [21.2 mm2] [21.2 mm2]
25 kg-cm
VFD25AMS43ANSAA
M5 [21.7 lb-in.]
VFD25AMS43ENSAA
[2.45 Nm]
VFD25AMS43AFSAA 6 AWG 8 AWG
VFD32AMS43ANSAA [13.3 mm2] [8.4 mm2]
VFD32AMS43ENSAA
VFD32AMS43AFSAA
 If you install at Ta 45°C above environment, please select copper wire
above.
 If you install at Ta 45°C environment, please select copper wire which
have voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant 75°C or 90°C.
which is according to the requirements and recommendations from UL.
Do not reduce the wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
 ** These drives must be wired with ring terminal that dimensions are
specified.
5-10
Frame F

Models Screw
Gauge Gauge (±10%)
VFD65AMS23ENSAA [33.6 mm2]
VFD38AMS43ANSAA
6 AWG 40 kg-cm
VFD38AMS43ENSAA 2 AWG
2 [13.3 mm2] M6 [34.7 lb-in.]
VFD38AMS43AFSAA [33.6 mm ]
[3.92 Nm]
VFD45AMS43ANSAA
4 AWG
VFD45AMS43ENSAA
[21.2 mm2]
VFD45AMS43AFSAA
wire which have voltage rating 600V and temperature resistant 90°
C or above.
90°C.
wire.
5-11
5-12
Chapter 6 Control TerminalsMS300
Chapter 6 Control Terminals

Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, ACM)
 Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and
keep it as short as possible (<20 m) with proper grounding. If the noise is
inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
 Use twisted-pair for weak analog signals.
 If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
Wind each wire 3
times or more
around the core
Ferrite core
Contact input terminals（MI1~MI7, DCM, +24V）

wi th i n te r n a l p o we r ( +2 4 V d c) wi th i n te r n a l p o we r ( +2 4 V d c)
internal internal
circuit circuit
wi th e xte r n a l p o we r wi th e xte r n a l p o we r
internal internal
circuit circuit
external power + 24V external power + 24V
 When the photo-coupler is using internal power supply, the switch connection for Sink
and Source as below: MI-DCM: Sink mode, MI-+24 V: Source mode
Transistor Output Terminal (MO1, MO2, MCM)
 Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagram
When connecting a relay to the digital output, connect a surge absorber across the
coil and check the polarity.
6-1
Specifications of Control Terminal Specifications of RELAY Terminal

Wire Gauge: 20~18AWG [0.519~0.82 mm2] Wire Gauge: 24~16 AWG [0.205~1.3 mm2];
Torque: 5 kg-cm / [4.3 Ib-in.] / [0.49 Nm]
4-20mA
4-20mA
0-20mA
0-20mA
0-10V
0-10V
NPN
PNP
ACI AFM USB
DCM
SGND
+24V
MCM
S1
S2
SG+
SG-
SLOT 1
DATAMATRIX
24P
Safety function
32637012
RELAY
+10V
ACM
AFM
MO1
MO2
ACI
AVI
RC
RB
RA
RS485
DCM
DCM
+24V
+24V
DFM
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
Port
Location Map of Control Terminal
Distribution Diagram of Control Terminal
Wiring precautions:
 Delivery condition is +24V/ S1/ S2 shorted by jumper (as shown in figure above), please refer
to Chapter 4 Wiring for more details.
 RELAY terminal is using PCB terminal block:
1. Tighten the wiring with slotted screwdriver, which is 3.5mm (wide) x 0.6mm (thick)
2. The ideal length of stripped wire at the connection side is 6~7mm.
3. When wiring bare wires, make sure they are perfectly arranged to go through the wiring
holes.
 Control terminal is using spring clamp terminal block:
1. Tighten the wiring with slotted screwdriver, which is 2.5mm (wide) x 0.4mm (thick)
2. The ideal length of stripped wire at the connection side is 9mm.
3. When wiring bare wires, make sure they are perfectly arranged to go through the wiring
holes.
Wire Gauge (AWG)

Wiring Specifications of Control Terminal
Min. Wire Gauge Max. Wire Gauge
Conductor cross section solid 18 AWG
Conductor cross section stranded 20 AWG [0.82 mm2]
[0.519 mm2]
20 AWG
Stranded with ferrules with plastic sleeve
[0.519 mm2]
A B D W
(MAX)
14 8 3.5 1.4
Unit: mm
Ferrule: Type: AI 0,5 - 8 WH ,

Manufacturer: PHOENIX CONTACT
6-2
Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)

Digital control signal common
+24V +24V ± 10 % 100 mA
(Source)
Refer to parameters 02-01~02-07 to program the
multi-function inputs MI1~MI7.
Source Mode
ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA≧11Vdc
OFF: cut-off voltage≦5Vdc
MI1 Sink Mode
~ Multi-function input 1~7
ON: the activation current is 3.3 mA ≦13Vdc
MI7
OFF: cut-off voltage≧19Vdc
 When Pr. 02-00=0, MI1 and MI2 can be programmed
 When Pr. 02-00≠0, the function of MI1 and MI2 is acc.
to Pr02-00 setting.
 When Pr02-07=0, MI7 is pulse input with max.
frequency 33kHz (See Pr. 10-00, Pr. 10-02, Pr. 10-16)
DFM is a pulse-signal output; Duty-cycle: 50%
Digital frequency meter Min. load impedance RL: 1kΩ/100pf
DFM DFM Max. current: 30mA
DCM Max. capacitive load: 100pF
Max. voltage: 30 Vdc ± 1 %
(when 30 Vdc / 30 mA /RL = 100 pf)
Max. output frequency: 33kHz
Internal current limiting resistor R: ≧1KΩ
Digital frequency signal Output load impedance RL
DCM
common (Sink) Capacitive load≦100 pf
Resistive load≧1 kΩ，resistance determine the output
voltage value.
DFM-DCM voltage = external voltage * ( RL/ (RL+R) )
Programmable open-collector outputs, see Pr. 02-16 and
Multi-function Output 1
MO1 Pr. 02-17.
(photocoupler)
MO1
Multi-function Output 2 MO2

MO2
(photocoupler) MCM
Multi-function Output
MCM Max 48 Vdc 50 mA
Common
Programmable relay output, see Pr. 02-13.
Multi-function relay output 1
RA Resistive Load
(Relay N.O. a) 3 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 250 VAC
5 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 30 VDC
Multi-function relay output 1 Inductive Load (COS 0.4)
RB
(Relay N.C. b) 1.2 A (N.O.)/ 1.2 A (N.C.) 250 VAC
2.0 A (N.O.)/ 1.2 A (N.C.) 30 VDC
Multi-function relay common Various kinds of monitor signals output, e.g.: operation、
RC
(Relay) frequency attained、overload indication etc..
6-3

+10V Potentiometer power supply +10.5 ± 0.5 Vdc / 20 mA
Analog voltage input
Programmable analog input, see Pr. 03-00

Impedance: 20kΩ
internal circuit
AVI Range 0~Max. Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00):
0 ~ +10V / -10 ~ +10V
Range switching by Pr. 03-00 , Pr. 03-28
internal circuit
Analog current input
ACI ACI circuit Programmable analog input, see Pr. 03-01
Impedance: 250Ω
ACI Range 0~ Max. Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00):
0~20mA / 4~20mA / 0~10V
Range switching by Pr. 03-01 , Pr. 03-29
ACM internal circuit
Multi-function analog voltage Switch: the factory setting of AFM is 0~10V (Voltage
output mode), use the switch and Pr. 03-31 to change to current
mode (0~20 mA / 4 mA~20 mA). Must follow the indication
on the back side of front cover or page 6-1 of user manual
when using the switch.
Voltage mode
Range: 0~10 V (Pr. 03-31=0) corresponding to the max.
operating range of the control object
AFM
Max. output current : 2 mA
Max. Load : 5 kΩ
Current mode
Range : 0~20 mA (Pr. 03-31=1) / 4 mA~20 mA (Pr.
03-31=2) corresponding to the max. operating
range of the control object
Max. load : 500 Ω
ACM Analog Signal Common Common for analog terminals
6-4

Factory setting: S1/S2 shorted to +24V
Rated voltage: 24VDC ±10%; Max. voltage: 30VDC ±10%
S1,S2 Activation current: 6.67 mA ±10%
STO activation mode
Input voltage level: S1-DCM>0VDC or S2-DCM < 5VDC
STO response time ≤20ms (S1/S2 operate till the AC motor drive stop outputting current)
STO cut-off mode
DCM Input voltage level: S1-DCM>11VDC and S2-DCM < 30VDC
Power removal safety function acc. to EN 954-1 and IEC / EN 61508
Note: Please refer to CH17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION for more information.
SG+ Modbus RS-485
SG- Note: Please refer to CH12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS for more
SGND information. (Pr. 12-09-1 to Pr. 12-09-17)
PIN 1, 2, 6: Reserved
PIN 3, 7: SGND
RJ-45 PIN 4: SG-
PIN 5: SG+
PIN 8: +10VS (provide KPC-CC01 power supply)
6-5
6-6
Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesMS300
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart
7-4 AC/DC Reactor
7-5 Zero Phase Reactor
7-6 EMC Filter
7-7 EMC Shield Plate
7-8 Capacitive Filter
7-9 Conduit Box
7-10 Fan Kit
7-11 Keypad Panel Mounting
7-12 DIN-Rail Mounting
7-13 Mounting Adapter Plate
7-1
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories  MS300
The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive would substantially improve the drive’s performance. Please select an
applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
115V 1-phase
Applicable
Motor *1 125 % Braking Torque 10 % ED *2 Max. Brake Torque
Model Braking Resistor for
*3 Braking Resistor value Braking Min. Max. Total Peak
HP KW spec. for each each Brake Unit Current Resistor Braking Power
Torque
(kg-m) AC motor Drive *4 Part No. Amount Usage (A) Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
VFD1A6MS11XNSXX 0.25 0.2 0.1 80W 750Ω BR080W750 1 - 0.5 190.0 2 0.8
VFD4A8MS11XNSXX 1 0.75 0.5 80W 200Ω BR080W200 1 - 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
230V 1-phase
Applicable
Model
Braking Resistor for
*3 Braking Resistor value
each Brake Unit
Braking Min. Max. Total Peak
HP KW Torque spec. for each Current Resistor Braking Power
VFD1A6MS21XNSXX
0.25 0.2 0.1 80W 750Ω BR080W750 1 - 0.5 190.0 2 0.8
VFD1A6MS21AFSAA
VFD2A8MS21XNSXX
0.5 0.4 0.3 80W 200Ω BR080W200 1 - 1.9 95.0 4 1.5
VFD2A8MS21AFSAA
VFD4A8MS21XNSXX
1 0.75 0.5 80W 200Ω BR080W200 1 - 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
VFD4A8MS21AFSAA
VFD7A5MS21XNSXX
2 1.5 1 200W 91Ω BR200W091 1 - 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
VFD7A5MS21AFSAA
VFD11AMS21XNSXX
3 2.2 1.5 300W 70Ω BR300W070 1 - 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
VFD11AMS21AFSAA
230V 3-phase
Applicable
Model
*3 Braking Resistor value each Brake Unit Braking Min. Max. Total Peak
VFD4A8MS23XNSXX 1 0.75 0.5 80W 200Ω BR080W200 1 - 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
VFD7A5MS23XNSXX 2 1.5 1 200W 91Ω BR200W091 1 - 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
VFD11AMS23XNSXX 3 2.2 1.5 300W 70Ω BR300W070 1 - 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
VFD17AMS23XNSXX 5 3.7 2.5 400W 40Ω BR400W040 1 - 9.5 19.0 20 7.6
VFD25AMS23XNSXX 7.5 5.5 3.7 1000W 20Ω BR1K0W020 1 - 19 16.5 23 8.7
VFD33AMS23XNSXX 10 7.5 5.1 1000W 20Ω BR1K0W020 1 - 19 14.6 26 9.9
VFD49AMS23XNSXX 15 11 7.4 1500W 13Ω BR1K5W013 1 - 29 12.6 29 11.0

2 in
VFD65AMS23XNSXX 20 15 10.2 2000W 8.6Ω BR1K0W4P3 2 44 8.3 46 17.5
series
7-2
460V 3-phase
Applicable
Model
*3 Braking Resistor value each Brake Unit Braking Min. Max. Total Peak
VFD1A5MS43XNSXX
0.5 0.4 0.3 80W 750Ω BR080W750 1 1 380.0 2 1.5
VFD1A5MS43AFSAA
VFD2A7MS43XNSXX
1 0.75 0.5 80W 750Ω BR080W750 1 1 190.0 4 3.0
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA
VFD4A2MS43XNSXX
2 1.5 1 200W 360Ω BR200W360 1 2.1 126.7 6 4.6
VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
VFD5A5MS43XNSXX
3 2.2 1.5 300W 250Ω BR300W250 1 3 108.6 7 5.3
VFD5A5MS43AFSAA
VFD9A0MS43XNSXX
5 3.7 2.5 400W 150Ω BR400W150 1 5.1 84.4 9 6.8
VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
VFD13AMS43XNSXX
7.5 5.5 3.7 1000W 75Ω BR1K0W075 1 10.2 50.7 15 11.4
VFD13AMS43AFSAA
VFD17AMS43XNSXX
10 7.5 5.1 1000W 75Ω BR1K0W075 1 10.2 40.0 19 14.4
VFD17AMS43AFSAA
VFD25AMS43XNSXX
15 11 7.4 1500W 43Ω BR1K5W043 1 17.6 33.0 23 17.5
VFD25AMS43AFSAA
VFD32AMS43XNSXX 2 in
20 15 10.2 2000W 32Ω BR1K0W016 2 series 24 26.2 29 22.0
VFD32AMS43AFSAA
25 18 12.2 2000W 32Ω BR1K0W016 2 series 24 26.2 29 22.0
VFD38AMS43AFSAA
30 22 14.9 3000W 26Ω BR1K5W013 2 series 29 23.0 33 25.1
VFD45AMS43AFSAA
*1 Standard braking torque is 125 %. Because of the limited resistor power, the longest operation time for 10% ED is 10sec. (on:
10 sec. / off: 90 sec.).
*2 Please refer to the Brake Performance Curve for “Operation Duration & ED (%)” vs. “Braking Current”.
*3 Calculation for braking torque is for a 4-pole motor 1800 rpm.
*4 Resistors of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and at a surface temperature below 50°C.
Resistors of 1000W and above should be fixed on a surface with temperature below 350°C
NOTE
1. Please select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) acc. to Delta rules.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: ED (%) is defined to allow enough time for
the brake unit and brake resistor to
dissipate the heat generated by braking.
Recommended cycle time T0 is one
minute.
For safety concern, install a thermal overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in
conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) before to the drive for additional protection. The purpose of the
thermal overload relay is to protect the brake resistor from damage due to frequent or continuous braking.
Under such circumstances, just turn off the power to prevent damaging the brake resistor, brake unit and
drive.
2. If the drive or other equipment is damaged due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use
are not provided by Delta, warranty will be void.
7-3
3. Take the safety of the environment into consideration when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum
resistance value is to be used, consult local dealers for the calculation of the power.
4. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the
value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the right-most column in the
table). Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to operation
5. Thermal Overload Relay (TOR):
To choose a thermal overload relay is based on its overload capacity whether is appropriate to MS300. The
standard braking capacity of MS300 is 10% ED (Tripping time=10s). As shown in the figure below, thermal
overload relay continuously operates for 10 sec. and it can stand 260% overload (Host starting). Take a 460V,
15kW of MS300 as an example, its braking current is 24A (refer to the table on page 7-3), thus it can use the
thermal overload relay which rated current is 10A (10*260%=26A > 24A).
60
40
30
20
10
Second
Tripping tim e
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.8 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
Multiple of current setting xln (A)
7-4
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a.
Voltage / 1-phase Current Input / Output (Max.) Breaker rating Input (A)
Model
(3-phase) Normal duty Heavy duty Normal duty Heavy duty
VFD1A6MS11ANSXX
6.8 A / 1.8 A 6.0 A / 1.6 A 17.68 20
VFD1A6MS11ENSXX
VFD2A5MS11ANSXX
115V / 1φ 10.1 A / 2.7 A 9.4 A / 2.5 A 26.26 25
VFD2A5MS11ENSXX
VFD4A8MS11ANSXX
20.6 A / 5.5 A 18.0 A / 4.8 A 53.56 50
VFD4A8MS11ENSXX
VFD1A6MS21ANSXX
VFD1A6MS21ENSXX 3.8 A / 1.8 A 3.4 A / 1.6 A 9.88 15
VFD1A6MS21AFSXX
VFD2A8MS21ANSXX
VFD2A8MS21AFSXX
VFD4A8MS21ANSXX
VFD4A8MS21ENSXX 230V / 1φ 10.5 A / 5.0 A 10.1 A / 4.8 A 27.3 30
VFD4A8MS21AFSXX
VFD7A5MS21ANSXX
VFD7A5MS21AFSXX
VFD11AMS21ANSXX
VFD11AMS21ENSXX 26.3 A / 12.5 A 23.1 A / 11.0 A 68.38 70
VFD11AMS21AFSXX
VFD1A6MS23ANSXX
2.2 A / 1.8 A 1.9 A / 1.6 A 5.72 15
VFD1A6MS23ENSXX
VFD2A8MS23ANSXX
3.8 A / 3.2 A 3.4 A / 2.8 A 9.88 15
VFD2A8MS23ENSXX
VFD4A8MS23ANSXX
6.0 A / 5.0 A 5.8 A / 4.8 A 15.6 15
VFD4A8MS23ENSXX
VFD7A5MS23ANSXX
9.6 A / 8.0 A 9.0 A / 7.5 A 24.96 25
VFD7A5MS23ENSXX
VFD11AMS23ANSXX
15.0 A / 12.5 A 13.2 A / 11.0 A 39 40
VFD11AMS23ENSXX
230V / 3φ
VFD17AMS23ANSXX
23.4 A / 19.5 A 20.4 A / 17.0 A 60.84 60
VFD17AMS23ENSXX
VFD25AMS23ANSXX
32.4 A / 27.0 A 30.0 A / 25.0 A 64.8 63
VFD25AMS23ENSXX
VFD33AMS23ANSXX
43.2 A / 36.0 A 39.6 A / 33.0 A 86.4 90
VFD33AMS23ENSXX
VFD49AMS23ANSXX
61.2 A / 51.0 A 58.8 A / 49.0 A 122.4 125
VFD49AMS23ENSXX
VFD65AMS23ANSXX
30.8 A / 28.0 A 27.5 A / 25.0 A 165.6 160
VFD65AMS23ENSXX
VFD1A5MS43ANSXX
VFD1A5MS43ENSXX 460V / 3φ 2.5 A / 1.8 A 2.1 A / 1.5 A 5.2 15
VFD1A5MS43AFSXX
7-5
Voltage / 1-phase Current Input / Output (Max.) Breaker rating Input (A)
Model
(3-phase) Normal duty Heavy duty Normal duty Heavy duty
VFD2A7MS43ANSXX
VFD2A7MS43AFSXX
VFD4A2MS43ANSXX
VFD4A2MS43AFSXX
VFD5A5MS43ANSXX
VFD5A5MS43AFSXX
VFD9A0MS43ANSXX
VFD9A0MS43AFSXX
VFD13AMS43ANSXX
VFD13AMS43AFSXX
460V / 3φ
VFD17AMS43ANSXX
VFD17AMS43AFSXX
VFD25AMS43ANSXX
VFD25AMS43AFSXX
VFD32AMS43ANSXX
VFD32AMS43AFSXX
VFD38AMS43ANSXX
VFD38AMS43AFSXX
VFD45AMS43ANSXX
VFD45AMS43AFSXX
7-6
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart

 The fuse specifications lower than below table is allowed.
 For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in
accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes.
To fulfill this requirement, use the UL classified fuses.
 For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfill this requirement,
use the UL classified fuses.
Voltage/ 1-phase Current Input / Output (Max.) Branch Circuit Fuses Output
Model
(3-phase) Normal duty Heavy duty (A)
VFD1A6MS11ANSXX 7.2
6.8 A / 1.8 A 6.0 A / 1.6 A
VFD1A6MS11ENSXX Class T JJS-10
VFD2A5MS11ANSXX 10.8
115V / 1φ 10.1 A / 2.7 A 9.4 A / 2.5 A
VFD4A8MS11ANSXX 22
20.6 A / 5.5 A 18.0 A / 4.8 A
VFD1A6MS21ANSXX 7.2
VFD1A6MS21ENSXX 3.8 A / 1.8 A 3.4 A / 1.6 A
VFD1A6MS21AFSXX Class T JJS-10
VFD4A8MS21ANSXX 20
VFD4A8MS21ENSXX 230V / 1φ 10.5 A / 5.0 A 10.1 A / 4.8 A
VFD7A5MS21ANSXX 34
VFD11AMS21ANSXX 50
VFD11AMS21ENSXX 26.3 A / 12.5 A 23.1 A / 11.0 A
VFD11AMS21AFSXX Class T JJS-50
VFD1A6MS23ANSXX 7.2
2.2 A / 1.8 A 1.9 A / 1.6 A
3.8 A / 3.2 A 3.4 A / 2.8 A
VFD4A8MS23ANSXX 20
6.0 A / 5.0 A 5.8 A / 4.8 A
VFD7A5MS23ANSXX 32
230V / 3φ 9.6 A / 8.0 A 9.0 A / 7.5 A
VFD11AMS23ANSXX 50
15.0 A / 12.5 A 13.2 A / 11.0 A
VFD11AMS23ENSXX Class T JJS-50
VFD17AMS23ANSXX 78
23.4 A / 19.5 A 20.4 A / 17.0 A
VFD25AMS23ANSXX 59.4
32.4 A / 27.0 A 30.0 A / 25.0 A
7-7
Voltage/ 1-phase Current Input / Output (Max.) Branch Circuit Fuses Output
Model
(3-phase) Normal duty Heavy duty (A)
43.2 A / 36.0 A 39.6 A / 33.0 A
61.2 A / 51.0 A 58.8 A / 49.0 A
82.8 A / 69.0 A 78.0 A / 65.0 A
VFD1A5MS43ANSXX 7.2
VFD2A7MS43ANSXX 12
VFD5A5MS43ANSXX 26
VFD9A0MS43ANSXX 42
VFD13AMS43ENSXX 460V / 3φ 17.3 A / 15.7 A 14.3 A / 13.0 A
7-8
7-4 AC/DC Reactor

Installing an AC reactor in the input side of AC motor drive can increase line impedance, improve
power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference generated from motor drive. Also momentary
voltage surges or abnormal current spikes are reduced. For example, when the mains power capacity is
higher than 500 kVA, or a switching capacitor bank is used, momentary voltage and current spikes may
damage the AC motor drive’s internal circuit. An AC reactor in the input side of the AC motor drive
protects it by suppressing surges.
Installation
An AC input reactor is installed in series with the mains power to the three input phases R S T as
shown below:
AC reac tor
B1
B2
E
(input s ide)
-
+
E
W/T 3
T/L3
S/ L2
U /T 1 V/ T2
Power inputs M
R / L1
Connecting an AC input reactor
115V / 1ø Normal duty / Heavy duty

115V / 50~60 Hz MS Series Normal Duty / Heavy Duty Input AC Reactor
Saturation
Rated Current Input/ Output Input Reactor DC Reactor DC Reactor
Model ND / HD
ND / HD (Arms) Reactor (mH) Delta Part # (mH) Delta Part #
Current (Arms)
VFD1A6MS11ANSAA
1.8 / 1.6 2.7 / 3.2 5.857 DR005D0585 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD1A6MS11ENSAA
VFD2A5MS11ANSAA
2.7 / 2.5 4.05 / 5 5.857 DR005D0585 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD2A5MS11ENSAA
VFD4A8MS11ANSAA
5.5 / 5 8.25 / 9.6 3.66 DR008D0366 3.66 DR008D0366
VFD4A8MS11ENSAA
230V / 1ø Normal duty / Heavy duty

230V / 50~60Hz MS Series Normal Duty / Heavy Duty Input AC Reactor
Saturation
Model ND / HD
Current (Arms)
VFD1A6MS21ANSAA
VFD1A6MS21ENSAA 1.8 / 1.6 2.7 / 3.2 14.031 DR004D1403 14.031 DR004D1403
VFD1A6MS21AFSAA
VFD2A8MS21ANSAA
VFD2A8MS21ENSAA 3.2 / 2.8 4.8 / 5.6 5.857 DR005D0585 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD2A8MS21AFSAA
7-9

Saturation
Model ND / HD
Current (Arms)
VFD4A8MS21ANSAA
VFD4A8MS21ENSAA 5 / 4.8 7.5 / 9.6 3.66 DR008D0366 3.66 DR008D0366
VFD4A8MS21AFSAA
VFD7A5MS21ANSAA
VFD7A5MS21ENSAA 8.5 / 7.5 12.75 / 15 2.662 DR011D0266 2.662 DR011D0266
VFD7A5MS21AFSAA
VFD11AMS21ANSAA
VFD11AMS21ENSAA 12.5 / 11 18.75 / 22 1.722 DR017D0172 1.722 DR017D0172
VFD11AMS21AFSAA
230V / 3ø Phase Normal Duty / Heavy Duty

Saturation
Model ND / HD
Current (Arms)
VFD1A6MS23ANSAA
1.8 / 1.6 2.7 / 3.2 2.536 DR005A0254 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD1A6MS23ENSAA
VFD2A8MS23ANSAA
3.2 / 2.8 4.8 / 5.6 2.536 DR005A0254 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD2A8MS23ENSAA
VFD4A8MS23ANSAA
5 / 4.8 7.5 / 9.6 2.536 DR005A0254 5.857 DR005D0585
VFD4A8MS23ENSAA
VFD7A5MS23ANSAA
8 / 7.5 12 / 15 1.585 DR008A0159 3.66 DR008D0366
VFD7A5MS23ENSAA
VFD11AMS23ANSAA
12.5 / 11 18.75 / 22 0.746 DR017AP746 2.662 DR011D0266
VFD11AMS23ENSAA
VFD17AMS23ANSAA
19.5 / 17 29.25 / 34 0.507 DR025AP507 1.722 DR017D0172
VFD17AMS23ENSAA
VFD25AMS23ANSAA
27 / 25 40.5 / 50 0.32 DR033AP320 1.172 DR025D0117
VFD25AMS23ENSAA
VFD33AMS23ANSAA
36 / 33 54 / 66 0.216 DR049AP215 0.851 DR033DP851
VFD33AMS23ENSAA
VFD49AMS23ANSAA
51 / 46 76.5 / 92 0.216 DR049AP215 0.574 DR049DP574
VFD49AMS23ENSAA
VFD65AMS23ANSAA
69 / 65 103.5 / 130 0.169 DR075AP170 0.432 DR065DP432
VFD65AMS23ENSAA
460V /3ø Normal Duty / Heavy Duty

460V/ 50~60Hz MS Series Normal Duty Input AC Reactor
Rated
Saturation
Current Input/ Output Input Reactor DC Reactor DC Reactor
Model ND / HD
ND / HD Reactor (mH) Delta Part # (mH) Delta Part #
Current (Arms)
(Arms)
VFD1A5MS43ANSAA
VFD1A5MS43ENSAA 1.8 / 1.5 2.7 / 3 8.102 DR003A0810 18.709 DR003D1870
VFD1A5MS43AFSAA
7-10
460V/ 50~60Hz MS Series Normal Duty Input AC Reactor

Rated
Saturation
Current Input/ Output Input Reactor DC Reactor DC Reactor
Model ND / HD
ND / HD Reactor (mH) Delta Part # (mH) Delta Part #
Current (Arms)
(Arms)
VFD2A7MS43ANSAA
VFD2A7MS43ENSAA 3 / 2.7 4.5 / 5.4 6.077 DR004A0607 18.709 DR003D1870
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA
VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
VFD4A2MS43ANSAA 4.6 / 4.2 6.9 / 8.4 4.05 DR006A0405 14.031 DR004D1403
VFD4A2MS43ENSAA
VFD5A5MS43AFSAA
VFD5A5MS43ANSAA 6.5 / 5.5 9.75 / 11 2.7 DR009A0270 9.355 DR006D0935
VFD5A5MS43ENSAA
VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA 10.5 / 9 15.75 / 18 2.315 DR010A0231 5.345 DR010D0534
VFD9A0MS43ENSAA
VFD13AMS43AFSAA
VFD13AMS43ANSAA 15.7 / 13 23.55 / 26 1.174 DR018A0117 3.119 DR018D0311
VFD13AMS43ENSAA
VFD17AMS43AFSAA
VFD17AMS43ANSAA 20.5 / 17 30.75 / 34 0.881 DR024AP881 3.119 DR018D0311
VFD17AMS43ENSAA
VFD25AMS43AFSAA
VFD25AMS43ANSAA 28 / 25 42 / 50 0.66 DR032AP660 2.338 DR024D0233
VFD25AMS43ENSAA
VFD32AMS43AFSAA
VFD32AMS43ANSAA 36 / 32 54 / 64 0.639 DR038AP639 1.754 DR032D0175
VFD32AMS43ENSAA
VFD38AMS43AFSAA
VFD38AMS43ANSAA 41.5 / 38 62.25 / 76 0.541 DR045AP541 1.477 DR038D0147
VFD38AMS43ENSAA
VFD45AMS43AFSAA
VFD45AMS43ANSAA 49 / 45 73.5 / 90 0.405 DR060AP405 1.247 DR045D0124
VFD45AMS43ENSAA
7-11
AC input reactor dimension and specification:
Screw Location Torque

Terminal 5.32~7.09 kg-cm / [6.12~8.16 lb-in.] / [0.6~0.8 Nm]
PE bolt 8.86~10.63 kg-cm / [10.2~12.24 lb-in.] / [1.0~1.2 Nm]
Input AC reactor A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D

Delta part #
DR005A0254 96 100 60 6*9 42 60 40 M4
DR008A0159 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR011A0115 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR017AP746 120 120 93 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR025AP507 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR033AP320 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
Unit：mm
7-12

Input AC reactor A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D

Delta part #
DR049AP215 180 195 160 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2~1.4 M4
DR065AP163 180 205 160 6*12 115 85 122 35 2.5~3.0 M4
Unit：mm
7-13
Input AC reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T PE

Delta part #
DR075AP170 240 220 205 42 165 151 95 7*13 152 176 85 20*3 M8
Unit：mm
7-14

PE bolt 8.86~10.63 kg-cm / [10.2~12.24 lb-in.] / [1.0~1.2 Nm]
Input AC reactor A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D

Delta part #
DR003A0810 96 100 60 6*9 42 60 40 M4
DR004A0607 120 120 88 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR006A0405 120 120 88 6*12 60 805 60 M4
DR009A0270 150 150 88 6*12 74 107 75 M4
DR010A0231 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR012A0202 150 150 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR018A0117 150 155 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR024AP881 150 155 112 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR032AP660 180 175 138 6*12 114 122 85 M6
Unit：mm
7-15

Input AC reactor A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D

Delta part #
DR038AP639 180 195 160 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2~1.4 M4
DR045AP541 235 235 145 7*13 85 / 176 16 1.2~1.4 M6
Unit：mm
7-16
Input AC reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T PE

Delta part #
DR060AP405 240 225 210 44 170 163 100 7*13 152 176 97 20*3 M8
Unit：mm
7-17
A DC reactor can also, improve power factor, reduce input current, and reduce interference
generated from motor drive. A DC reactor stabilizes the DC-bus voltage. Compared to an AC input reactor,
the advantages are smaller size, lower price and lower voltage drop (lower power dissipation)
Installation
DC reactor is installed between terminals +1 and +2. The jumper, which is shown as below, needs to
be removed before installation.
Note: 115V models are no DC choke.
Wiring of DC reactor
7-18
DC reactor dimension and specification:
The length of
screw should
keep away
from the hole.
DC reactor Rated Current Saturation current DC reactor A B C D E Dimension

Delta Part # (Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
DR005D0585 5 8.64 5.857 79 78 107 64 59 9.5*5.5
DR008D0366 8 12.78 3.660 79 82 107 63.5 63.5 9.5*5.5
DR011D0266 11 18 2.662 99 96 128 80 72.5 9*6
DR017D0172 17 28.8 1.722 99 102 128 80 80 9*6
DR025D0117 25 43.2 1.172 117 107 154 95 86 12*8
DR033DP851 33 55.8 0.851 117 113 154 95 92 12*8
DR049DP574 49 84.6 0.574 136 123 170 111 100 12*8
DR065DP432 65 111.6 0.432 136 133 170 111 110 12*8
DR075DP391 75 127.8 0.391 153 150 191 125 127 12*8
DR090DP325 90 154.8 0.325 153 154 191 125 131 12*8

DR003D1870 3 5.22 18.709 79 82 107 63.5 64 9.5*5.5
DR004D1403 4 6.84 14.031 79 87 107 63.5 68.5 9.5*5.5
DR006D0935 6 10.26 9.355 99 92 128 80 68.5 9*6
DR009D0623 9 14.58 6.236 99 104 128 80 81.5 9*6
DR010D0534 10.5 17.1 5.345 99 108 128 80 85 9*6
7-19

DR012D0467 12 19.8 4.677 99 119 128 80 96 9*6
DR018D0311 18 30.6 3.119 117 127 142 95 106 12*8
DR024D0233 24 41.4 2.338 117 134 143 95 113 12*8
DR032D0175 32 54 1.754 136 131 170 111 108 12*8
DR038D0147 38 64.8 1.477 153 143 186 125 120 12*8
DR045D0124 45 77.4 1.247 153 149 186 125 126 12*8
Length of Motor Cable
1. Leakage current to affect the motor and counter measurement
Due to larger parasitic capacitances in longer motor cables, the leakage current increases.
This can activate the over-current protection and incorrect display of current. In worst case the drive
can be damaged.
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total motor cable length is the sum of
the cable length from AC motor drive to each motor.
For 460V series AC motor drives, when an overload relay is installed between the drive and the motor
to protect motor from overheating, the connecting cable must be shorter than 50m.
However, the overload relay could still malfunction. To prevent this, install an AC output reactor
(optional) to the drive and/or lower the carrier frequency setting (Pr. 00-17).
2. Surge voltage to affect the motor and counter measurement
When a motor is driven by a PWM signal from an AC motor drive, the motor terminals can easily
experience surge voltages (dv/dt) due to the IGBT switching and the cable capacitance. When the
motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages (dv/dt) may reduce motor
insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
a. Use a motor with enhanced insulation
b. Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
c. Reduce the motor cable length to the values below
The suggested motor shielded cable length in the following table complies with IEC 60034-17,
which is suitable for motors with a rated voltage ≤500 Vac and with an insulation level of ≥1.35 kVp-p
Without AC reactor With AC reactor
110V 1-phase Rated current
Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded
Model (ND) (Arms)
(meter) cable (meter) (meter) cable (meter)
VFD1A6MS11ANSAA
1.8 50 75 75 115
VFD1A6MS11ENSAA
VFD2A5MS11ANSAA
2.7 50 75 75 115
VFD2A5MS11ENSAA
VFD4A8MS11ANSAA
5.5 50 75 75 115
VFD4A8MS11ENSAA
7-20

Model (ND) (Arms)
VFD1A6MS21ANSAA
VFD1A6MS21ENSAA 1.8 50 75 75 115
VFD1A6MS21AFSAA
VFD2A8MS21ANSAA
VFD2A8MS21ENSAA 3.2 50 75 75 115
VFD2A8MS21AFSAA
VFD4A8MS21ANSAA
VFD4A8MS21ENSAA 1.8 50 75 75 115
VFD4A8MS21AFSAA
VFD7A5MS21ANSAA
VFD7A5MS21ENSAA 3.2 50 75 75 115
VFD7A5MS21AFSAA
VFD11AMS21ANSAA
VFD11AMS21ENSAA 5 50 75 75 115
VFD11AMS21AFSAA

Model (ND) (Arms)
VFD1A6MS23ANSAA
1.8 50 75 75 115
VFD1A6MS23ENSAA
VFD2A8MS23ANSAA
3.2 50 75 75 115
VFD2A8MS23ENSAA
VFD4A8MS23ANSAA
5 50 75 75 115
VFD4A8MS23ENSAA
VFD7A5MS23ANSAA
8 50 75 75 115
VFD7A5MS23ENSAA
VFD11AMS23ANSAA
12.5 50 75 75 115
VFD11AMS23ENSAA
VFD17AMS23ANSAA
19.5 50 75 75 115
VFD17AMS23ENSAA
VFD25AMS23ANSAA
27 50 75 75 115
VFD25AMS23ENSAA
VFD33AMS23ANSAA
36 100 150 150 225
VFD33AMS23ENSAA
VFD49AMS23ANSAA
51 100 150 150 225
VFD49AMS23ENSAA
VFD65AMS23ANSAA
69 100 150 150 225
VFD65AMS23ENSAA
7-21

Model (ND) (Arms)
VFD1A5MS43ANSAA
VFD1A5MS43ENSAA 1.8 35 50 50 90
VFD1A5MS43AFSAA
VFD2A7MS43ANSAA
VFD2A7MS43ENSAA 3 35 50 50 90
VFD2A7MS43AFSAA
VFD4A2MS43ANSAA
VFD4A2MS43ENSAA 4.6 35 50 50 90
VFD4A2MS43AFSAA
VFD5A5MS43ANSAA
VFD5A5MS43ENSAA 6.5 50 75 75 115
VFD5A5MS43AFSAA
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA
VFD9A0MS43ENSAA 10.5 50 75 75 115
VFD9A0MS43AFSAA
VFD13AMS43ANSAA
VFD13AMS43ENSAA 15.7 50 75 75 115
VFD13AMS43AFSAA
VFD17AMS43ANSAA
VFD17AMS43ENSAA 20.5 100 150 150 225
VFD17AMS43AFSAA
VFD25AMS43ANSAA
VFD25AMS43ENSAA 28 100 150 150 225
VFD25AMS43AFSAA
VFD32AMS43ANSAA
VFD32AMS43ENSAA 36 100 150 150 225
VFD32AMS43AFSAA
VFD38AMS43ANSAA
VFD38AMS43ENSAA 41.5 100 150 150 225
VFD38AMS43AFSAA
VFD45AMS43ANSAA
VFD45AMS43ENSAA 49 100 150 150 225
VFD45AMS43AFSAA
7-22
7-5 Zero Phase Reactors

Interferences can also be suppressed by installing a zero phase reactor at the mains input or the
motor output of the drive, depending on where the interference is. Delta provides two types of zero phase
reactors to solve interference problems.
A. Casing with mechanical fixed part
This solution is for mains input/motor output side and can endure higher loading and be used at
higher frequencies. Higher impedance can be achieved by increasing the number of turns.
Unit: mm
Model A B C D E F G(Ø) To use w/

RF008X00A 99 73 36.5 29 56.5 86 5.5 Motor cable
B. Casing without mechanical fixed part.
This solution has higher performance: high initial magnetic permeability, high saturation induction
density, low iron loss and perfect temperature characteristic. If it does not need to be fixed mechanically,
this solution is suggested
Unit: mm
Model A B C
T60006L2040W453 22.5 43.1 18.5
T60006L2050W565 36.3 53.5 23.4
7-23
Installation
During installation, please pass the cable through at least one zero-phase reactor.
Use a suitable cable type (insulation class and wire section) so that the cable passes easily through the
zero-phase reactor. Do not pass the grounding cable through zero-phase reactor; only pass the motor
wire through.
With longer motor cables the zero-phase reactor can effectively reduce interference at the motor
output. Install the zero-phase reactor as close to the output of the drive as possible. Figure A is the
installation diagram of a single turn zero-phase reactor. If the diameter allows several turns, the
installation of a multi-turn zero-phase reactor is as shown in Figure B. The more turns, the better the noise
suppression effect.
Figure A: Single turn wiring diagram of a shieling wire with a zero-phase reactor
Zero Phase Reactor
R/L1 U/T1
Power
Supply
S/L2 V/T2 MOTOR
T/L3 W/T3
Figure B: Multi-Turn Zero Phase Reactor

Installation notices
Install the zero-phase reactor at the output terminal of the frequency converter (U.V.W.).
After the zero-phase reactor is installed, the electromagnetic radiation and load stress emitted by the
wiring of the frequency converter is reduced. The number of zero-phase reactor required for the drive
depends on the length of wiring and the voltage of the drive.
The normal operating temperature of the zero-phase reactor should be lower than 85°C (176°F).
However, when the zero-phase reactor is saturated, its temperature may exceed 85°C (176°F). Please
increase the number of zero-phase reactors to avoid saturation. The following are reasons that might
cause saturation of the zero-phase reactors. For example: The wiring of the drive is too long; the drive
has several sets of load; the wiring is in parallel; the drive uses high capacitance wiring. If the
temperature of the zero-phase reactor exceeds 85°C (176°F) during the operation of the drive, the
number of the zero-phase reactor should be increased.
7-24
Recommended max. wiring gauge when installing zero phase reactor
Max. Wire Gauge AWG Max. Wire Gauge AWG

Model # of Zero Max, Wire Gauge (1Cx3) (1Cx4)
Phase Reactor or LUG width
75 °C 90 °C 75 °C 90 °C
RF008X00A 13 mm 3 AWG 1 AWG 3 AWG 1 AWG
T600006L2040W453 11 mm 9 AWG 4 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG
T600006L2050W565 16 mm 1 AWG 2/0 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG
Zero Phase Reactor for Signal Cable
To solve interference problems between signal cables and electric devices, install a zero phase
reactor on signal cable. Install it on the signal cable which is the source of the interference to suppress
the noise for a better signal. The model names and dimensions are in the table below.
Model A B C
T60004L2016W620 10.7 17.8 8.0
T60004L2025W622 17.5 27.3 12.3
Unit: mm
7-25
7-6 EMC Filter

Radiated
Conducted emission
emission
max. motor cable
max. motor
length
Input Recommended model of cable length
Frame Model # Current Filter model # zero-phase reactor C1 C2 C2
(A) 30m 100m 100m
Position to place zero phase reactor
DELTA VAC *1 *2 *3 N/A *1 *2 *3
A VFD1A6MS11ANSAA 6.8 EMF11AM21A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 NA
A VFD1A6MS21ANSAA 3.8 EMF11AM21A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
A VFD4A8MS23ANSAA 6 EMF10AM23A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
A VFD1A5MS43ANSAA 2.5 EMF6A0M43A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ NA ✓
A VFD2A7MS43ANSAA 4.2 EMF6A0M43A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ NA ✓
A VFD2A5MS11ANSAA 10.1 EMF11AM21A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 NA
B VFD4A8MS21ANSAA 10.5 EMF11AM21A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
B VFD7A5MS23ANSAA 9.6 EMF10AM23A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
B VFD4A2MS43ANSAA 6.4 EMF6A0M43A RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ NA ✓
C VFD4A8MS11ANSAA 20.6 EMF27AM21B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 NA
C VFD7A5MS21ANSAA 17.9 EMF27AM21B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ NA ✓
C VFD11AMS21ANSAA 26.3 EMF27AM21B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ NA ✓
C VFD11AMS23ANSAA 15 EMF24AM23B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
C VFD17AMS23ANSAA 23.4 EMF24AM23B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
C VFD5A5MS43ANSAA 7.2 EMF12AM43B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 NA
C VFD9A0MS43ANSAA 11.6 EMF12AM43B RF008X00A T60006L2040W453 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
D VFD25AMS23ANSAA 32.4 EMF33AM23B RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
D VFD13AMS43ANSAA 17.3 EMF23AM43B RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 ✓ ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓ ✓
D VFD17AMS43ANSAA 22.6 EMF23AM43B RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 ✓ ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓ ✓
E VFD33AMS23ANSAA 43.2 B84143D0075R127 RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
E VFD25AMS43ANSAA 30.8 B84143D0050R127 RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 NA
F VFD65AMS23ANSAA 82.8 B84143D0090R127 RF008X00A T60006L2050W565 ✓ ✓ NA ✓ ✓
EMC
Filter Drive Motor
7-26
Filter Dimension
EMF11AM21A
EMF10AM23A
EMF6A0M43A
Screw Torque
M5 * 2 16~20 kg-cm / [13.9~17.3 lb-in.] / [1.56~1.96 Nm]
M4 * 2 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.8 lb-in.] / [1.38~1.56 Nm]
72.0 [2.83]
M5 screw
54.0 [2.13] TORQUE:16-18kgf-cm
23.0 [0.91] 20.0 [0.79]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]
130.0 [5.12]
223.0 [8.78]
234.0 [9.21]
223.0 [8.78]
118.0 [4.65]
56.0 [2.20]
60.0 [2.36]
6.5 [0.26]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]

54.0 [2.13]
30.0 [1.18]
55.0 [2.17]
7-27
EMF27AM21B; EMF24AM23B
EMF33AM23B; EMF12AM43B
EMF23AM43B
Screw Torque
M5 * 4 16~20 kg-cm / [13.9~17.3 lb-in.] / [1.56~1.96 Nm]
109.0 [4.29]
94.0 [3.70] M5 screw
TORQUE:16-18kgf-cm
76.0 [2.99] 28.0 [1.10] 29.1 [1.14]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]
73.0 [2.87]
263.0 [10.35]
263.0 [10.35]
144.5 [5.69]
193.8 [7.63]
275.0 [10.83]
5.5 [0.22] 5.5 [0.22]

76.0 [2.99] 28.0 [1.10] 29.1 [1.14]
86.0 [3.39]
7-28
TDK B84143D0050R127 (50A)
TDK B84143D0075R127 (75A), TDK B84143D0090R127 (90A)
7-29
7-7 EMC Shield Plate

EMC Shield Plate (for use with use shielded cable)
Frame EMC Shield Plate model Reference figure
A MKM-EPA
B MKM-EPB
C MKM-EPC
D MKM-EPD
E MKM-EPE
F MKM-EPF
7-30
Installation
(Frame A model as an example)
1. As on the right, fix the iron plate on the AC motor drive.
Torque value:
Frame Screw Torque
A M3.5 6~8 kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59~0.78 Nm]
B M4 6~8 kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59~0.78 Nm]
C M4 6~8 kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59~0.78 Nm]
D M3 4~6 kg-cm / [3.5~5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39~0.59 Nm]
E M3 4~6 kg-cm / [3.5~5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39~0.59 Nm]
F M4 6~8 kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59~0.78 Nm]
2. After selecting suitable R-clip according to the wire gauge used,

fix the R-clip on shield plate.
Screw Torque
M4 6~8 kg-cm / [5.2~6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59~0.78 Nm]
Dimensions of EMC Shield Plate Dimensions of Shield Plate
a Model mm [inch.]
a b
MKM-EPA 69.3 [2.73] 80.0 [3.15]
MKM-EPB 67.7 [2.67] 79.7 [3.14]
MKM-EPC 78.0 [3.07] 91.0 [3.58]

b
MKM-EPD 103.4 [4.07] 97.0 [3.82]
MKM-EPE 124.3 [4.89] 77.4 [3.05]
MKM-EPF 168.0 [6.61] 80.0 [3.15]
7-31
Recommended wire mounting method

Frame Model of EMC Shield Plate Reference figure
A MKM-EPA
B MKM-EPB
C MKM-EPC
D MKM-EPD
E MKM-EPE
F MKM-EPF
7-32
7-8 Capacitive Filter

Installation diagram:
The capacitive filter (CXY101-43A) is a simple filter which can support basic filtering and noise
interference reduction.
Capacitor
Filter
R U
Grid S V Motor
T VFD W
PE PE
Capacitive filter and drive wiring figure：
R/L1 S/L2 T/ L3
Specification:
Model Capacitance Temperature range

Cx：1 μF ± 20 %
CXY101-43A -40 ~ +85°C
Cy：0.1 μF ± 20 %
7-33
Dimension：
CXY101-43A Unit：mm [inch]
26.6 [1.05]
4.5 [0.18]
77 .5 [3 .05 ]
77 .5 [3 .05 ]
10 [0.39]
350 [13.78]
43.5 [1.71]
40.5 [1.59]
4.0 [0.16]
35.5 [1.40]
4.5 [0.18]
86 .5 [3 .41 ] 4.0 [ 0.1 6]
31 .6 [1 .24 ]
7-34
7-9 Conduit Box

Conduit box are in compliance with protection level NEMA 1 / UL Type 1
Frame A (A1~A2) Frame A (A3~A5)

Model of conduit box: MKM-CBA0 Model of conduit box: MKM-CBA
218.0 [8.58]
218.0 [8.58]
90.0 [3.54]
90.0 [3.54]
71 . 5 [ 2 . 81 ] 86 . 6 [ 3 . 41 ]
71 . 5 [ 2 . 81 ] 101. 4 [ 3 . 99 ]
]
[ 0 .89
] 22.5
[ 0 .8 9
22.5
Unit : mm [ inch ]
Unit : mm [inch ]
7-35
Frame B
Model of conduit box: MKM-CBB
218.0 [8.58]
76.0 [2.99]
71 .9 [ 2 . 83] 87. 7 [ 3 . 45 ]
9]
[ 0.8
22 .5
Unit: mm [inch.]
7-36
Frame C
Model of conduit box: MKM-CBC
219.0 [8.62]
62.0 [2.44]
87 . 0 [ 3 . 43 ] 89 . 2 [ 3 . 51 ]
]
0. 89
[
2 .5
2
9]
1.0
[
7.8
2
Unit: mm [inch.]
7-37
Frame D
Model of conduit box: MKM-CBD
244.0 [9.61]
37.0 [1.46]
8 8 . 5 [3 . 48 ]
103 .7 [ 4 .08 ]
9]
0 .8
[
.5
22 6]
1. 3
[
4.5
3
Unit : mm [ inch ]
Unit: mm [inch.]
7-38
Frame E
Model of conduit box: MKM-CBE
292.0 [11.50]
42.0 [1.65]
1 24 . 5 [ 4 . 90 ] 8 7. 1 [ 3 . 43 ]
]
0 .8 9
2 2 .5 [
2]
[ 1. 7
4 3. 7
Unit : m m [ inch ]
Unit: mm [inch.]
7-39
Frame F
Model of conduit box: MKM-CBF
356.0 [14.02]
56.0 [2.20]
168. 7 [6 . 64 ] 90. 8 [ 3. 57 ]
.89]
22.5 [ 0
.97]
50.1 [ 1
Unit: mm [inch.]
7-40
Installation:
Recommended screw torque:
M3: 4-6 kg-cm / [3.5-5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39-0.59 Nm]
M3.5: 4-6 kg-cm / [3.5-5.2 lb-in.] / [0.39-0.59 Nm]
M4: 6-8 kg-cm / [5.2-6.9 lb-in.] / [0.59-0.78 Nm]
Frame A
1) 2)
3) 4)
5)
7-41
Frame B~F
1) 2)
3) 4)
5)
7-42
7-10 Fan Kit

Frame Fan Model Fan Kit
A MKM-FKMA
B MKM-FKMB
C MKM-FKMC
D MKM-FKMD
E MKM-FKME
F MKM-FKMF
Fan Removal
1. As shown in figure on the right, press the
tabs on both sides of the fan to remove it.
2. Disconnect the power cable when

removing the fan.
7-43
7-11 Keypad Panel Mounting

KPMS-LE01
Method 1: Direct installation on a plate (unit: mm [inch])
Torque:
8~9 kg-cm
[6.94~7.81 lb-in.]
[0.78~0.88 Nm]
Method 2: Mounting through a plate (unit: mm [inch])

Thickness = 1.2 [0.05] or 2.0 [0.08]
※ The extension cable models and cable length specifications are in the following table：
Models Extension Cable Length (Unit：mm [inch] )
EG0610C 600 [23.62]

EG1010C 1000 [39.37]
EG2010C 2000 [78.74]
EG3010C 3000 [118.11]
EG5010C 5000 [196.85]
7-44
7-12 DIN-Rail Mounting

MKM-DRB (applicable for Frame A and Frame B)
72.0[2.83] 8.0[0.31]
Screw Torque
8~10 kg-cm
M4*2PCS [6.9~8.7 lb-in.]
[0.7 ~0 98 Nm]
142.0[5.59]
4.6[0.18]
(M4 NUT)
10.2[0.40]
unit: mm[inch]
MKM-DRC (applicable for Frame C)
Screw Torque
87.0[3.43] 8.0[0.31]
10~12 kg-cm
M5*4PCS [8.7~10.4 lb-in.]
[0.98~1.18 Nm]
157.0[6.18]
5.7[0.22]
10.2[0.40]
(M5 NUT)
unit: mm[inch]
7-45
Installation
Screw Torque
8~10 kg-cm
MKM-DRB M4*P0.7*2PCS [6.9~8.7 lb-in.]
[0.78~0.98 Nm]
10~12 kg-cm
MKM-DRC M5*P0.8*4PCS [8.7~10.4 lb-in.]
[0.98~1.18 Nm]
MKM-DRB: for frame A. B

MKM-DRC: for frame C
7-46
7-13 Mounting Adapter Plate

This mounting adapter accessory is to change the wiring way of MS300/MH300 series to provide
flexible installation. It changes the wiring from mains input/motor output at the bottom to mains input from
the top and motor output from the bottom. When you change drive from VFD-E / VFD-EL series to MS300
/ MH300 series, you can use original wiring method, the correspondence table is showing as below.
Series
MS/MH300 VFD-E VFD-EL
Models
MKM-MAPB Frame A~B Frame A Frame A
MKM-MAPC Frame C Frame B Frame B
7-47
MKM-MAPB:
Applicable for Frame A and B Installation
L 1 L 2 L 3
Unit: mm [inch]
Screw Torque
M4 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 lb-in.] / [1.37~1.56 Nm]
M5 16~20 kg-cm / [13.9~17.4 lb-in.] / [1.56~1.96 Nm]
7-48
MKM-MAPC:
Applicable for frame C Installation
1
L L 2 L 3
Unit: mm [inch]
Screw Torque
M4 14~16 kg-cm / [12.2~13.9 lb-in.] / [1.37~1.56 Nm]
M5 16~20 kg-cm / [13.9~17.4 lb-in.] / [1.56~1.96 Nm]
7-49
7-50
Chapter 8 Optional Cards MS300
Chapter 8 Option Cards
8-1 Option Card Installation
8-2 CMM-MOD01 Modbus/TCP option card
8-3 CMM-PD01 PROFIBUS option card
8-4 CMM-DN01 DeviceNet option card
8-5 CMM-EIP01 Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP option card
8-6 CMM-COP01 CANopen option card
8-7 EMM-BPS01 Back-up Power Supply card
8-1
The option cards mentioned in this chapter are optional items. Please select applicable option cards
for your drive or contact your local distributor for suggestion. The option cards can improve the
performance of the drive significantly.
To prevent damage to the drive during installation of the option cards, please remove the cover
before wiring.
8-1 Option Card Installation

1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Open the front cover of the drive.
3. As shown in Fig. 8-1, aim the two clips at the option card fixed fitting.
Press the fixed fitting to clip the slot.
Fig. 8-1
4. As shown in Fig. 8-2, aim the three holes at the positioning pin.
Press the pin to clip the holes with the option card.
Fig. 8-2
8-2
5. Wiring after the option card fixed fitting is clipped with the holes (see NOTE ).
Fasten the screw to fix the option card before wiring (shown in Fig. 8-3). Torque:4~6 kg-cm
[3.5~5.2 lb-in] / [0.39~0.59 Nm]. While the wiring is finished, the front cover cannot put it back
on directly but needs to assembly the option card reversely. Please refer to the subsequent
steps to complete the installation.
Torque:
4~6 kg-cm
[3.5~5.2 lb-in.]
[0.39~0.59 Nm]
Fig. 8-3
6. After the wiring is completed, loosen the option card of the front mounting，and
reverse-mounted, aim the three holes at the positioning pin, press the pin to clip the holes with
the option card. (shown in Fig. 8-4)
Fig. 8-4
8-3
7. Fasten the screw after the option card fixed fitting is clipped with the holes. (shown in Fig. 8-5)
Torque:
4~6 kg-cm
[3.5~5.2 lb-in.]
[0.39~0.59 Nm]
Fig. 8-5
8. Installation is completed (shown in Fig. 8-6). Put the front cover back on.
Fig. 8-6
8-4
NOTE
 The option cards listed below must connect to ground when wiring. The ground terminal is enclosed
with option card as shown in Fig. 8-7.
1. CMM-MOD01
2. CMM-PD01 A
3. CMM-DN01
4. CMM-EIP01
B
Fig. 8-7
Ground terminal
 Installation of the ground terminal:
B side of the ground terminal connects to the ground terminal block on option card as No.6 of
CMM-MOD01 shown in Fig. 8-8, and see each section in Chapter 8 for ground terminal blocks of
other option cards; A side of the ground terminal connects to the PE on the drive as red circles
shown in Fig. 8-9 ~ 8-11.
Fig. 8-8
Frame A~C Frame D~E
Fig. 8-9
Fig. 8-10
Torque (±10%) Torque (±10%)

Frame A: 9 kg-cm [7.8 Ib-in.] [0.88 Nm] Frame D: 20 kg-cm [17.4 Ib-in.] [1.96 Nm]
Frame B: 15 kg-cm [13.0 Ib-in.] [1.47 Nm] Frame E: 25 kg-cm [21.7 Ib-in.] [2.45 Nm]
Frame C: 20 kg-cm [17.4 Ib-in.] [1.96 Nm]
8-5
Frame F
Fig. 8-11
Torque (±10%)
Frame F: 7 kg-cm [6.1 Ib-in.] [0.69 Nm]
8-6
8-2 CMM-MOD01 Modbus TCP option card
 Features
1. Supports Modbus TCP protocol
2. MDI / MDI-X auto-detect
3. Baud rate:10 / 100 Mbps
4. E-mail alarm
5. AC motor drive keypad / Ethernet configuration
6. Virtual serial port
 Product Profile
1. Screw fixing hole
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive
connection port
4. Communication port
5. Indicator
6. Ground terminal block
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 Specifications
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI / MDIX
Number of ports 1 Port
Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M
Transmission speed 10 / 100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP / IP, Delta Configuration
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage 5 VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)

Insulation voltage 500 VDC
Power consumption 0.8 W
Mechanical Specification
Weight 25 g
8-7
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature)，90% (humidity)
Operation / Storage
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature)，95% (humidity)
International standards:
Shock / Vibration resistance
IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
 Communication Parameters for VFD-MS300 Connected to EtherNet

When VFD-MS300 links to EtherNet, please set up the communication parameters based on the table below.
The EtherNet master will be able to read/write frequency command word and operation command word to
VFD-MS300 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter Function Current Set Value Definition of Parameter Values
Setting for source of The frequency command is controlled by
00-20 8
frequency command communication card
Setting for source of The operation command is controlled by
00-21 5
operation command communication card
Decoding method for
09-30 0 Decoding method for Delta AC motor drive
communication
09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
09-76 IP address -1 192 IP address 192.168.1.5
09-80 Netmask -1 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-81 Netmask -2 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-82 Netmask -3 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-83 Netmask -4 0 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-84 Default gateway -1 192 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
 Basic Registers
BR# R/W Content Set Value

#0 R Model name Set up by the system. The model code of CMM-MOD01=H’0203
Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. 0100h indicates
#1 R Firmware version
firmware version V1.00
Displaying the data in decimal form. 10,000s digit and 1,000s digit
Release date of the
#2 R are for “month”; 100s digit and 10s digit are for “day”.
version For 1 digit: 0 = morning; 1 = afternoon
#11 R/W MODBUS Timeout Pre-defined setting: 500 (ms)
#13 R/W Keep Alive Time Pre-defined setting: 30 (s)
8-8
 LED Indicator & Troubleshooting
LED Indicators
LED Status Indication Processing Methods
POWER Green On Power supply in normal status No action is required
POWER Green Off No power supply Check the power supply
Network connection in normal
On No action is required
status
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation No action is required
Check if the network cable is
Off Network not connected
connected
Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause Processing Methods
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the power

AC motor drive not powered
supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMM-MOD01 not connected to Make sure CMM-MOD01C is connected to AC motor
AC motor drive drive.
Make sure the network cable is correctly connected to

Not connected to network
network.
LINK LED off
Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to Ethernet
connector port.
CMM-MOD01 not connected to
Make sure CMM-MOD01 is connected to the network.
network
No module found PC and CMM-MOD01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings via the AC
different networks and blocked
motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
CMM-MOD01 not connected to
Make sure CMM-MOD01 is connected to the network.
network
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is set
CMM-MOD01 setting in DCISoft to Ethernet.
setup page PC and CMM-MOD01 in
different networks and blocked Conduct the setup via the AC motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
Able to open
Check if the network setting for CMM-MOD01 is correct.
CMM-MOD01
For the Intranet setting in your company, please consult
setup page but Incorrect network setting in
your IT staff. For the Internet setting at home, please
fail to utilize CMM-MOD01
refer to the network setting instruction provided by your
webpage
ISP.
monitoring
Incorrect network setting in

Check if the network setting for CMM-MOD01 is correct.
Fail to send CMM-MOD01
e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-9
8-3 CMM-PD01 PROFIBUS option card
 Features
1. Supports PZD control data exchange.
2. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
3. Supports user diagnosis function.
4. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12 Mbps.
 Product File
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive
connection port
5. Indicator
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 Specifications
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface DB9 connector

Transmission High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation 500 VDC
Communication
Message type Cyclic data exchange
Module name CMM-PD01
GSD document DELA08DB.GSD
Product ID 08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission 9.6 kbps; 19.2 kbps; 93.75 kbps; 187.5 kbps; 125 kbps; 250 kbps; 500 kbps;
speed supported
(auto-detection) 1.5 Mbps; 3 Mbps; 6 Mbps; 12 Mbps (bit per second)
Power supply 5 VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Power consumption 1W
Weight 28 g
8-10
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)

Operation / Storage
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
IEC 61131-2, IEC 68-2-6 (TEST Fc) / IEC 61131-2 & IEC 68-2-27(TEST Ea)
 Connector pin assignment

PIN PIN name Definition
1 - Not defined
2 - Not defined
3 Rxd / Txd-P Sending / receiving data P(B) 9 5
4 - Not defined
5 DGND Data reference ground
6 VP Power voltage – positive
6 1
7 - Not defined
8 Rxd / Txd-N Sending / receiving data N(A)
9 - Not defined
There are 2 LED indicators on CMM-PD01：POWER LED and NET LED. POWER LED displays the
status of the working power. NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status Indication Processing Methods
Green light on Power supply in normal status. No action is required

Check if the connection between CMM-PD01 and
Off No power
AC motor drive is normal.
NET LED

Green light on Normal status No action is required
CMM-PD01 is not connected to
Red light on Connect CMM-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light Invalid PROFIBUS communication Set the PROFIBUS address of CMM-PD01 between
flashes address 1 ~ 125 (decimal)
Switch off the power and check whether CMM-PD01
Orange light CMM-PD01 fails to communicate
is installed correctly and connected normally to the
flashes with AC motor drive.
AC motor drive.
8-11
8-4 CMM-DN01 DeviceNet option card
 Functions
1. Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta’s HSSP

protocol, the AC motor drive can be controlled in real-time.
2. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
3. For I/O mapping, supports max. 32 words input and 32 words
output.
4. Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration
software.
5. Supports all Baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500
kbps and extendable Baud rate mode.
6. Node address and Baud rate can be set up in the AC motor drive.
7. Power supplied from AC motor drive.
 Product Profile
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive
connection port
4. Communication Port
5. Indicator
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 Specifications
DeviceNet Connector
Interface 5-PIN open pluggable connector. PIN interval: 5.08 mm

Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)
Transmission speed 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps and extendable baud rate mode
Network protocol DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port
Interface 50 PIN communication terminal

Transmission method SPI communication
1. Communication module communicates with AC motor drive via this port.
Terminal function 2. AC motor drive provides power supply to communication module via this
port.
Communication protocol Delta HSSP protocol
Power supply voltage 5 VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Communication wire
0.85 W
power consumption
Power consumption 1W
8-12
Weight 23 g
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation / Storage
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
DeviceNet Connector
PIN Signal Color Definition
1 V+ Red 24VDC 1
2 H White Signal+ 2
3
3 S - Earth 4
4 L Blue Signal- 5
5 V- Black 0V

There are 3 LED indicators on CMM-DN01. POWER LED displays the status of power supply. MS LED
and NS LED are dual-color LEDs, displaying the connection status and error messages of the communication
module.
POWER LED

On Power supply in abnormal status Check the power supply of CMM-DN01
Off Power supply in normal status No action is required
8-13
NS LED
1. Check the power of CMM-DN01 and see if the

connection is normal.
No power supply or CMM-DN01 has 2. Make sure there are at least one or more nodes
Off
not completed MAC ID test yet. on the bus.
3. Check if the Baud rate of CMM-DN01 is the
same as that of the other nodes.
CMM-DN01 is on-line but has not 1. Configure CMM-DN01 to the scan list of the
Green light master.
established connection to the
flashes
master. 2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
CMM-DN01 is on-line and is

Green light on No action is required
normally connected to the master.
Red light CMM-DN01 is on-line, but I/O 1. Check if the network connection is normal.
flashes connection is timed-out. 2. Check if the master operates normally.
1. Make sure all MAC IDs on the network are not
repeated.
1. The communication is down. 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
2. MAC ID test failure. 3. Check if the Baud rate of CMM-DN01 is
Red light on
3. No network power supply. consistent with that of the other nodes.
4. CMM-DN01 is off-line. 4. Check if the node address of CMM-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
MS LED
Check the power supply of CMM-DN01 and see if

Off No power supply or being off-line
the connection is normal.
Green light
Waiting for I/O data Switch the master PLC to RUN status
flashes
Green light on I/O data are normal No action is required
Red light 1. Reconfigure CMM-DN01

Mapping error
flashes 2. Re-power the AC motor drive
1. See the error code on the drive’s keypad.

Red light on Hardware error
2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
If the flashing lasts for a long time, check if

Orange light CMM-DN01 is establishing
CMM-DN01 and the AC motor drive are correctly
flashes connection with AC motor drive
installed and normally connected to each other.
8-14
8-5 CMM-EIP01 Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP option card
 Features
1. Supports MODBUS TCP and Ethernet / IP protocol

2. MDI / MDI-X auto-detect
3. Baud rate: 10 / 100 Mbps auto-detect
4. E-mail alarm
5. AC motor drive keypad / Ethernet configuration
6. Virtual serial port
 Product Profile
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive
connection port
5. Indicator
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 Specifications Torque: 2 kg-cm / [1.7 Ib-in.] / [0.2 Nm]
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI / MDIX

Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M
Transmission speed 10 / 100 Mbps Auto-Detect
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP / IP,
Network protocol
EtherNet / IP, Delta Configuration

Power supply voltage 5 VDC
Weight 25 g
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation / Storage
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
International standard:
IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
8-15
 Installation
Connecting CMM-EIP01 to Network
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Open the front cover of the drive.
3. Connect CAT-5e network cable to RJ-45 port on CMM-EIP01
(shown in Figure 2).
Figure 2
RJ-45 PIN Definition
PIN Signal Definition PIN Signal Definition
1 Tx+ Data transmit positive 5 -- N/C
Data receive
2 Tx- Data transmit negative 6 Rx-
negative
3 Rx+ Data receive positive 7 -- N/C
4 -- N/C 8 -- N/C
 Communication Parameters for VFD-MS300 Connected to Ethernet

When VFD-MS300 links to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters based on the table
below. The Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency command word and operation command
word of VFD-MS300 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter Function Current Set Value Definition of Parameter Values
Frequency command The frequency command is controlled by

00-20 8
source communication card.
Operation command The operation command is controlled by

00-21 5
source communication card.
Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor

09-30 0
communication drive
09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)

09-80 Netmask -1 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-81 Netmask -2 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-82 Netmask -3 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
09-83 Netmask -4 0 Netmask 255.255.255.0
8-16
There are 2 LED indicators on CMM-EIP01: POWER LED and LINK LED. POWER LED displays the
status of the working power, and LINK LED displays the connection status of the communication.
LED Indicators
LED Status Indication Processing Methods

On Power supply in normal status No action is required
POWER Green
Off No power supply Check the power supply.
Network connection in normal
On No action is required
status
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation No action is required
Check if the network cable is
Off Network not connected
connected.
Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause Processing Methods

Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMM-EIP01 not connected Make sure CMM-EIP01 is connected to the AC
to the AC motor drive motor drive.
CMM-EIP01 not connected Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network to network.
LINK LED off
Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to the
connector Ethernet port.
CMM-EIP01 not connected Make sure CMM-EIP01 is connected to the
to the network network.
No communication
card found PC and CMM-EIP01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings via the AC
different networks and
motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall
CMM-EIP01 not connected Make sure CMM-EIP01 is connected to the

to the network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-EIP01 setup setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
page PC and CMM-EIP01 in
different networks and Conduct the setup via the AC motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall
Check if the network setting for CMM-EIP01 is
Able to open
correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
CMC-EIP01 setup Incorrect network setting in
please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
page but fail to utilize CMM-EIP01
at home, please refer to the network setting
webpage monitoring
instruction provided by your supplier (ISP) .
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMM-EIP01 is
CMM-EIP01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Please confirm the IP address for the
Incorrect mail server setting
SMTP-Server.
8-17
8-6 CMM-COP01 CANopen option card
 Product Profile
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive
connection port
5. Indicator
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 RJ-45 Pin definition

Pin Signal Description
1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V-
Socket 7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V-
 Specifications
Interface RJ-45
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable CAN standard cable
Transmission speed 1Mbps; 500 kbps; 250 kbps; 125 kbps; 100 kbps; 50 kbps
Communication protocol CANopen protocol
Switch by SSW1，SSW1 turn left the terminating resistance close, it

Terminating resistance needs to connect by external；SSW1turn right the terminating resistance
open then internal connection.

Power supply voltage 5 VDC
8-18
 CANopen Communication Cable
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 UC-CMC003-01A 300 11.8
2 UC-CMC005-01A 500 19.6
3 UC-CMC010-01A 1000 39
4 UC-CMC015-01A 1500 59
5 UC-CMC020-01A 2000 78.7
6 UC-CMC030-01A 3000 118.1
7 UC-CMC050-01A 5000 196.8
8 UC-CMC100-01A 10000 393.7
9 UC-CMC200-01A 20000 787.4
 CANopen Dimension
Model：TAP-CN03
NOTE
For more information on CANopen, please refer to CANopen user manual or download related manuals on
Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
8-19
8-7 EMM-BPS01 Back-up Power Supply option card
 Features
1. External 24V DC input via this card
2. To keep the control board alive for parameter read/write, status
monitoring and communication.
 Product Profile
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive connection
port
4. +24V Terminal block
Wire: 24~20 AWG

 Specifications
When the drive is only powered by EMC-BPS01, communication stays normal, including support of all
communication cards and the following functions:
 Parameters can be read and written
 Display with keypad
 Keypad buttons (except the RUN button)
 Analog input can operate
 Multifunction inputs (FWD, RV, MI 1~MI 8) need external power supply to operate
The following functions are not supported:
 Relay output
 PLC function
8-20
Chapter 9 Specification MS300
Chapter 9 Specification
9-1 115V Series
9-2 230V Series
9-3 460V Series
9-4 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation
9-5 Derating of Ambient Temperature and Altitude
9-1
Chapter 9 Specification  MS300
9-1 115V Series

115V series_1-phase (no built-in filter)
ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1A6MS11 2A5MS11 4A8MS11
ENSAA
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1
Normal duty Heavy duty
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.0 1.8

Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.5 4.8
Output
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~15 (default 4)

Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.7 1.0 2.1
Rated Output Current (A) 1.8 2.7 5.5
Rated Input Heavy Duty 6.0 9.4 18
Current (A) Normal Duty 6.8 10.1 20.6
Input
Rated Voltage / Frequency 1-phase AC 100V~120VAC (-15% ~ +10%) / 50/60Hz

Mains Input Voltage Range (VAC) 85~132
Mains Frequency Range (Hz) 47~63
Frame size A1 A3 C1
Weight (kg) 0.65 0.74 1.24
Cooling Method Natural cooling without fan kit Fan cooling with fan kit
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*
NOTE
 IP40*: The IP rating of wiring area (main circuit terminals and control terminals, frame A/B/C/D/E/F) and the vent near capacitor (frame
C/D/E/F) is IP20.
 The value of the carrier frequency is a factory setting. To increase the carrier frequency, the current needs to be decreased. See derating
curve diagram of Pr. 06-55 for more information.
 When a load is a shock or impact load, use a higher level model.
9-2
9-2 230V Series

230V series_1-phase without built-in filter
ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1A6MS21 2A8MS21 4A8MS21 7A5MS21 11AMS21
ENSAA
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.25 0.5 1 2 3
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 0.6 1.1 1.8 2.9 4.2

Rated Output Current (A) 1.6 2.8 4.8 7.5 11
Output

Rate Output Capacity (kVA) 0.7 1.2 1.9 3.2 4.8
Rated Output Current (A) 1.8 3.2 5 8.5 12.5
Rated Input Heavy Duty 3.4 5.9 10.1 15.8 23.1
Current (A) Normal Duty 3.8 6.7 10.5 17.9 26.35
Input

Frame A1 A3 B2 C1
AC Drive Weight 0.65 kg 0.76 kg 0.95 kg 1.24 kg
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*
230V series_1-phase with built-in filter

Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AFSAA 1A6MS21 2A8MS21 4A8MS21 7A5MS21 11AMS21

Output

Input

Frame B3 C2
AC Drive Weight (kg) 1.32 kg 1.8kg
Natural cooling
Cooling Method Fan cooling with fan kit
without fan kit
EMC Filter Built-in
IP Rating IP20
NOTE
C/D/E/F) is IP20.
9-3

ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1A6MS23 2A8MS23 4A8MS23 7A5MS23 11AMS23
ENSAA

Output

Rated Input Heavy Duty 1.9 3.4 5.8 9 13.2
Current (A) Normal Duty 2. 3.8 6 9.6 15
Input

Frame A1 A2 A5 B1 C1
AC Drive Weight (kg) 0.65 kg 0.68 kg 0.81 kg 1.05 kg 1.24
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*

ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17AMS23 25AMS23 33AMS23 49AMS23 65AMS23
ENSAA
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 5 7.5 10 15.2 20

Rated Output Current (A) 17 25 33 49 65
Output

Rated Output Current (A) 19.5 27 36 51 69
Rated Input Heavy Duty 20.4 30 39.6 58.8 78
Current (A) Normal Duty 23.4. 32.4 43.2 61.2 82.8
Input

Frame C1 D1 E1 F1
AC Drive Weight (kg) 1.24 2.07 3.97 6.25
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*
NOTE
C/D/E/F) is IP20.
9-4
9-3 460V Series

ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1A5MS43 2A7MS43 4A2MS43 5A5MS43 9A0MS43
ENSAA
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.5 1 2 3 5

Output

Rate Output Capacity (kVA) 1.4 2.3 3.5 5 8
Rated Output Current (A) 1.8 3 4.6 6.5 10.5
Input

Frame A4 A5 B1 C1
AC Drive Weight (kg) 0.76 0.81 1.05 1.24
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*

Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AFSAA 1A5MS43 2A7MS43 4A2MS43 5A5MS43 9A0MS43
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 0.5 1 2 3 5

Output

Rate Output Capacity (kVA) 1.4 2.3 3.5 5 8
Rated Output Current (A) 1.8 3 4.6 6.5 10.5
Input

Frame B3 C2
AC Drive Weight (kg) 1.32 1.80
EMC Filter Built-in
IP Rating IP20
NOTE
C/D/E/F) is IP20.
9-5

ANSAA
Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 13AMS43 17AMS43 25AMS43 32AMS43 38AMS43 45AMS43
ENSAA
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 9.9 13 19.1 24.4 29 34.3

Rated Output Current (A) 13 17 25 32 38 45
Output

Rate Output Capacity (kVA) 12 15.6 21.3 27.4 31.6 37.3
Rated Output Current (A) 15.7 20.5 28 36 41.5 49
Rated Input Heavy Duty 14.3 18.7 27.5 35.2 41.8 49.5
Current (A) Normal Duty 17.3 22.6 30.8 39.6 45.7 53.9
Input

Frame D1 E1 F1
AC Drive Weight (kg) 2.91 5.15 8.50
EMC Filter Optional
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ANSAA : IP20
IP Rating
VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ENSAA : IP40*

Model VFD_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AFSAA 13AMS43 17AMS43 25AMS43 32AMS43 38AMS43 45AMS43
Applicable Motor Output (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Applicable Motor Output (hp) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Rated Output Capacity (kVA) 9.9 13 19.1 24.4 29 34.3

Rated Output Current (A) 13 17 25 32 38 45
Output

Rate Output Capacity (kVA) 12 15.6 21.3 27.4 31.6 37.3
Rated Output Current (A) 15.7 20.5 28 36 41.5 49
Rated Input Heavy Duty 14.3 18.7 27.5 35.2 41.8 49.5
Current (A) Normal Duty 17.3 22.6 30.8 39.6 45.7 53.9
Input

Frame D2 E2 F2
AC Drive Weight (kg) 2.07 3.97 6.25
EMC Filter Built-in
IP Rating IP20
NOTE
C/D/E/F) is IP20.
9-6
General Specifications
Control Method V/F、SVC
Applied Motor IM (Induction Motor), Simple PM motor control (IPM and SPM)
Starting Torque 150% ／3 Hz ( V/f, SVC control for IM，Heavy duty )
[Note 1] 100% ／(1/20 of motor rated frequency) ( SVC control for PM，Heavy duty )
Speed Control 1 : 50 ( V/f, SVC control for IM，Heavy duty )
Range [Note 1] 1 : 20 ( SVC control for PM，Heavy duty )
Max. Output
0.00~599.00Hz
Frequency
Overload Normal duty: 120% 60s, 150% 3s
Capability Heavy duty: 150% 60s, 200% 3s
Control 0~+10V / +10V~-10V
Frequency
Characteristics 4~20 mA / 0~+10V
Setting Signal
1 channel pulse input (33kHz), 1 channel pulse output (33 KHz)
Multi-motor switching (up to 4 independent motor parameters), Fast Run, DEB
function, Wobble frequency function, Rapid deceleration function, Main and
auxiliary frequency function, Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search,
Main Function Over-torque detection, 16-step speed (including main speed), Accel/decel time
switch, S-curve accel/decal, 3-wire sequence, JOG frequency, Frequency
upper/lower limit settings, DC injection braking at start/stop, PID control, Built-in
PLC (2000 steps), Simple positioning function
Application Built-in application parameter groups(selected by industry) and user-defined
Macro application parameter groups.
Motor Protection Over-current, Over-voltage, Over-temperature, Phase loss
Protection
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running (independent
Characteristics Stall Prevention
settings)
Communication
DeviceNet 、Ethernet/IP、Profibus DP、Modbus TCP、CANopen
Cards
Accessory
External DC
EMM-BPS01 (DC 24V power supply card )
Power Supply
Certifications UL, CE, C-Tick, TÜV (SIL 2), RoHS, REACH
[Note 1] Control accuracy may vary depending on the environment, application conditions, different motors or encoder. For
details, please contact our company or your local distributor.
9-7
9-4 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation
DO NOT expose the AC Motor Drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/ inflammable
gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01 mg/cm2 every year.
Installation
IEC 60364-1/ IEC 60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
-20 ~ +50 C
IP20/UL Open Type
-20 ~ +60 C with derating
Operation
IP40/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 -20 ~ +40 C
Surrounding
Installed side by side -20 ~ +50 C with derating
Temperature
Storage -40 ~ +85C
Transportation -20 ~ +70C
No condensation, non-frozen
Operation Max. 90%
Environment Relative
Storage/ Transportation Max. 95%
Humidity
No condense water
Operation 86 ~ 106 kPa
Air Pressure
Storage/ Transportation 70 ~ 106 kPa
IEC 60721-3
Operation Class 3C2; Class 3S2
Pollution Level Storage Class 2C2; Class 2S2
Transportation Class 1C2; Class 1S2
Concentrate prohibited
Altitude <1000m (>1000m with derating)
Package Storage
ISTA procedure 1A (according to weight) IEC 60068-2-31
Drop Transportation
IEC60068-2-6: 2Hz~13.2Hz: 1mm, peak-peak
Operating 13.2Hz~55Hz: 0.7G~2.0G
Vibration 55Hz~512Hz: 2.0G
2.5G peak
Non-operating
5Hz~2kHz: 0.015" max. displacement
Operating IEC/EN60068-2-27: 15G, 11ms
Impact
Non-operating 30G
9-8
9-5 Derating of Ambient Temperature and Altitude
 Derating of Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature Derating of IP20 / UL Open Type
At rated current the ambient temperature is -10°C ~ +50°C.

Over 50°C the rated current has to be decreased 2.5%/°C up to 60°C.
Ambient Temperature Derating of IP40 / NEMA 1 / UL Type 1
At rated current the ambient temperature is -10°C ~ +40°C.

Over 40°C the rated current has to be decreased 2.5%/°C up to 60°C.
9-9
 Derating of Altitude
For IP20 / UL Open Type

Current derating at ambient temperature
Ambient temperature 40 oC 45 oC 50 oC
Operating altitude 0-1000 100%

above sea level 1001-1500 100% 95%
(m) 1501-2000 100% 95% 90%
For IP40 / NEMA1 / UL Type 1

Current derating at ambient temperature
Ambient temperature 30 oC 35 oC 40 oC
Operating altitude 0-1000 100%

above sea level 1001-1500 100% 95%
(m) 1501-2000 100% 95% 90%

Operating
Ambient Temperature Limits
Conditions
When the AC motor drive is operating at the rated current, the ambient
IP20 / temperature has to be between -20 oC ~ +50 oC. When the temperature is
UL Open Type over 50 oC, for every increase by 1 oC, decrease 2.5 % of the rated current.
The maximum allowable temperature is 60 oC.
When the AC motor drive is operating at the rated current, the ambient
For IP40 /
temperature has to be between -20 oC ~ +40 oC. When the temperature is
NEMA1 /
over 40 oC, for every increase by 1 oC, decrease 2.5 % of the rated current.
UL Type 1
The maximum allowable temperature is 60 oC.
If the AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000 m, follow normal
operation restriction. If it is installed at altitude 1000~2000 m, decrease
1 % of rated current or lower 0.5 oC of temperature for every 100 m increase
High Altitude
in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is 2000 m. Contact Delta
for more information if you need to use this motor drive at an altitude of 2000
m or higher.
9-11
9-12
Chapter 10 Digital KeypadMS300
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Appearance of KPMS-LE01 keyboard panel
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Displayed items Descriptions
Display present frequency command of the drive
Display actual output frequency to the motor
Display user-defined output of physical quantity

Example for parameter 00-04 = 30 (User Defined output)
Display output current
Forward command
Reverse command
Display counter value
Display parameter
10-1
Displayed items Descriptions
Display parameter value
Display external fault
R UN STOP Display the data has been accepted and automatically stored in
FWD PL C
R EV the internal memory
R UN STOP
FWD PL C Display when the set data is not accepted or the value exceeded
R EV
Keypad operation process

A. Main Page Selection
Se tt ing p ara me te rs
or
START
or or
PLC Setting
or
10-2
B. F page (Frequency command setting page)

General Mode 1 (maximum operating frequency 01-00 is double digits, e.g.: Pr. 01-00=60.00 Hz)
Long </ </ </ </

press
General Mode 2 (maximum operating frequency 01-00 is three digits, e.g.: Pr. 01-00=599.0 Hz)
Long
press
</ </ </ </
</
C. Application Selection Page
Application selection page will display APP, but it will not show the APP page when Pr.13-00=0
The description of Pr. 13-00 setting is as follow:

Pr. 13-00=0
Application selection will be inactivated and will not be shown on display
Pr. 13-00=1 is User Defined application, keypad will display USEr
Pr. 13-00=2 is Compressor application, keypad will display CoPr
10-3
Pr. 13-00=3 is Fan application, keypad will display FAn
Pr. 13-00=4 is Pump application, keypad will display PUMP
Pr. 13-00=5 is Conveyor application, keypad will display CnYr
Pr. 13-00=6 is Machine tool, keypad will display CnC
Pr. 13-00=7 is Packing application, keypad will display PAC
Pr. 13-00=8 is Textiles application, keypad will display tiLE
When Pr. 13-00≠0, the corresponding parameters will be shown in the APP page according to
the setting of Pr. 13-00. Then in each selected application, user can view the parameters by pressing
Enter button. (If Pr.13-00=1 and no parameters are set in Pr.13-01~13-50, the user can not enter
USEr page.) The parameter setting in APP is the same as for other parameters groups: use up and
left/down key to set the parameter value.
Please follow the setting process below to set the User Defined application selection (Pr.13-00=1):
When finishing setting, press

Set Pr.13-00=1 Set Pr.13-01~13-50 User MODE button to APP page, and
Activate User Defined Defined parameters by then press ENTER to USEr page.
application selection order Press ENTER again, the user
defined parameters will appear
If the user wants to remove the

If the user wants to change Use up and down key
User Defined parameters, then
the User Defined parameters, to select defined
go back to parameter group 13,
then the user needs to go parameters, and
and set the parameter as 0.00
back to parameter group 13 to press ENTER to
from the last defined parameter
modify check the setting
by sequence
10-4
1. The application selection can be activated by setting Pr. 13-00≠0.

2. After setting Pr. 13-00=1, the user can give the definition of 13-01~50 by their requirement.
3. The default setting of Pr. 13-01~50 is P 0.00. Press Enter to set the corresponding parameters
to Pr. 13-01~50 by sequence.
4. The way of setting corresponding parameters in Pr. 13-01~50 is the same as in other parameter
groups: use up down and left key to set the parameters value
Note 1: Read-only parameters cannot be set
Note 2: Pr. 13-01, 02……50 need to be set by sequence, or the display will show Err
5. If the set corresponding parameters need to be changed, the user needs to go back to Pr.
13-01~50 to modify.
6. If user wants to remove the set parameters, then the last parameter needs to be removed (set
as 0.00) first, or the display will show Err
For example, if there are 5 user defined parameters (Pr. 13-01, 13-02…13-05), then to remove
Pr. 13-02, Pr. 13-05, 04, 03 need to be removed by first in sequence
7. When finishing setting, press MODE back to APP page and ENTER again, the Keypad will
display USEr, after ENTER again, the set corresponded parameters will appear
Please follow the setting process below to select specific application setting (Pr. 13-00=2~8)
After selecting, press MODE Use up and down key

Set Pr.13-00=2~8 back to APP page. Then press to select defined
(2~8 represent ENTER, the keypad will display parameters, and
different applications) application abbreviation. Press press ENTER to
ENTER again to set the check the setting
application parameters
D. Parameter setting
How to enablele/disable left shift key function?
 Enable left shift key function: Press MODE for >2s. Last digit will start to blink.
 Disable left shift key function: Press MODE for >2s. Last digit stops blinking.
The left shift key function works only for changing parameters, not when going to a different
parameter.
D-1. Unsigned parameter

(parameter setting range≧0, e.g. Pr. 01-00)
1. Left shift key function disabled: Press UP or LEFT/DOWN key to adjust the value.
2. Left shift key function enabled: Last digit blinks. Press UP key to increase the value of this
digit. Back to 0 after 9
3. Press LEFT/DOWN key, the blinking digit will shift left one digit
4. After the parameter is set, the left shift key function will not be disabled automatically. It has
to be disabled by the user
10-5
E.g.: The default setting of Pr. 01-00 is 60.00. After pressing MODE key for >2 seconds to enable
the left shift function, pressing LEFT/DOWN key will be as shown below:
</ </ </ </
The upper setting limit of Pr. 01-00 is 599.00. If a value >599.00 is set, the display will show
[Err] after ENTER, and then the display shows the upper limit [599.00] for a second to remind
user of exceeding the maximum setting. Then the original value will kept unchanged. The
cursor will return to the last digit.
D-2. Signed parameter setting status 1

(parameter setting range has no or one decimal place, e.g. Pr. 03-03)
1. Left shift key function disabled: Press UP or LEFT/DOWN key to adjust the value
3. Press LEFT/DOWN key, the blinking digit will shift left one digit. When shifting to the first
digit and pressing the UP key, the digit “0” will change to “minus”
4. After the parameter is set, the left shift key function will not be disabled automatically. It
has to be disabled by the user
E.g.: The default setting of Pr. 03-03 is 0.0. After pressing MODE key for >2 seconds to
enable the left shift function, pressing LEFT/DOWN key will be as shown below:
</ </ </ </
The upper setting limit of Pr.03-03 is 100.0 and the lower limit is -100.0. If a value >100.0 or
<-100.0 is set, the display will show [Err] after ENTER, and then the display will show the
upper limit [100.0] or lower limit [-100.0] for a second to remind user of exceeding the upper or
lower limit. Then the original value will kept unchanged. The cursor will return to the last digit.
D-3. Signed parameter setting status 2

(parameter setting range has two decimal places, e.g. Pr. 03-74)
1. Left shift key function disabled: Press UP or LEFT/DOWN key to adjust the value
3. Press LEFT/DOWN key, the blinking digit will shift left one digit. When shifting to the first
digit and pressing the UP key, the digit “0” will change to “minus”
4. For parameters in 2 decimals and a positive/negative setting range, values >99.99 or
<-99.99 will be shown in 1 decimal, e.g. 100.0 or -100.0
5. After the parameter is set, the left shift key function will not be disabled automatically. It
has to be disabled by the user
10-6
E.g.: The default setting of Pr. 03-74 is -100.0. After pressing MODE key for >2 seconds to
enable the left shift function, pressing LEFT/DOWN key will be as shown below:
</ </ </ </
If the parameter is adjusted upwards, the display will show [-99.99].

The upper setting limit of Pr. 03-74 is 100.0 and lower limit is -100.0. If a value >100.0 or
<-100.0 is set, the display will show [Err] after ENTER, and then the display will show the
upper limit [100.0] or lower limit [-100.0] for a second to remind user of exceeding the upper
or lower limit. Then the original value will kept unchanged. The cursor will return to the last
digit.
Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital Keypad
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Display
Number A a B b C c D d E e
Display －－－－
Number F f G g H h I i J j
Display －－－
Number K k L l M m N n O o
Display －－－－－－
Number P p Q q R r S s T t
Display －－－－－
Number U u V v W w X x Y y
Display －－－－－－
Number Z z
Display －
10-7
10-8
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsMS300
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings
This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges,
factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
NOTE
: The parameter can be set during operation
00 Drive Parameters
Factory
Pr. Explanation Settings
Setting
102: 110 V, 1 Phase, 0.25 HP
103: 110 V, 1 Phase, 0.5 HP
104: 110 V, 1 Phase, 1 HP
302: 230 V, 1 Phase, 0.25 HP
303: 230 V, 1 Phase, 0.5 HP
304: 230 V, 1 Phase, 1 HP
305: 230 V, 1 Phase, 2 HP
306: 230 V, 1 Phase, 3 HP
202: 230 V, 3 Phase, 0.25 HP
203: 230 V, 3 Phase, 0.5 HP
204: 230 V, 3 Phase, 1 HP
205: 230 V, 3 Phase, 2 HP
206: 230 V, 3 Phase, 3 HP
207: 230 V, 3 Phase, 5 HP
Identity code of the AC motor Read
00-00 208: 230 V, 3 Phase, 7.5 HP
drive only
209: 230 V, 3 Phase, 10 HP
210: 230 V, 3 Phase, 15 HP
211: 230 V, 3 Phase, 20 HP
403: 460 V, 3 Phase, 0.5 HP
404: 460 V, 3 Phase, 1 HP
405: 460 V, 3 Phase, 2 HP
406: 460 V, 3 Phase, 3 HP
407: 460 V, 3 Phase, 5 HP
408: 460 V, 3 Phase, 7.5 HP
409: 460 V, 3 Phase, 10 HP
410: 460 V, 3 Phase, 15 HP
411: 460 V, 3 Phase, 20 HP
412: 460 V, 3 Phase, 25 HP
413: 460 V, 3 Phase, 30 HP
11-1
Factory
Setting
Display AC motor drive rated Read
00-01 Display by models
current only
0: No function
1: Parameter write protect
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC
7: Reset CANopen index (Slave)
8: Keypad doesn't respond
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(base frequency is 50 Hz)
00-02 Parameter reset 0
(base frequency is 60 Hz)
(base frequency is 50 Hz) (saving the setting value of
user defined parameter 13-01~13-50)
(base frequency is 60 Hz) (saving the setting value of
user defined parameter 13-01~13-50)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
 00-03 Start-up display selection 0
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr. 00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amps)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v) (Unit: Vdc)
4: Display output voltage (E) (Unit: Vac)
5: Display output power angle (n) (Unit: deg)
6: Display output power in kW (P) (Unit: Kw)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (Unit: rpm)
Content of multi-function 10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
 00-04 3
display (user defined) 11: Display signal value of AVI analog input terminal (1.)
(Unit: %)
12: Display signal value of ACI analog input terminal (2.)
(Unit: %)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT (i.) (Unit: oC)
16: The status of digital input (ON / OFF) (i)
17: Display digital output status ON / OFF (o)
18: Display the multi-stage speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d)
11-2
Factory
Setting
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.)
22: Pulse input frequency (S.)
23: Pulse input position (q.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00 %) (o.) (Unit: %)
26: GFF ground fault (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: %)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: H page x 00-05 display user gain (K)
35: Control mode display: 0 = speed control mode (SPD)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)
38: Display drive status (6.)
41: KWH display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID target value (h.) (Unit: %)
43: PID offset (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
46: Display auxiliary frequency value (U.) (Unit: Hz)
47: Display master frequency value (A.) (Unit: Hz)
48: Display frequency value after addition and subtraction
of auxiliary and master frequency (L.) (Unit: Hz)
Coefficient gain in actual
 00-05 0~160.00 1.00
output frequency
00-06 Software version Read only #.#
Parameter protection 0～65535
 00-07 0
password input 0~3 (the times of password attempts)
0～65535
Parameter protection 0: No password protection / password is entered correctly
 00-08 0
password setting (Pr. 00-07)
1: Password has been set
00-10 Control mode 0: Speed mode 0
0: VF (IM V/F control)
00-11 Control of speed mode 1: VFPG (IM V/F control + Encoder) 0
2: SVC (Pr. 05-33 set as IM or PM)
0: Normal load
00-16 Load selection 1
1: Heavy load
Normal load: 2~15 KHz 4
00-17 Carrier frequency
Heavy load: 2~15 KHz 4
bit 0: Control command forced by PLC control Read
00-19 PLC command mask
bit 1: Frequency command forced by PLC control Only
11-3
Factory
Setting
0: Digital keypad
1: Communication RS-485 input
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr. 03-00)
3: External UP / DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command
Source of the master
 00-20 (Refer to Pr. 10-16 without direction) 0
frequency command (AUTO)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Digital keypad dial
8: Communication card (not includes CANopen card)
[Note]:
Need to use with MO setting as 42, or use with KPC-CC01
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals
Source of the operation
 00-21 3: CANopen communication card 0
command (AUTO)
[Note]:
0: Ramp to stop
 00-22 Stop method 0
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward / reverse
 00-23 Control of motor direction 1: Disable reverse 0
2: Disable forward
Memory of digital operator Read
00-24 Read only
(Keypad) frequency command only
bit 0~3: user defined decimal place

0000b: no decimal place
 00-25 User defined characteristics 0001b: one decimal place 0
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
11-4
Factory
Setting
bit 4~15: user defined unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: M/S
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: PPM
008xh: l /m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: M
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: Psi
01Dxh: Atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
11-5
Factory
Setting
0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to no decimal place)
00-26 Max. user defined value 0.0~6553.5 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0
0.0~655.35 (when Pr. 00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
Read
00-27 User defined value Read only
only
0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local / Remote, the drive stops
2: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as the
REMOTE setting for frequency and operation status
3: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL
00-29 LOCAL / REMOTE selection 0
setting for frequency and operation status
4: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as LOCAL
setting when switch to Local and runs as REMOTE
setting when switch to Remote for frequency and
operation status.
0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command
Source of the master
 00-30 (Refer to Pr. 10-16 without direction) 0
frequency command (HAND)
[Note]:
0: Digital keypad
Source of the operation
 00-31 3: CANopen communication card 0
command (HAND)
[Note]:
0: STOP key disable
 00-32 Digital keypad STOP function 0
1: STOP key enable
11-6
Factory
Setting
0: Master and auxiliary frequency function disabled
1: By digital keypad
2: By communication RS-485 input
3: By analog input
00-35 Source of auxiliary frequency 0
4: By external Up / Down key input
5: Pulse input with steering command (refer to Pr. 10-16)
6: By CANopen
8: By communication card
0: Master + auxiliary frequency
Selection of master and
00-36 1: Master - auxiliary frequency 0
auxiliary frequency command
2: Auxiliary - master frequency
 00-48 Display filter time (Current) 0.001~65.535 sec. 0.100
 00-49 Display filter time (Keypad) 0.001~65.535 sec. 0.100
00-50 Software version (Date) Read only #####
11-7
01 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
60.00/
01-00 Max. operation frequency of motor 1 0.00~599.00 Hz
50.00
60.00/
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 0.00~599.00 Hz
50.00
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~255.0 V 220.0
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1
460 V series: 0.0~510.0 V 440.0
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 0.00~599.00 Hz 3.00
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 11.0
 01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 22.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 2.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 4.0
01-07 Min. output frequency of motor 1 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 0.0
 01-08 Min. output voltage of motor 1
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 0.0
01-09 Start-up frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.50
 01-10 Output frequency upper limit 0.00~599.00 Hz 599.00
 01-11 Output frequency lower limit 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
 01-12 Accel. time 1
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
 01-13 Decel. time 1
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
 01-20 JOG acceleration time
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec. 10.00
 01-21 JOG deceleration time
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec. 10.0
11-8
Factory
Setting
 01-22 JOG frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 6.00
st th
 01-23 1 / 4 Accel. / decel. frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~25.00 sec. 0.20
 01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~250.0 sec. 0.2
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~25.00 sec. 0.20
 01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~250.0 sec. 0.2
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~25.00 sec. 0.20
 01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~250.0 sec. 0.2
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~25.00 sec. 0.20
 01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~250.0 sec. 0.2
01-28 Skip frequency 1 (upper limit) 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
01-29 Skip frequency 1 (lower limit) 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
0: Output waiting
01-34 Zero-speed mode 1: Zero-speed operation 0
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr. 01-07, 01-41)
60.00/
50.00
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~255.0 V 220.0
460 V series: 0.0~510.0 V 440.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 11.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 22.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 2.0
460 V series:0.0 V~480.0 V 4.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 0.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 0.0
0: V/F curve determined by Pr. 01-00~01-08
01-43 V/F curve selection 1: 1.5th V/F curve 0
nd
2: 2 V/F curve
11-9
Factory
Setting
0: Linear accel. / decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
Auto acceleration / deceleration 2: Linear accel., auto decel.
 01-44 0
setting 3: Auto accel. / decel.
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel. /
decel. (limited by Pr. 01-12 to 01-21)
Time unit for acceleration / 0: Unit 0.01 sec.
01-45 0
deceleration and S curve 1: Unit 0.1 sec.
Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec.
 01-46 Time for CANopen quick stop 1.00
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~6000.0 sec.
0: Normal decel.
01-49 Deceleration method 1: Overfluxing decel. 0
2: Traction energy control
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
110 V / 230V series: 0.0 V~255.0 V 220.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~510.0 V 440.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 11.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 22.0
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 2.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 4.0
110V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 0.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 0.0
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~255.0 V 220.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~510.0 V 440.0
110V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 11.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 22.0
11-10
Factory
Setting
110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 2.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 4.0
110 V / 230V series: 0.0 V~240.0 V 0.0
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V 0.0
11-11
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: 2-wire mode 1, power on for operation control
(M1: FWD / STOP, M2: REV / STOP)
(M1: RUN / STOP, M2: REV / FWD)
3: 3-wire, power on for operation control
(M1: RUN, M2: REV / FWD, M3: STOP)
4: 2-wire mode 1，fast start up
02-00 2-wire / 3-wire operation control 5: 2-wire mode 2，fast start up 1
6: 3-wire，fast start up
IMPORTANT
1. In fast start up function, terminal output will
keep in ready status, drive will response to the
command immediately.
2. When using fast start up function, the output
terminal will have higher voltage potentially.
Multi-function input command 1 0: No function
02-01 0
(MI1) 1: Multi-stage speed command 1 / multi-stage
Multi-function input command 2 position command 1
02-02 0
02-03 1
02-04 2
02-05 3
(MI5) 5: Reset
Multi-function input command 6 6: JOG operation (By KPC-CC01 or external
02-06 4
(MI6) control)
Multi-function input command 7 7: Acceleration / deceleration speed inhibit
02-07 0
(MI7) 8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration / deceleration time
selection
9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration / deceleration time
selection
10: EF Input (Pr. 07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
11-12
Factory
Setting
12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of auto accel. / decel. time
15: Rotating speed command from AVI
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
18: Forced to stop (Pr. 07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter command
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command

28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
38: Disable EEPROM write function
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch

42: AUTO switch
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit 0
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
56: Local / Remote Selection
70: Auxiliary frequency is forced to 0
71: Disable PID function, PID output is forced to 0
72: Disable PID function, remain the output value
before disabled
73: PID integral gain is forced to 0, integral
disabled
74: PID feedback reversed
81: Zero point position signal input of simple
positioning
82: OOB loading balance detection
83: Multi-motors (IM) selection bit 0
11-13
Factory
Setting
0: UP / DOWN by the accel. / decel. time
1: UP / DOWN constant speed (Pr. 02-10)
 02-09 UP / DOWN key mode 0
2: Pulse command (Pr. 02-10)
3: External terminals UP / DOWN mode
Constant speed. The accel. / decel.
 02-10 0.001~1.000 Hz / ms 0.001
speed of the UP / DOWN Key
 02-11 Digital input response time 0.000~30.000 sec. 0.005
 02-12 Digital input mode selection 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000
 02-13 Multi-function output 1 RY1 0: No function 11
 02-16 Multi-function output 2 (MO1) 1: Indication during RUN 0
 02-17 Multi-function output 3 (MO2) 2: Operation speed attained 0
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr. 02-22)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP (Frequency
command)
7: Over torque 1 (Pr. 06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2 (Pr. 06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning (LV) (Pr. 06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
13: Overheat warning (Pr. 06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication (Pr. 07-00)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Count value attained, does not return to 0
(Pr. 02-20)
18: Count value attained, returns to 0 (Pr. 02-19)
19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation source
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr. 02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr. 02-34
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
11-14
Factory
Setting
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop (actual output
frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr. 06-23)

40: Speed attained (including Stop)
42: Crane function
43: Motor actual speed output < Pr. 02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr. 06-71~06-73)
45: UVW magnetic contactor ON / OFF switch
46: Master dEb signal output
50: Output for CANopen control
52: Output for communication card control
66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input level reached output
68: SO output logic B
73: Over torque 3
74: Over torque 4
 02-18 Multi-function output direction 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000
Terminal counting value attained
 02-19 0~65500 0
(returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value attained
 02-20 0~65500 0
(not return to 0)
 02-21 Digital output gain (DFM) 1~55 1
60.00/
 02-22 Desired frequency attained 1 0.00~599.00 Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-23 0.00~599.00 Hz 2.00
attained 1
60.00/
 02-24 Desired frequency attained 2 0.00~599.00 Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-25 0.00~599.00 Hz 2.00
attained 2
Output frequency setting for 0.00~599.00 Hz
 02-34 0.00
multi-function output terminal (Motor speed when using PG Card)
External operation control selection 0: Disable
 02-35 0
after reset and activate 1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
11-15
Factory
Setting
 02-47 Zero-speed Level of Motor 0~65535 rpm 0
Status of multi-function input Read
02-50 Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
terminal only
Status of multi-function output Monitor the status of multi-function output Read
02-51
terminal terminals only
Display external multi-function input Read
02-52 Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
terminals used by PLC only
Display external multi-function Read
02-53 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
output terminals used by PLC only
Display memory of frequency Read
02-54 Read only
command used by external terminal only
Multi-function output terminal:
02-58 function 42: brake frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
checking point
02-78 Gear ratio for simple index function 4.0～1000.0 200.0
02-79 Automatic positioning angle setting 0.0～6480.0 180.0
Automatic positioning deceleration 0.00 Function disable
 02-80 0.00
time 0.01～100.00 s
EF active when terminal count value 0: Terminal count value attained, no EF display
 02-81 0
attained 1: Terminal count value attained, EF active
0: By Current Freq. Command
Initial frequency command (F) mode
 02-82 1: By Zero Freq. Command 0
after stop
2: Refer to Pr. 02-83 to set up
Initial frequency command (F)
 02-83 0.00~599.0 Hz 60.00
setting after stop
11-16
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters

Factory
Setting
 03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 0: No function 1
 03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1: Frequency command 0
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12: Auxiliary frequency input
13: PID compensation value
 03-03 Analog input bias (AVI) -100.0~100.0 % 0
 03-04 Analog input bias (ACI) -100.0~100.0 % 0
0: No bias
 03-07 Positive / negative bias mode (AVI)
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
0
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while
 03-08 Positive / negative bias mode (ACI)
serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
0: Negative frequency input is not allowed. Forward
and reverse run is controlled by digital keypad or
external terminal.
Reverse setting when analog signal
 03-10 1: Negative frequency input is allowed. Positive 0
input is negative frequency
frequency = forward run; negative frequency =
reverse run. Direction can not be switched by
digital keypad or external terminal control.
 03-11 Analog input gain (AVI) -500.0~500.0 % 100.0
 03-12 Analog input gain (ACI) -500.0~500.0 % 100.0
 03-15 Analog input filter time (AVI) 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-16 Analog input filter time (ACI) 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
Addition function of the analog 0: Disable (AVI, ACI)
 03-18 0
input 1: Enable (Exclude analog extension card)
0: Disable
Signal loss selection of analog 1: Continue operation at the last frequency
 03-19 0
input 4-20 mA 2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
11-17
Factory
Setting
0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
9: AVI
10: ACI
 03-20 Multi-function output 1 (AFM) 12: Iq current command 0
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current
15: Id feedback value
16: Vq-axis voltage command
17: Vd-axis voltage command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS-485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
 03-21 Gain of analog output (AFM) 0~500.0 % 100.0
0: Absolute value of output voltage
Analog output when in REV
 03-22 1: Reverse output 0 V; Positive output 0-10 V 0
direction (AFM)
2: Reverse output 5-0 V; Positive output 5-10 V
 03-27 AFM output bias -100.00~100.00 % 0.00
0: 0-10 V
 03-28 AVI terminal input selection 0
3: -10 V ~ +10 V (Pr. 03-69 ~ 03-74 is valid)
0: 4-20 mA
 03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1: 0-10 V 0
2: 0-20 mA
Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
bit 1: AFM
Status of PLC analog output Read
 03-30 bit 2: AO10
terminal only
bit 3: AO11
.
0: 0-10 V output
 03-31 AFM output selection 1: 0-20 mA output 0
2: 4-20 mA output
 03-32 AFM DC output setting level 0.00~100.00 % 0.00
11-18
Factory
Setting
 03-35 AFM filter output time 0.00 ~ 20.00 sec. 0.01
0：Disable
 03-39 VR input selection 1
1：Frequency command
 03-40 VR input bias -100.0~100.0 % 0.0
0: No bias
 03-41 VR positive / negative bias 0
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while
serving as the center
 03-42 VR gain -500.0~500.0 % 100.0
 03-43 VR filter time 0~2.00 sec. 0.01
Multi-function MO output by source 0: AVI
 03-44 0
of AI level 1: ACI
 03-45 AI upper level 1 -100 % ~100.00 % 50
 03-46 AI lower level 2 -100 % ~100.00 % 10
0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI (& AI10)
 03-50 Analog input curve selection 2: 3 point curve of ACI (& AI11) 0
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI (& AI10 & ＡI11)
(AI10, AI11 is valid when extension card is installed)
03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
 03-57 ACI lowest point 4.00
03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 03-58 ACI proportional lowest point 0.00~100.00 % 0.00
03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
 03-59 ACI mid-point 12.00
03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 03-60 ACI proportional mid-point 0.00~100.00 % 50.00
03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
 03-61 ACI highest point 20.00
03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 03-62 ACI proportional highest point 0.00~100.00 % 100.00
 03-63 AVI voltage lowest point 0.00~10.00 V 0.00
AVI voltage proportional lowest
 03-64 -100.00~100.00 % 0.00
point
 03-65 AVI voltage mid-point 0.00~10.00 V 5.00
 03-66 AVI voltage proportional mid-point -100.00~100.00 % 50.00
 03-67 AVI voltage highest point 0.00~10.00 V 10.00
AVI voltage proportional highest
 03-68 -100.00~100.00 % 100.00
point
11-19
Factory
Setting
0.00~ -10.00 V
 03-69 Negative AVI voltage lowest point 0.00
(valid when Pr. 03-28 set as -10 V ~ +10 V)
Negative AVI voltage proportional -100.00~100.00 %
 03-70 0.00
lowest point (valid when Pr. 03-28 set as -10 V ~ +10 V)
0.00~ -10.00 V
 03-71 Negative AVI voltage mid-point -5.00
 03-72 -50.00
mid-point (valid when Pr. 03-28 set as -10 V ~ +10 V)
0.00~ -10.00 V
 03-73 Negative AVI voltage highest point -10.00
 03-74 -100.00
highest point (valid when Pr. 03-28 set as -10 V ~ +10 V)
11-20
04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters

Factory
Setting
 04-00 1st stage speed frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
nd
 04-01 2 stage speed frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
 04-02 3rd stage speed frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
th
 04-04 5th stage speed frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
th
th
th
th
th
th
th
 04-50 PLC buffer 0 0~65535 0
 04-51 PLC buffer 1 0~65535 0
 04-52 PLC buffer 2 0~65535 0
 04-53 PLC buffer 3 0~65535 0
 04-54 PLC buffer 4 0~65535 0
 04-55 PLC buffer 5 0~65535 0
 04-56 PLC buffer 6 0~65535 0
 04-57 PLC buffer 7 0~65535 0
 04-58 PLC buffer 8 0~65535 0
 04-59 PLC buffer 9 0~65535 0
 04-60 PLC buffer 10 0~65535 0
 04-61 PLC buffer 11 0~65535 0
 04-62 PLC buffer 12 0~65535 0
 04-63 PLC buffer 13 0~65535 0
 04-64 PLC buffer 14 0~65535 0
 04-65 PLC buffer 15 0~65535 0
 04-66 PLC buffer 16 0~65535 0
 04-67 PLC buffer 17 0~65535 0
 04-68 PLC buffer 18 0~65535 0
 04-69 PLC buffer 19 0~65535 0
11-21
05 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: Dynamic test for induction motor (IM)
05-00 Motor parameter auto tuning 2: Static test for induction motor (IM) 0
13: High frequency stall test for PM synchronous
motor
Full-load current of induction
05-01 10~120 % of drive’s rated current #.##
motor 1 (A)
Rated power of induction motor 1
 05-02 0~655.35 kW #.##
(kW)
Rated speed of induction motor 1 0~65535
 05-03 1710
(rpm) 1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)
05-04 Pole number of induction motor 1 2~20 4
No-load current of induction
05-05 0~ Pr. 05-01 factory setting #.##
motor 1 (A)
Stator resistance (Rs) of
05-06 0~65.535  #.###
induction motor 1
Rotor resistance (Rr) of induction
05-07 0~65.535  #.###
motor 1
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) of
05-08 0~6553.5 mH #.#
induction motor 1
Stator inductance (Lx) of
05-09 0~6553.5 mH #.#
induction motor 1
motor 2 (A)
 05-14 0~655.35 kW #.##
(kW)
 05-15 1710
motor 2 (A)
05-18 0~65.535  #.###
induction motor 2
Rotor resistance (Rr) of induction
05-19 0~65.535  #.###
motor 2
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) of
05-20 0~6553.5 mH #.#
induction motor 2
11-22
Factory
Setting
Stator inductance (Lx) of
05-21 0~6553.5 mH #.#
induction motor 2
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
05-22 Multi-motors (induction) selection 1
3: Motor 3 (VF or SVC control mode only)
Frequency for Y-connection
 05-23 /ᇞ-connection switch of induction 0.00~599.00 Hz 60.00
motor
Y-connection /ᇞ-connection 0: Disable
05-24 0
switch of induction motor 1: Enable
Delay time for Y-connection
 05-25 /ᇞ-connection switch of induction 0.000~60.000 sec. 0.200
motor
Accumulative Watt-second of
05-26 Read only #.#
motor in low word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-second of
05-27 Read only #.#
motor in high word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-hour of motor
05-28 Read only #.#
(W-Hour)
05-29 Read only #.#
in low word (KW-Hour)
05-30 Read only #.#
in high word (KW-Hour)
Accumulative motor operation
05-31 00~1439 0
time (Min.)
Accumulative motor operation
05-32 00~65535 0
time (Day)
Induction motor or permanent 0: Induction Motor
05-33 magnet synchronous motors 1: SPM 0
selection 2: IPM
Full-load current of permanent
05-34 0~120 % of drive’s rated current #.#
magnet synchronous motor
Rated power of permanent
05-35 0.00~655.35 kW #.#
Rated speed of permanent
05-36 0~65535 rpm 2000
Pole number of permanent
05-37 0~65535 10
11-23
Factory
Setting
Stator resistance of permanent
05-39 0.000~65.535  0.000
Permanent magnet synchronous
05-40 0.00~655.35 mH 0.00
motor Ld
Permanent magnet synchronous
05-41 0.00~655.35 mH 0.00
motor Lq
Ke parameter of permanent
05-43 0.0~6553.5 (Unit: V / 1000 rpm) 0
motor 3 (A)
 05-65 0~655.35 kW #.##
(kW)
 05-66 1710
motor 3 (A)
05-69 0~65.535  #.###
induction motor 3
motor 4 (A)
 05-71 0~655.35 kW #.##
(kW)
 05-72 1710
motor 4 (A)
05-75 0~65.535  #.###
induction motor 4
11-24
06 Protection Parameters (1)

Factory
Setting
110V / 230V: 150.0~220.0 Vdc 180.0
 06-00 Low voltage level
460V: 300.0~440.0 Vdc 360.0
0: Disabled
 06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention 110V / 230V: 0.0~450.0 Vdc 380.0
460V: 0.0~900.0 Vdc 760.0
Selection for over-voltage stall 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
 06-02 0
prevention 1: Smart over-voltage stall prevention
Normal Load: 0~150 % (100 % corresponds to the 120
Over-current stall prevention during rated current of the drive)
 06-03
acceleration Heavy Load: 0~200 % (100 % corresponds to the 180
rated current of the drive)
Normal Load: 0~150 % (100 % corresponds to the 120
Over-current stall prevention during rated current of the drive)
 06-04
operation Heavy Load: 0~200 % (100 % corresponds to the 180
0: By current accel. / decel. time
1: By the 1st accel. / decel. time
Accel. / Decel. time selection of stall 2: By the 2nd accel. / decel. time
 06-05 0
prevention at constant speed 3: By the 3rd accel. / decel. time
4: By the 4th accel. / decel. time
5: By auto accel. / decel.
0: No function
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection
during constant speed operation
Over-torque detection selection 2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant
 06-06 0
(motor 1) speed operation
during RUN
4: Stop after Over-torque detection during RUN
Over-torque detection level 110~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current
 06-07 120
(motor 1) of the drive)
Over-torque detection time
 06-08 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
(motor 1)
11-25
Factory
Setting
0: No function
 06-09 0
during RUN
Over-torque detection level 10~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current
 06-10 120
(motor 2) of the drive)
Over-torque detection time
 06-11 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
(motor 2)
0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
Electronic thermal relay selection 1
 06-13 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2
(motor 1)
2: Disabled
Electronic thermal relay action time
 06-14 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
1 (motor 1)
Temperature level over-heat (OH)
 06-15 0.0~110.0 oC 105.0
warning
 06-16 Stall prevention limit level 0~100 % (Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04) 100
06-17 Fault record 1 0: No fault record 0
06-18 Fault record 2 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 0
06-19 Fault record 3 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0
06-20 Fault record 4 3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) 0
06-21 Fault record 5 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0
06-22 Fault record 6 6: Over-current at stop (ocS) 0
Fault record 7 (14-70) 7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
Fault record 8 (14-71) 8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
Fault record 9 (14-72) 9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
Fault record 10 (14-73) 10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
18: TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error
( tH1o)
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay protection 1 (EoL1)
11-26
Factory
Setting
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
28: Low current (uC)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (Pcod)
54: Communication error (CE1)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
61: Y-connection / △-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
72: Channel 1 (S1~DCM) safety loop error (STL1)
76: Safety torque off (STo)
78: Internal loop error (STL3)
79: U phase Over current before run (Aoc)
80: V phase Over current before run (boc)
81: W phase Over current before run (coc)
82: U phase output phase loss (oPL1)
83: V phase output phase loss (oPL2)
84: W phase output phase loss (oPL3)
11-27
Factory
Setting
87: Drive over load in low frequency (oL3)
89: Initial rotor position detection error (roPd)
101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE)
102: CANopen software disconnect 2 (CHbE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen memory error (CFrE)
121: Internal communication error (CP20)
127: Software version error (CP33)
134: Electronics thermal relay 3 protection (EoL3)
140: GFF detected when power on (Hd6)
141: GFF occurs before run (b4GFF)
142: Auto tuning error 1 (DC test stage) (AUE1)
143: Auto tuning error 2 (High frequency test stage)
(AUE2)
144: Auto tuning error 3 (Rotary test stage)
(AUE3)
 06-23 Fault output option 1 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code) 0

(motor 2)
2: Disabled
Electronic thermal relay action time

 06-28 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
2 (motor 2)
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-29 PTC detection selection 0
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
 06-30 PTC level 0.0 ~100.0 % 50.0
11-28
Factory
Setting
Frequency command for Read
06-31 0.00~599.00 Hz
malfunction only
Read
06-32 Output frequency at malfunction 0.00~599.00 Hz
only
Read
06-33 Output voltage at malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V
only
Read
06-34 DC voltage at malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V
only
Read
06-35 Output current at malfunction 0.00~655.35 Amp
only
Read
06-36 IGBT temperature at malfunction 0.0~6553.5 oC
only
Capacitance temperature at Read
06-37 0.0~6553.5 oC
malfunction only
Read
06-38 Motor speed in rpm at malfunction 0~65535 rpm
only
Status of multi-function input Read
06-40 0000h~FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Status of multi-function output Read
06-41 0000h~FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Read
06-42 Drive’s status at malfunction 0000h~FFFFh
only
0: STO Latch
 06-44 STO latch selection 0
1: STO No Latch

Treatment to output phase loss 1: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-45 3
detection (OPHL) 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
 06-46 Detection time of output phase loss 0.000~65.535 sec. 0.500

Current detection level of output
 06-47 0.00~100.00 % 1.00
phase loss
 06-48 DC Brake time of output phase loss 0.000~65.535 sec. 0.000
0: Disabled
 06-49 LvX auto reset 0
1: Enabled
Treatment for the detected input 0: Warn and ramp to stop
 06-53 0
phase Loss (OrP) 1: Warn and coast to stop
11-29
Factory
Setting
0: Constant rated current and limit carrier wave by
load current and temperature
1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current
 06-55 Derating protection 0
by setting carrier wave
2: Constant rated current (same as setting 0), but
close current limit
 06-56 PT100 voltage level 1 0.000~10.000 V 5.000
 06-57 PT100 voltage level 2 0.000~10.000 V 7.000
 06-58 PT100 level 1 frequency protect 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
Delay Time of Activating PT100
 06-59 0~6000 sec. 60
Level 1 Frequency Protection
Software detection GFF current
 06-60 0.0~6553.5 % 60.0
level
 06-61 Software detection GFF filter time 0.00~655.35 sec. 0.10
Operation time of fault record 1 Read
06-63 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-64 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
06-65 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-66 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
06-67 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-68 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
06-69 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-70 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
 06-71 Low current setting level 0.0 ~ 100.0 % 0.0
 06-72 Low current detection time 0.00 ~ 360.00 sec. 0.00
0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
 06-73 Treatment for low current 0
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue
06-90 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-91 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
11-30
Factory
Setting
06-92 0~65535 days
(Day) only
06-93 0~1439 min.
(Min.) only
11-31
07 Special Parameters
Factory
Setting
110 V / 230 V: 350.0~450.0 Vdc 370.0
 07-00 Software brake level
460 V: 700.0~900.0 Vdc 740.0
 07-01 DC brake current level 0~100 % 0
 07-02 DC brake time at startup 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-03 DC brake time at stop 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-04 DC brake start frequency 0.00~599.00 Hz 0.00
 07-05 Voltage increasing gain 1~200 % 100
0: Stop operation
Restart after momentary power
 07-06 1: Speed tracking by the speed before the power loss 0
loss
2: Speed tracking by minimum output frequency
 07-07 Allowed power loss duration 0.0~20.0 sec. 2.0
 07-08 Base block time 0.1~5.0 sec. 0.5
 07-09 Current limit of speed tracking 20~200 % 100
0: Stop operation
 07-10 Treatment of restart after fault 1: Speed tracking by current speed 0
 07-11 Restart times after fault 0~10 0
0: Disabled
1: Speed tracking by maximum output frequency
 07-12 Speed tracking during start-up 0
2: Speed tracking by motor frequency at start
0: Disabled
1: dEb with auto accel. / decal., the frequency will not
 07-13 dEb function selection return after power recovery 0
2: dEb with auto accel. / decal., the frequency will
return after power recovery
 07-15 Dwell time at accel. 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-16 Dwell frequency at accel. 0.00 ~ 599.00 Hz 0.00
 07-17 Dwell time at decel. 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-18 Dwell frequency at decel. 0.00 ~ 599.00 Hz 0.00
0: Fan always ON
1: Fan will be OFF after the AC motor drive stops 1
minute
 07-19 Fan cooling control 2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When 3
the AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when the temperature attain around
60 oC
11-32
Factory
Setting
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
Deceleration of emergency or
 07-20 3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time 0
forced stop th
4: Stop by 4 deceleration time
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
0: Disabled
 07-21 Auto energy-saving setting 0
1: Enabled
 07-22 Energy-saving gain 10~1000 % 100
0: Enable AVR
Auto voltage regulation (AVR)
 07-23 1: Disable AVR 0
function
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
Filter time of torque

 07-24 compensation 0.001~10.000 sec. 0.050
(V/F and SVC control mode)
Filter time of slip compensation
 07-25 0.001~10.000 sec. 0.100
IM: 0~10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
 07-26 Torque compensation gain 1
PM: 0~5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
Slip compensation gain
 07-27 0.00~10.00 (Default value is 1 in SVC mode) 0.00
0.0~100.0 %
 07-29 Slip deviation level 0
0: No detection
 07-30 Detection time of slip deviation 0.0~10.0 sec. 1.0

 07-31 Treatment of slip deviation 0
3: No warning
Motor shock compensation

 07-32 0~10000 1000
factor
 07-33 Return time of fault restart 0.0~6000.0 sec. 60.0
07-46 OOB sampling time 0.1 ~ 120.0 sec. 1.0
07-47 Number of OOB sampling times 00 ~ 32 20
07-48 OOB average sampling angle Read Only #.#
 07-62 dEb gain 0~65535 8000
Torque compensation gain IM: 0~10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
 07-71 1
(motor 2) PM: 0~5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
11-33
Factory
Setting
Slip compensation gain 0.00~10.00
 07-72 0.00
(motor 2) (Default value is 1 in SVC mode)
 07-73 1
(motor 3)
 07-75 1
(motor 4)
11-34
08 High-function PID Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input,
without direction (Pr. 10-16)
Terminal selection of PID
 08-00 4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00) 0
feedback
5: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input,
without direction (Pr. 10-16)
7: Negative PID feedback: by communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback: by communication protocol
 08-01 Proportional gain (P) 0.0~500.0 1.0
 08-02 Integral time (I) 0.00~100.00 sec. 1.00
 08-03 Derivative time (D) 0.00~1.00 sec. 0.00
Upper limit of integral
 08-04 0.0~100.0 % 100.0
control
PID output command limit
 08-05 0.0~110.0 % 100.0
(positive limit)
PID feedback value by
 08-06 -200.00~200.00 % 0.00
communication protocol
 08-07 PID delay time 0.0~2.5 sec. 0.0
Feedback signal detection
 08-08 0.0~3600.0 sec. 0.0
time
Feedback signal fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop
 08-09 0
treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
 08-10 Sleep frequency 0.00 ~ 599.00 Hz 0.00

 08-11 Wake-up frequency 0.00 ~ 599.00 Hz 0.00
 08-12 Sleep time 0.0 ~ 6000.0 sec. 0.0
 08-13 PID deviation level 1.0 ~ 50.0 % 10.0
 08-14 PID deviation time 0.1~300.0 sec. 5.0
 08-15 Filter time for PID feedback 0.1~300.0 sec. 5.0
0: Parameter setting
 08-16 PID compensation selection 0
1: Analog input
 08-17 PID compensation -100.0 ~ +100.0 % 0
Setting of sleep mode 0: Refer to PID output command
08-18 0
function 1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 08-19 Wakeup integral limit 0.0~200.0 % 50.0
11-35
Factory
Setting
0: Serial connection
08-20 PID mode selection 0
1: Parallel connection
Enable PID to change 0: Operation direction can be changed
08-21 0
operation direction 1: Operation direction can not be changed
 08-22 Wakeup delay time 0.00~600.00 sec. 0.00
bit 0 = 1, PID reverse running must follow the setting of
Pr. 00-23.
bit 0 = 0, PID reverse running refers to PID’s calculated
 08-23 PID control flag 2
value.
bit 1 = 1, PID Kp gain is 2 decimal place
PID output command limit
 08-26 0.0~110.0 % 100.0
(reverse limit)
Acceleration / deceleration
 08-27 0.00~655.35 sec. 0.00
time of PID command
0: PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to max.
Selection of frequency base
output frequency (Pr. 01-00)
08-29 corresponding to 100.00 % 0
1: PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to the
PID
input value of auxiliary frequency
11-36
09 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
 09-00 Communication address 1~254 1
 09-01 COM1 transmission speed 4.8~115.2 Kbps 9.6
0: Warn and continue operation

 09-02 COM1 transmission fault treatment 3
3: No warning and continue operation
 09-03 COM1 time-out detection 0.0~100.0 sec. 0.0

1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
 09-04 COM1 communication protocol 9: 8O1 (ASCII) 1
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
Delay time of communication
 09-09 0.0~200.0 ms 2.0
response
Main frequency of the
09-10 0.00~599.00 Hz 60.00
communication
 09-11 Block transfer 1 0~65535 0
 09-12 Block transfer 2 0~65535 0
 09-13 Block transfer 3 0~65535 0
 09-14 Block transfer 4 0~65535 0
 09-15 Block transfer 5 0~65535 0
 09-16 Block transfer 6 0~65535 0
 09-17 Block transfer 7 0~65535 0
 09-18 Block transfer 8 0~65535 0
 09-19 Block transfer 9 0~65535 0
 09-20 Block transfer 10 0~65535 0
11-37
Factory
Setting
 09-21 Block transfer 11 0~65535 0
 09-22 Block transfer 12 0~65535 0
 09-23 Block transfer 13 0~65535 0
 09-24 Block transfer 14 0~65535 0
 09-25 Block transfer 15 0~65535 0
 09-26 Block transfer 16 0~65535 0
0: Decoding Method 1
09-30 Communication decoding method 1
1: Decoding Method 2
 09-33 PLC command force to 0 0~65535 0
09-35 PLC address 1~254 2
0: Disable
09-36 CANopen slave address 0
1~127
0: 1 Mbps
1: 500 Kbps
2: 250 Kbps
09-37 CANopen speed 0
3: 125 Kbps
4: 100 Kbps (Delta only)
5: 50 Kbps
bit 0: CANopen software disconnection 1 (CANopen
Guarding Time out)
bit 1: CANopen software disconnection 2 (CANopen
Heartbeat Time out)
09-39 CANopen warning record bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out 0
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: CANopen hardware disconnection warning
(Can Bus Off)
bit 6: Error protocol of CANopen
0: Delta defined decoding method
09-40 CANopen decoding method 1
1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol
0: Node reset state
1: Com reset state
2: Boot up state Read
09-41 CANopen communication status
3: Pre operation state Only
4: Operation state
5: Stop state
11-38
Factory
Setting
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state Read
09-42 CANopen control status
4: Enable operation state Only
7: Quick Stop Active state
13: Error reaction activation state
14: Error state
bit 0: CANopen reset, the internal address 20XX is 0
bit 1: CANopen reset, the internal address 264X is 0
09-43 CANopen reset index 65535
bit 2: CANopen reset, the internal address 26AX is 0
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet slave
2: Profibus-DP slave
Identifications for communication
09-60 3: CANopen slave ##
card
4: Modbus-TCP slave
5: EtherNet/IP slave
10: Backup power supply
Firmware version of communication
09-61 Read only ##
card
09-62 Product code Read only ##
09-63 Error code Read only ##
DeviceNet: 0-63
 09-70 Address of communication card 1
Profibus-DP: 1-125
 Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125 Kbps
1: 250 Kbps
2: 500 Kbps
3: 1 Mbps (Delta Only)
 Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta Only)
0: 10 Kbps
 09-71 Setting of DeviceNet speed 1: 20 Kbps 2
2: 50 Kbps
3: 100 Kbps
4: 125 Kbps
5: 250 Kbps
6: 500 Kbps
7: 800 Kbps
8: 1 Mbps
11-39
Factory
Setting
0: Disable
In this mode, baud rate can only be 125 Kbps,
250 Kbps, 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps in standard
 09-72 Other setting of DeviceNet speed DeviceNet speed 0
1: Enable
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be
same as CANopen (0-8).
IP Configuration of the 0: Static IP
 09-75 0
communication card 1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
IP address 1 of the communication
 09-76 0~255 0
card
 09-77 0~255 0
card
 09-78 0~255 0
card
 09-79 0~255 0
card
Address mask 1 of the
 09-80 0~255 0
communication card
 09-81 0~255 0
communication card
 09-82 0~255 0
communication card
 09-83 0~255 0
communication card
Getway address 1 of the
 09-84 0~255 0
communication card
 09-85 0~255 0
communication card
 09-86 0~255 0
communication card
 09-87 0~255 0
communication card
Password for communication card
 09-88 0~99 0
(low word)
Password for communication card
 09-89 0~99 0
(high word)
0: No function
 09-90 Reset communication card 0
1: Reset, return to factory setting
11-40
Factory
Setting
bit 0: Enable IP filter
bit 1: Internet parameters enable (1 bit)
When IP address is set up, this bit will be
enabled. After updating the parameters of
communication card, this bit will change to
Additional setting for
 09-91 disable. 0
communication card
bit 2: Login password enable (1 bit)
When enter login password, this bit will be
enabled. After updating the parameters of
communication card, this bit will change to
disable.
bit 0: Password enable
When the communication card is set with
09-92 Status of communication card 0
password, this bit will be enabled. When the
password is clear, this bit will be disabled.
11-41
10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: Disabled
10-00 Encoder type selection 0
5: Pulse input (MI7)
10-01 Encoder pulse per round 1~20000 600
0: Disabled
10-02 Encoder input type setting 0
5: Single-phase input (MI7)
 10-04 Electrical gear at load side A1 1~65535 100
 10-05 Electrical gear at motor side B1 1~65535 100
 10-06 Electrical gear at load side A2 1~65535 100
 10-07 Electrical gear at motor side B2 1~65535 100
Treatment for Encoder
 10-08 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
feedback fault
Detection time of Encoder 0.0~10.0 sec.
 10-09 1.0
feedback fault 0: No function
 10-10 Encoder stall level 0~120 % (0: No function) 115
 10-11 Detection time of Encoder stall 0.0 ~ 2.0 sec. 0.1
 10-12 Treatment for Encoder stall 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
 10-13 Encoder slip range 0~50 % (0: No function) 50
 10-14 Detection time of Encoder slip 0.0~10.0 sec. 0.5
Treatment for Encoder stall and
 10-15 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
slip error
0: Disabled
 10-16 Pulse input type setting 0
 10-17 Electrical gear A 1~65535 100
 10-18 Electrical gear B 1~65535 100
PG2 pulse input speed
 10-21 0~65.535 sec. 0.100
command filter time
PG2 pulse input speed 0: Electronic frequency
10-22 0
command mode 1: Mechanical frequency (base on pole pair)
 10-29 Top limit of frequency deviation 0.00~100.00 Hz 20.00
 10-31 I/F mode, current command 0~150 % Rated current of motor 40
PM FOC sensorless speed
 10-32 0.00~600.00 Hz 5.00
estimator bandwidth
PM sensorless speed estimator
 10-34 0.00~655.35 1.00
low-pass filter gain
11-42
Factory
Setting
Frequency point when switch
 10-39 from I/F mode to PM sensorless 0.00~599.00 Hz 20.00
mode.
　 Frequency when switch from
 10-40 PM sensorless observer mode 0.00~599.00 Hz 20.00
to V/F mode.
Initial angle detection pulse
 10-42 0.0~3.0 1.0
value
 10-49 Zero voltage time while start up 00.000~60.000 sec. 00.000
 10-51 Injection frequency 0~1200 Hz 500
15.0/
 10-52 Injection magnitude 0.0~200.0 V
30.0
0: Disabled
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to
 10-53 Position detection method zero degrees 0
2: High frequency injection
3: Pulse injection
11-43
11 Advanced Parameters
Factory
Setting
bit 3: Dead Time compensation closed
11-00 System control 0
bit 7: Selection to save or not save the frequency
 11-06 ASR 1 gain 0~40 Hz (IM) / 1~100 Hz (PM) 10
 11-07 ASR 1 integral time 0.000~10.000 sec. 0.100
0: 2-phase
11-41 PWM mode selection 2
2: Space vector
 11-42 System control flag 0000~FFFFh 0000
11-44
13 Macro / User Define Macro

Factory
Setting
00: Disabled
01: User Parameter
02: Compressor
03: Fan
13-00 Application selection 04: Pump 00
05: Conveyor
06: Machine tool
07: Packing
08: Textiles
13-01 Application parameters
∫
13-50 (user defined)
11-45
14 Protection Parameters (2)

Factory
Setting
Read
14-50 Output frequency at malfunction 2 0.00~599.00 Hz
only
Read
14-51 DC voltage at malfunction 2 0.0~6553.5 V
only
Read
14-52 Output current at malfunction 2 0.00~655.35 Amp
only
Read
14-53 IGBT temperature at malfunction 2 -3276.7~3276.7 oC
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
11-46
Factory
Setting
Read
only
14-70 Fault record 7 Refer to fault record Pr. 6-17~06-22 0
0: No function
 14-74 0
during RUN
10~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current
 14-75 Over-torque detection level (motor 3) 120
of the drive)
 14-76 Over-torque detection time (motor 3) 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
0: No function
 14-77 0
(motor) speed operation
during RUN
10~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current
 14-78 Over-torque detection level (motor 4) 120
of the drive)
 14-79 Over-torque detection time (motor 4) 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
(motor 3)
2: Disabled
Electronic thermal relay action time 3
 14-81 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
(motor 3)
(motor 4)
2: Disabled
Electronic thermal relay action time 4
 14-83 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
(motor 4)
11-47
[This page intentionally left blank]
11-48
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsMS300
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings
12-1 Description of parameter settings
00 Drive Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current

Settings Read Only
 Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Using the following table to check if
Pr. 00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr. 00-01 corresponds to the identity
code of Pr. 00-00.
 The factory setting is the rated current for normal duty. Please set Pr. 00-16 to 1 to display the
rated current for the heavy duty.
Series 115V Series – 1-Phase 230V Series – 1-Phase
Frame A B C A/B B C
kW 0.2 0.4 0.75 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
HP 0.25 0.5 1 0.25 0.5 1 2 3
Identity Code 102 103 104 302 303 304 305 306
Rated Current
1.6 2.5 4.8 1.6 2.8 4.8 7.5 11
for Heavy Duty
Rated Current
1.8 2.7 5.5 1.8 3.2 5 8.5 12.5
for Normal Duty
230V Series – 3-Phase

Frame A B C D E F
kW 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
HP 0.25 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Identity Code 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211
Rated Current
1.6 2.8 4.8 7.5 11 17 25 33 49 65
for Heavy Duty
Rated Current
1.8 3.2 5 8 12.5 19.5 27 36 51 69
for Normal Duty
460V Series – 3-Phase

Frame A/B B C D E F
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
HP 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Identity Code 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413
Rated Current
1.5 2.7 4.2 5.5 9 13 17 25 32 38 45
for Heavy Duty
Rated Current
1.8 3 4.6 6.5 10.5 15.7 20.5 28 36 41.5 49
for Normal Duty
12-00-1
Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Parameter write protect
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC
7: Reset CANopen index (Slave)
8: Keypad doesn't respond
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 50 Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 60Hz)
(saving the setting value of user defined parameter 13-01~13-50)
(saving the setting value of user defined parameter 13-01~13-50)
 When it is set to 1: all parameters are read only except Pr. 00-02, 00-07, and 00-08. It needs to
set Pr. 00-02 to 0 before changing other parameter settings.
 When it is set to 5: kWh display value can be reset to 0 even when the drive is operating.
Pr. 05-26, 05-27, 05-28, 05-29, 05-30 reset to 0.
 When it is set to 6: clear internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal
CANopen master)
 When it is set to 7: reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
 When it is set to 9 or 10: all parameters are reset to factory settings. If password is set in
Pr. 00-08, input the password set in Pr.00-07 to reset to factory settings.
 When it is set to 6, 9, 10: please re-power the motor drive after setting.
 Start-up Display Selection

Factory setting: 0
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
Settings
2: U (user defined) Pr. 00-04
3: A (output current)
 This parameter determines the start-up display page. User defined choice display according to
the setting in Pr. 00-04.
 Content of Multi-function Display (User Defined)

Factory setting: 3
Settings 0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amps)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v) (Unit: Vdc)
4: Display output voltage of U, V, W (E) (Unit: Vac)
5: Display output power angle of U, V, W (n) (Unit: deg)
12-00-2
6: Display output power of U, V, W (P) (Unit: kW)

7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r) (Unit: rpm)
10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
11: Display signal value of AVI analog input terminal (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Display signal value of ACI analog input terminal (2.) (Unit: %)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT (i.) (Unit: oC)
16: The status of digital input (ON / OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON / OFF) (o)
18: Display the multi-stage speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.)
22: Pulse input frequency (S.)
23: Pulse input position (q.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00 %) (o.) (Unit: %)
26: GFF Ground Fault (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: Vdc)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: Pr. 00-05 display user gain (K)
35: Control mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)
38: Display status of drive (6.)
41: KWH display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID target value (h.) (Unit: %)
43: PID offset (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
46: Display auxiliary frequency value (U.) (Unit: Hz)
47: Display master frequency value (A.) (Unit: Hz)
48: Display frequency value after addition and subtraction of auxiliary and
master frequency (L.) (Unit: Hz)
NOTE
1. ● When Pr. 10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr. 10-02 is set to 1, 2, the display range for PG feedback will
be from 0 to 4000.
● When Pr. 10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr. 10-02 is set to 3, 4, 5, the display range for PG feedback will
be from 0 to 1000.
2. ● It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr. 03-03 ~ 03-10).
Example: assume that AVI input voltage is 0 V, Pr. 03-03 is 10.0 % and Pr. 03-07 is 4 (Serve bias
as the center).
3. Example: If MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
N.O. normally opened contact: (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Terminal MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
Status 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
12-00-3
● The value is 0000 0000 0010 0001 in binary and 0021H in HEX. When Pr. 00-04 is set to “16” or
“19”, it will display“0021h”with LED u page is ON in the keypad.
● The setting 16 is the ON / OFF status of digital input by Pr. 02-12 setting and the setting 19 is the
corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of digital input.
● When MI1 / MI2 default setting is two-wire/ three-wire operation control (2-00 ≠ 0), and MI3 set
as three-wire, it will not affected by Pr. 02-12.
● User can set 16 to monitor digital input status and then set 19 to check if the wire is normal.
4. Example: Assume that RY: Pr. 02-13 is set to 9 (Drive is ready). After the drive powered on, if there is
no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be shown as follows.
N.O. normally opened contact:
Terminal MO2 MO1 RY1
Status 0 0 1
● At the meanwhile, if Pr. 00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED
u page is ON in the keypad.
● The setting 17 is the ON / OFF status of digital output by Pr. 02-18 setting and the setting 20 is
the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of digital output.
● User can set 17 to monitor the digital output status and then set 20 to check if the wire is normal.
5. ● Set value 8: 100 % means the motor rated torque.
Motor rated torque = (motor rated power x 60 / 2π) / motor rated rotating speed.
6. ● Set value 25: when display value reaches 100.00 %, the drive will show “oL” as an overload
warning.
7. ● Set value 38:
bit 0: The drive is running forward.
bit 1: The drive is running backward.
bit 2: The drive is ready.
bit 3: Errors occurred on the drive.
bit 4: The drive is running.
bit 5: Warnings occurred on the drive.
 Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency

Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings 0~160.00
 This parameter is to set user defined unit coefficient gain. Set Pr. 00-04 = 31 to display the
calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr. 00-05).
Software Version
Settings Read only
 Parameter Protection Password Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0～65535
Display 0~3 (the times of password attempts)
12-00-4
 This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr. 00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
 To avoid future inconvenience, be sure to write down the set value after setting this parameter.
 Pr. 00-07 and Pr. 00-08 are used to prevent personnel set other parameters mistakenly.
 When the user forget the password, clear the setting by input 9999 and press ENTER key, then
input 9999 again and press ENTER within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings will return
to factory setting.
 When setting the password, all the parameters are read 0, except Pr. 00-08.
 Parameter Protection Password Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0～65535
0: No password protection or password is entered correctly (Pr. 00-07)
1: Password has been set
 This parameter is for setting the password protection. Password can be set directly at first time.
The value of Pr. 00-08 will become 1 after setting, which means password protection is activated.
When the password is set, if any parameter setting needs to be changed, be sure to enter correct
password in Pr. 00-07, and then the password will be inactivated temporarily with Pr. 00-08
changing to 0. At this time, parameters setting can be changed. After setting, re-power the motor
drive, and the password will be activated again.
 To cancel the password protection, after entering correct password in Pr. 00-07, Pr. 00-08 also
needs to be set as 0 again to inactive password protection permanently. If not, password
protection will be active after motor drive re-power.
 The keypad copy function will work normally only when the password protection is inactivated
temporarily or permanently, and the password set in Pr. 00-08 will not be copied to keypad. So
when copying parameters from keypad to motor drive, the password need to be set manually
again in the motor drive to active password protection.
12-00-5
Control Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Speed mode
 This parameter determines the control mode of the AC motor drive.
Control of Speed Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: V/F (IM V/F control)
1: VFPG (IM V/F control + Encoder)
2: SVC (Pr. 05-33 set as IM or PM)
 This parameter determines the control mode of the AC motor drive:
0: IM V/F control: user can design proportion of V/F as required and control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: IM V/F control + Encoder pulse input: user can use encoder for the closed-loop speed
control.
2: IM sensorless vector control: get the optimal control by the auto-tuning of motor parameters.
 When Pr. 00-10 = 0 and set Pr. 00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows:
DC BUS
DC B US Vo l ta g e
Vo l ta g e
P r o te cti o n
De te cti o n
Cu r r e n t De te cti o n
Fcmd
P r. 0 0 - 2 0 +
V /F X AV R IG B T M
ta b l e 07-23 P WM
+
01-00,01-01 01-00
Accel. / Decel. time 01-02,01-03 01-01
01-04,01-05 01-02
01-06,01-07 05-01
01-08 05-02
05-03
05-04
Torque
LPF Compensation Ir ms
Co mp e n sa ti o n
vo l ta g e
07-24 07-26
 When Pr. 00-10 = 0 and set Pr. 00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is shown as
follows:
Curr ent
Fc md Detection
Freq uenc y Voltage
Pr.00-20 Error V/F C om mand + AVR IGBT
X M
table 07-23 PWM
+
Voltage
Compensation
Encoder
Value Power
LPF Torque F actor
c ompens ation Irm s
07-24
07-26
LPF Actual
07-25 rotating speed
12-00-6
 When Pr. 00-10 = 0 and set Pr. 00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows:
DC BUS
DC BUS Volt age
Voltage
Det ect ion Protect ion
Current Detection
Fc md
Pr.00-20 +
V/ F AVR IGBT M
table 07-23 PWM
+
01-00, 01-01 01- 00
Ac cel. / D ecel. ti me 01-02 01- 01
01- 02
05- 01
05- 02
05- 03
05- 04
LPF Sli p Irms

07-25 Compensat ion
Slip compensation amount
07-27
Load Selection
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
 Normal duty: over load rated output current 150 % in 3 seconds. (120 %, 1 minutes) Please refer
to Pr. 00-17 for the setting of carrier. Refer to Pr. 00-01 or specification table for the rated current.
 Heavy duty: over load rated output current 200 % in 3 seconds. (150 %,1 minutes) Please refer to
Pr. 00-17 for the setting of carrier wave. Refer to Pr. 00-01 or specification table for the rated
current.
 When the set value of Pr. 00-16 changes, Pr. 00-01 will follow the change, the default value and
maximum of Pr. 06-03, 06-04 will change according to its change.
 In Normal Duty, the default setting of Pr. 06-03 and Pr. 06-04 is 160 %, maximum is 180 %.
However, if DC voltage is higher than 700 Vdc (460V series) or 350V (230V series), then the
maximum will be 145 %.
 In Heavy Duty, the default setting of Pr. 06-03 and Pr. 06-04 is 180 %, maximum is 200 %.
However, if DC voltage is higher than 700 Vdc (460V series) or 350V (230V series), then the
maximum will be 165 %
Carrier Frequency
Factory Setting: 4 / 4
Settings Normal load: 2~15 KHz
Heavy load: 2~15 KHz
 This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
12-00-7
Series 230V 460V

1~15HP 20~30HP 1~20HP 25~40HP
Models
[0.75~11kW] [15~37kW] [0.75~15kW] [18.5~55kW]
Settings Range 02~15kHz 02~10kHz 02~15kHz 02~10kHz
Normal Duty
4 kHz
Factory Setting
Heavy Duty
4 kHz
Factory Setting
Carrier Electromagnetic Heat Current

Acoustic Noise or Leakage
Frequency Noise Dissipation Wave
Current
2 kHz Significant Minimal Minimal
8 kHz
15 kHz
Minimal Significant Significant
 From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if
the surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is good to
reduce the temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, the
entire wiring and prevention of interference should be considered.
 When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, must decreasing the carrier
frequency to protect the drive. Refer to Pr. 06-55 for the related setting and details.
PLC Command Mask

Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings bit 0: Control command forced by PLC control
bit 1: Frequency command forced by PLC control
 This parameter determines if frequency command or control command is locked by PLC.
 Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command (Refer to Pr. 10-16 without
direction)
[Note]: Need to use with MO setting as 42, or use with KPC-CC01
12-00-8
 The AUTO / HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or multi-function
input terminal (MI) to set the source of the master frequency.
 Pr. 00-20 and Pr. 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO
mode. Pr. 00-30 and Pr. 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in
HAND mode.
 The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal
used to switch AUTO / HAND mode, the highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When
the external terminal is OFF, the drive will not accept any operation signal and cannot execute
JOG.
 Source of the Operation Command (AUTO)

Factory Setting: 0
[Note]：Need to use with MO setting as 42, or use with KPC-CC01
 It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.
 When the operation command is controlled by the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional), keys RUN,
STOP and JOG (F1) are valid.
 Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
 The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the drive receives stop command.
1. Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates to 0 or minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09)
according to current set deceleration time and then stop (by Pr. 01-07).
12-00-9
2. Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops output immediately, and the motor free runs to stop
according to the load inertia.
 It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from
being wasted in applications where the motor must stop immediately after the drive stops.
The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
 If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select
“coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps.
 Control of Motor Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable forward / reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
 This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward / reverse Direction. It may be
used to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure the user or
damage the equipment.
Memory of Digital Operator (Keypad) Frequency Command

Settings Read only
 If keypad is the source of frequency command, when Lv or Fault occurs, the present frequency
command will be saved in this parameter.
 User Defined Characteristics

Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0~3: user defined decimal place
0000h-0000b: no decimal place
0001h-0001b: one decimal place
0002h-0010b: two decimal place
0003h-0011b: three decimal place
bit 4~15：user defined unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: M/S
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: ppm
008xh: l / m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
12-00-10
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: M
012xh: ft
010xh: ft/m
011xh: M
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: Psi
01Dxh: Atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
 bit 0~3: Control frequency F page, unit of user defined (Pr. 00-04 = d10, PID feedback value) and
the decimal point of Pr. 00-26 which supports up to 3 decimal points.
 bit 4~15: Control frequency F page, unit of user defined (Pr. 00-04 = d10, PID feedback value)
and the displayed units of Pr. 00-26.
0 0 0 0 h
u se r d e fin e d d e cima l p la ce
0:no decimal place
1:one decimal place
2:two decimal place
3:three decimal place
u se r d e fin e d u n it
0: Hz
1: rpm
2: %
3: kg
12-00-11
 Must be converted to decimal when using the keypad to set parameters.

Example: If user defined unit is inWG and the third decimal point, according to the information
above, corresponding to inWG is 01Axh (x is the set decimal point), and
corresponding to the third decimal place is 0003h. Then inWG and the third decimal
point displayed in hexadecimal is 01A3h, converted to decimal is 01A3h = 419.
Set Pr. 00-25 = 419 to complete setting.
Max. User Defined Value

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr. 00-25 set to no decimal place)
 When Pr. 00-26 is NOT set to 0, the user defined value is enabled. After selecting displayed unit
and decimal point by Pr. 00-25, the setting value of Pr. 00-26 will correspond to Pr. 01-00 (Max.
operation frequency of motor), then the operation frequency of motor will be a linear
correspondence with displayed value of digital keypad.
Example: When the frequency at Pr. 01-00 = 60.00 Hz, the max. user defined value at Pr. 00-26
is 100.0 %. That also means Pr. 00-25 is set at 0021h to select % as the unit.
NOTE
The drive will display as Pr. 00-25 setting when Pr. 00-25 is properly set and Pr. 00-26 is not 0.
User Defined Value

Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only
 Pr. 00-27 will display user defined value when Pr. 00-26 is not set to 0.
 User defined value is valid only when Pr. 00-20 (source of frequency) is set to digital keypad or
RS-485 communication.
LOCAL / REMOTE Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local / Remote, the drive stops
2: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for
frequency and operation status
3: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL setting for
frequency and operation status
4: Switching Local / Remote, the drive runs as LOCAL setting when switch to
Local and runs as REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for frequency
and operation status.
 AUTO / HAND mode can be selected or switched by using digital keypad KPC-CC01
(optional) or setting multi-function input terminal MI = 41, 42.
12-00-12
 The factory setting of Pr. 00-29 is 0 (standard Hand-Off-Auto function). The AUTO frequency and
source of operation can be set by Pr. 00-20 and Pr. 00-21, and the HAND frequency and source
of operation can be set by Pr. 00-30 and Pr. 00-31.
 When external terminal (MI) is set to 41 and 42 (AUTO / HAND mode), the settings of Pr. 00-29 =
1,2,3,4 will be disabled. The external terminal has the highest priority of command, and Pr. 00-29
will function as standard HOA mode.
 When Pr. 00-29 is not set to 0, Local / Remote function is enabled, the top right corner of digital
keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) will display “LOC” or “REM”. The LOCAL frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr. 00-20 and Pr. 00-21, and the REMOTE frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr. 00-30 and Pr. 00-31. LOC / REM mode can be selected or switched
by using digital keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or setting multi-function input terminal MI = 56. The
AUTO key of the digital keypad is for the REMOTE function, and HAND key is for the LOCAL
function.
 When external terminal (MI) is set to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if Pr. 00-29 is set to 0,
then the external terminal function is disabled.
 When external terminal (MI) is set to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if Pr. 00-29 is not set to 0,
then AUTO / HAND key will be disabled, and the external terminal has the highest priority of
command.
 Source of the Master Frequency Command (HAND)

Factory Setting: 0
4: Pulse input without direction command (Refer to Pr.10-16 without direction)
 It is used to set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.
 Source of the Operation Command (HAND)

Factory Setting: 0
 AUTO / HAND mode can be selected or switched by using digital keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) or
setting multi-function input terminal MI = 41, 42.
12-00-13
 Pr. 00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr. 00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND
mode.
 The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal
used to switch AUTO / HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal.
When the external terminal is OFF, the drive will not accept any operation signal and cannot
execute JOG.
 Digital Keypad STOP Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable
 This parameter is valid when the source of operation is not set as digital keypad (Pr. 00-21 ≠ 0).
When Pr. 00-21 = 0, the STOP key of digital keypad will not be affected by this parameter.
Source of Auxiliary Frequency

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Master and auxiliary frequency function disabled
1: By digital keypad
2: By communication RS-485 input
3: By analog input
4: By external Up / Down key input
5: Pulse input with steering command (refer to Pr. 10-16)
6: By CANopen
8: By communication card
Selection of Master and Auxiliary Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Master + auxiliary frequency
1: Master - auxiliary frequency
2: Auxiliary - master frequency
 Master and auxiliary frequency command sets the source of master frequency by Pr. 00-20, and
sets the source of auxiliary frequency by Pr. 00-35. Addition and subtraction mode of auxiliary /
master frequency is set by Pr. 00-36.
 When Pr. 00-36 = 0, 1, 2, accelerating and decelerating by the system (includes S-curve) after
addition and subtraction of auxiliary / master frequency, and then be outputted as control
command.
 If the value received is negative after addition and subtraction of auxiliary / master frequency,
then Pr. 03-10 determines whether to change the running direction.
 If the source of master frequency (Pr. 00-20 = 0) or the source of auxiliary frequency
(Pr. 00-35 = 1) is set by keypad, then F page of keypad displays setting frequency, to set master
frequency or auxiliary frequency. If the source of master frequency or auxiliary frequency is NOT
12-00-14
set by keypad (Pr. 00-20 ≠ 0 and Pr. 00-35 ≠ 1), the F page displays the value after addition and
subtraction of auxiliary / master frequency.
 When setting the source of master frequency and auxiliary frequency, Pr. 00-35 can NOT be set
the same as Pr. 00-20 or Pr. 00-30.
 Display Filter Time (Current)

Settings 0.001~65.535 sec.
 Set this parameter to minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
 Display Filter Time (Keypad)

 Set this parameter to minimize the value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Software Version (Date)

Factory Setting: #####
Settings Read only
 This parameter displays current software version of drive by date.
12-00-15
01 Basic Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
Max. Operation Frequency of Motor 1

Factory Setting: 60.00 / 50.00
Settings 00.00~599.00 Hz
 This parameter determines the maximum operation frequency range of drive. This setting is
frequency range corresponding to maximum value of analog input frequency setting signal
(0~10V, 4~20 mA, 0~20 mA，±10V).
 When the high speed mode is on, maximum operation frequency is 0.00~1500.0 Hz.
Output Frequency of Motor 1

 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. If the motor is 60 Hz, the setting should be 60 Hz. If the motor is 50 Hz, the
setting should be 50 Hz.
Output Voltage of Motor 1

Settings 110 V / 230 V series: 0.0 V~255.0 V
460 V series: 0.0~510.0 V
 This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0 V. If the motor is 200V, the setting
should be 200.0 V.
 A wide variety of motors are sold in the market, but the power system for each country is different.
The economic and convenient way to solve this problem is to install the AC motor drive. The drive
can deal with different voltage and frequency. Besides, it can also exert the original
characteristics and life of the motor.
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1

12.1-01-1

 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1

460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V

460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
12.1-01-2


460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1

 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
12.1-01-3


460 V series: 0.0 V~480.0 V
 V/F curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. If the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor, must pay more attention to the heat
dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity of the motor.
 If the voltage is too high at low frequency, it may cause motor damage, overheat, and stall
prevention or over-current protection. To prevent motor damage or motor fault, please be careful
when setting the voltage.
 Pr. 01-35 ~ Pr. 01-42 is the V/F curve for motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr. 02-01 ~
02-08 and Pr. 02-26 ~ Pr. 02-31 (extension card) are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive
will act as the 2nd V/F curve.
 The V/F curve for motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/F curve for motor 2 can be deduced from it.
Voltage
01-11 Frequency lower limit 01-10 Frequency upper limit

1st Voltage
01-02 Frequency output
limit range
2nd Voltage
01-04 Regular V/F Curve
3rd Voltage Special V/F Curve

01-06
4th Voltage
01-08 Frequency
01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00
4th Freq. Start Freq. 3rd Freq. 2nd Freq. 1st Freq. Maximum output
frequency
V/F Curve
 Common settings of V/F curve:
(1) General purpose
M otor spec. 60Hz Motor spec. 50Hz

V V
220 Pr. Setting 220 Pr. Setting
01-00 60.0 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220.0
01-03 01-03
1.50 1.30
01-05 01-05
01-04 01-04
10 10.0 10 10.0
01-06 01-06
F F
1.5 60.0 01-07 1.50 1.3 50.0 01-07 1.30
01-08 10.0 01-08 10.0
12.1-01-4

(2) Fan and hydraulic machinery
M otor spec. 60Hz Motor spec. 50Hz

V Pr. Setting V Pr. Setting
220 220
01-00 60.0 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220.0
01-03 01-03
30.0 25.0
01-05 01-05
50 50
01-04 50.0 01-04 50.0
10 01-06 10 01-06
F 01-07 1.50 F 01-07 1.30
1.5 30 60.0 1.3 25 50.0
01-08 10.0 01-08 10.0
(3) High starting torque
Motor spec. 60Hz Motor spec. 50Hz
V Pr. Setting V Pr. Setting

220 01-00 60.0 220 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220.0
01-03 01-03
3.00 2.20
01-05 23 01-05
23
01-04 01-04
23.0 23.0
18 01-06 14 01-06
F 01-07 1.50 F 01-07 1.30
1.5 3 60.0 01-08 18.0 1.3 2.2 50.0 01-08 14.0
Start-up Frequency
 When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drive’s output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
 Fcmd = frequency command;
Fstart = start frequency (Pr. 01-09);
fstart = actual start frequency of drive;
Fmin = 4th output frequency setting (Pr. 01-07 / Pr. 01-41);
Flow = output frequency lower limit (Pr. 01-11)
 When Fcmd > Fmin and Fcmd < Fstart:
If Flow < Fcmd, drive will run directly by Fcmd.
If Flow ≥ Fcmd, drive will run by Fcmd, then rise to Flow according to acceleration time.
 The output frequency will attain directly to 0 when decelerating to Fmin.
12.1-01-5

Instant operation when start-up

NO
F cmd>Fmi n by Pr.01- 34
Y ES
NO Y ES
F star t>Fmin fstart=F min F low= 0 H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd
Y ES
F min
fstart=F star t
F star t
Time
operation after NO
start-up NO
F low= 0 F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES by
Y ES F cmd<Fmi n Pr.01- 34
by NO
F cmd>Fmi n
Pr.01- 34
NO
Y ES H=Fl ow
Y ES
H=Fc md
H=Fc md Hz
Hz Hz
60Hz
60Hz H=Fl ow
F cmd H=Fc md1 F low F low> Fcmd1
F cmd1 F cmd1>Flow & F cmd1 >F min
F star t F min F cmd1>Fmin F min
F min F cmd2 F cmd2
Time F low Time
Time by Pr.01- 34
by Pr.01- 34 F min>Fc md2
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2<Fmin
 Output Frequency Upper Limit

 Output Frequency Lower Limit
 The upper / lower limit output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit (Pr. 01-10), it will run by the upper limit frequency.
If output frequency is lower than lower limit (Pr. 01-11) and frequency setting is higher than min.
frequency (Pr. 01-07), it will run by lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set
> lower limit frequency. (Pr. 01-10 setting value must be > Pr. 01-11 setting value).
 Upper output frequency will limit the max. output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher
than Pr. 01-10, the output frequency will be limited by Pr. 01-10 setting.
 When the drive starts the function of slip compensation (Pr. 07-27) or PID feedback control, drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but still be limited by this setting.
 Related parameters: Pr. 01-00 Max. Operation Frequency and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower
Limit
12.1-01-6

Vol tage
Pr01-11 P r0 1-10
L owe r limit of out put frequenc y Uppe r limit of out put frequenc y
Pr01-02
Motor rate d volta ge
(Vbas e)
P r0 1-04
Mid - point volta ge 1
P r0 1-06
Mid - point volta ge 2
Pr01-08
Min . o utput voltag e
s ett ing (Vmin) Frequ ency
Pr01-07 Pr01-05 Pr01-03 Pr01-01 Pr01-00
Min . out put Mid - point Mid -po int Mo tor rated Max . operat ion
f requenc y frequenc y 2 freque ncy 1 frequenc y frequ ency
(Fmin) (Fbas e)
 Lower output frequency will limit the min. output frequency of drive. When drive frequency
command is lower than this setting, drive output frequency will be limited by the lower limit of
frequency.
 When the drive starts, it will operate from min. output frequency (Pr. 01-07) accelerate to the
setting frequency. It will not be limited by lower output frequency setting.
 The setting of output frequency upper / lower limit is used to prevent operator misuse, overheat
caused by too low operation frequency or damage caused by excessive speed.
 If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50 Hz and frequency setting is 60 Hz, max. output
frequency will be 50 Hz.
 If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10 Hz and min. operation frequency setting (Pr. 01-07)
is 1.5 Hz, it will operate by 10 Hz when the frequency command is greater than Pr. 01-07 and less
than 10 Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr. 01-07, the drive will be in ready status with
no output.
 If the frequency output upper limit is 60 Hz and frequency setting is also 60 Hz, only frequency
command will be limited in 60 Hz. Actual frequency output may exceed 60 Hz if the drive starts
the function of slip compensation.
12.1-01-7

 Accel. Time 1
 Decel. Time 1
 Accel. Time 2
 Decel. Time 2
 Accel. Time 3
 Decel. Time 3
 Accel. Time 4
 Decel. Time 4
 JOG Acceleration Time
 JOG Deceleration Time
Settings Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.00~6000.0 sec.
 The acceleration time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to accelerate
from 0 Hz to maximum output frequency (Pr. 01-00).
 The acceleration / deceleration time is invalid when using Pr. 01-44 Auto acceleration /
deceleration setting.
 The acceleration / deceleration time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the multi-function input
terminals settings. The factory settings are accel. / decel. time 1.
 When enable torque limits and stalls prevention function, the actual accel. / decel. time will be
longer than the above action time.
 Please note that it may trigger the protection function (Pr. 06-03 Over-current stall prevention
during acceleration or Pr. 06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention) when setting of accel. / decel. time
is too short.
 Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current
during acceleration when the setting of acceleration time is too short.
 Use suitable brake resistor (please refer to Chapter 07 Optional accessories) to decelerate in a
short time and prevent over-voltage.
 When enable Pr. 01-24 ~ Pr. 01-27 (S-curve accel. / decel. begin and arrival time) , the actual
accel. / decel. time will be longer than the setting.
Frequency
01-00
Max. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time decel. time
01-12,14,16,18,20 01-13,15,17,19,21
Accel./Decel. Time
12.1-01-8

 JOG Frequency
 Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) can be used to set
JOG function. When the JOG command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0 Hz to
JOG frequency (Pr. 01-22). When JOG command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from
Jog frequency to stop. The JOG accel. / decel. time (Pr. 01-20, Pr. 01-21) is the time that
accelerates from 0.0 Hz to JOG frequency (Pr. 01-22). The JOG command cannot be executed
when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, when the JOG command is executing,
other operation commands are invalid.
 1st / 4th Accel. / decel. Frequency

 This function does not require external terminal switching function, it will switch the accel. / decel.
time automatically by Pr. 01-23 setting. If the external terminal is set, it will be prior to Pr. 01-23.
 When using this function, please set S-curve acceleration time as 0 if 4th acceleration time is set
too short.
Freq uen cy
1s t Accel eration 1st D eceleration

Ti me Time
01-23
4th Ac celeration 4th D eceleration

Time Time Time
1st/4th Ac celeration/Decel er ation F r equenc y Switching
 S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1

 S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
 S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
 S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Settings Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~25.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~250.0 sec.
 This parameter is used to set slow start when the drive begins to accelerate at start. The accel. /
decel. curve can adjust the S-curve accel. / decel by setting parameter value. When it is enabled,
the drive will have different accel. / decel. curve by the accel. / decel. time.
 The S-curve function is disabled when accel. / decel. time is set to 0.
 When Pr. 01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18  Pr. 01-24 and Pr. 01-25,
the actual accel. time = Pr. 01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 + (Pr. 01-24 + Pr. 01-25) / 2
12.1-01-9

 When Pr. 01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19  Pr. 01-26 and Pr. 01-27,
the actual decel. time = Pr. 01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 + (Pr. 01-26 + Pr. 01-27) / 2
Frequency
01-25 01-26
Time
01-24 01-27
Skip Frequency 1 (Upper Limit)

Skip Frequency 1 (Lower Limit)
 These parameters are used to set skip frequency of the AC drive. Frequency setting of the drive
will skip these frequency ranges. However, the frequency output is continuous. There is no limit
for the setting of these six parameters and it can be combined. Pr. 01-28 does not need to be
greater than Pr. 01-29; Pr. 01-30 does not need to be greater than
Pr. 01-31; Pr. 01-32 does not need to be greater than Pr. 01-33. Pr. 01-28~01-33 can be set as
required. There is no size distinction between these six parameters.
 These parameters set skip frequency ranges of the AC drive. This function can be used to
prevent the mechanical resonance. The skip frequencies are useful when a motor has vibration at
a specific frequency bandwidth. By skipping this frequency, the vibration will be avoided. There
are 3 zones offered for use.
 Frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequencies. Then the output
frequency (H) will be limited to the lower limit of skip frequency ranges.
 When accelerating / decelerating, the output frequency will still pass the skip frequency ranges.
01- 28
01- 29 fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy
Inter nal 01- 30
frequency
01- 31
command
01- 32
01- 33 r isi ng fre qu en cy
0
F requenc y s etting command
12.1-01-10

Zero-speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr. 01-07, 01-41)
 When the frequency command of drive is less than Fmin (Pr. 01-07, Pr. 01-41), the drive will operate
by this parameter.
 When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals U,
V, W.
 When it is set to 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin (Pr. 01-08 and Pr. 01-42) in V/F and SVC modes.
 When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr. 01-07, Pr. 01-41) and Vmin (Pr. 01-08, Pr.
01-42) in V/F and SVC modes.
 In V/F, SVC modes:
fout
01-34=1 01-34=2
01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07 0Hz 0Hz
stop waiting for output 0Hz oper ation
(DC br ake)
V/F Curve Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: V/F curve determined by Pr. 01-00~01-08
1: 1.5th V/F curve
2: 2nd V/F curve
 When setting to 0, refer to Pr. 01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/F curve. For motor 2, please refer to
Pr. 01-35~01-42.
 When setting to 1 or 2, 2nd and 3rd voltage frequency setting are invalid.
 If motor load is variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to rotating speed, such as the load
of fan or pump), load torque will be low at low rotating speed, decrease input voltage to make
magnetic field of input current smaller, which will reduce flux loss and iron loss of the motor to raise
the entire efficiency.
 When setting high power of V/F curve, it is lower torque at low frequency, and the drive is not suitable
for rapid acceleration / deceleration. It is recommended NOT to use this parameter for the rapid
acceleration / deceleration.
01-02
Voltage %
100
90
80
70 1.5 power c urve
60
50
40
30
20
Square curve 01-01
10
F requenc y%
0 20 40 60 80 100
12.1-01-11

 Auto Acceleration / Deceleration Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Linear accel. / decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel. / decel.
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel. / decel. (limited by Pr. 01-12 to 01-21)
 Setting 0 linear accel. / decel. : it will accel. / decel. according to the setting of Pr. 01-12~01-19.
 Setting to auto accel. / decel. : it can reduce the mechanical vibration and prevent the
complicated auto-tuning processes. It will not stall during acceleration and no need to use brake
resistor. In addition, it can improve the operation efficiency and save energy.
 Setting 3 auto accel. / decel. (Decelerate by actual load): it can auto detect the load torque and
accelerate from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the setting frequency.
When decelerating, it can auto detect the load re-generation and stop the motor smoothly with
the fastest decel. time.
 Setting 4 stall prevention by auto accel. / decel. (Refer to accel. / decel. time) : if the acceleration /
deceleration is in the reasonable range, it will accelerate / decelerate by Pr. 01-12~01-19. If the
accel. /decel. time is too short, the actual accel./decel. time is greater than the setting of accel.
/decel. time.
F requenc y
1
01-00
Max.
Fr equency 2
01- 07
Min. T ime
Fr equency accel. time decel. time
01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15
01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19
Acc el./D ecel. Time
1 When P r.01-44 is set to 0.
2 When P r.01-44 is set to 3.
Time Unit for Acceleration / Deceleration and S Curve

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec.
1: Unit 0.1 sec.
 Time for CANopen Quick Stop
Settings Pr. 01-45 = 0: 0.00~600.00 sec.
Pr. 01-45 = 1: 0.0~6000.0 sec.
 It is used to set the time decelerating from maximum operation frequency (Pr. 01-00) to 0.00 Hz
by CANopen control.
12.1-01-12

Deceleration Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Normal decel.
1: Overfluxing decel.
2: Traction energy control
 When 0 is set: decelerate or stop in accordance with original decelerating setting.
 When 1 is set: during deceleration, the drive will make control according to the setting of Pr.
06-01 and the voltage recovery size of DC BUS. The controller will start when DC BUS voltage
reaches to 95 % of Pr. 06-01. When Pr. 06-01 is set to 0, the drive will make control according to
operating voltage and the voltage recovery size of DC BUS. This method will decelerate
according to the setting value of deceleration time. The fastest actual deceleration time will not be
less than the setting of deceleration time.
 The actual deceleration time of motor is more than the setting of deceleration time due to
overvoltage stall prevention operation.
 When 1 is set: can be used with Pr. 06-02 set to 1 to get a better effect of deceleration
over-voltage suppression.
 When 2 is set: this function can auto tuning output frequency and output voltage to accelerate
consuming DC BUS energy according to the ability of the drive. So that the actual deceleration
time can comply with the parameter setting as possible. This setting is recommended when
overvoltage occurs due to use the deceleration time which is not as expected.
12.1-01-13

02 Digital Input / Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation.
2-wire / 3-wire Operation Control

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: No function
3: 3-wire, power on for operation control
4: 2-wire mode 1, fast start up
5: 2-wire mode 2, fast start up
6: 3-wire，fast start up
IMPORTANT
1. In fast start up function, terminal output will keep in ready status, drive will
response to the command immediately.
2. When using fast start up function, the output terminal will have higher
voltage potentially.
 In Quick Start function, the output will remain ready for operation. The drive will respond to start
command immediately.
 When using Quick Start function, there will be greater potential voltage on the output terminals.
 This parameter is for setting the configuration of external drive operation control, plus Quick Start
function, there are six different control modes:
Pr. 02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal
Setting value: 1 MI1 “OPEN”: STOP

FWD / STOP
“CLOSE” : FWD
2-wire
REV / STOP MI2 “OPEN”: STOP
FWD / STOP “CLOSE”: REV
DCM
REV / STOP M300
Setting value: 2 MI1

“O PEN”: STO P
RUN / STO P
“CLO SE”: RUN
2-wire
FWD / REV MI2 “O PEN”: FWD
RUN / STOP “CLO SE”: REV
DCM
REV / FWD M300
12.1-02-1

MI1 “CLO SE”: RUN

STOP R UN
Setting value: 3 MI3 “O PEN”: STO P
REV/FWD: “OPEN”: FWD

3-wire MI2
REV / FWD “CLOSE”: REV
D CM
M300
MI1 “OPEN”: STOP

Setting value: 4 FWD / STOP
“CLOSE”: FWD
2-wire REV / STOP MI2 “OPEN”: STOP
Quick Start “CLOSE”: REV
DCM
M300
MI1 “O PEN”: STO P

Setting value: 5 RUN / STO P
“CLO SE”: RUN
2-wire FWD / REV MI2 “O PEN”: FWD
“CLO SE”: REV
Quick Start DCM
M300
MI1 “CLO SE”: RUN

STOP RUN
Setting value: 6 MI3 “O PEN”: STO P
3-wire MI2 REV/FWD: “OPEN”: FWD
Quick Start REV / FWD “CLOSE”: REV
DCM
M300
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)

Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 1
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Factory Setting: 4
1: Multi-stage speed command 1 / multi-stage position command 1
5: Reset
12.1-02-2

6: JOG operation (By KPC-CC01 or external control)

7: Acceleration / deceleration speed not allow
8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration / deceleration time selection
9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration / deceleration time selection
10: EF input (Pr. 07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of the auto acceleration / deceleration time
15: Rotating speed command from AVI
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
18: Forced to stop (Pr. 07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
38: Disable write EEPROM function
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb input
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
56: Local / Remote Selection
70: Auxiliary frequency is forced to 0
71: Disable PID function, PID output is forced to 0
72: Disable PID function, remain the output value before
disabled
73: PID integral gain is forced to 0, integral disabled
74: PID feedback reversed
81: Zero point position signal input of simple positioning
82: OOB loading balance detection
12.1-02-3

 This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.

 When Pr. 02-00 = 0, multi-function options can be set by multi-function input terminal MI1, MI2.
 When Pr. 02-00 ≠ 0, specify the use of multi-function input terminals MI1, MI2 with reference to
the setting value of Pr. 02-00.
Example:
If Pr. 02-00 = 1: multi-function input terminal MI1 = FWD / STOP,
multi-function input terminal MI2 = REV / STOP.
If Pr. 02-00 = 2: multi-function input terminal MI1 = RUN / STOP,
multi-function input terminal MI2 = FWD / REV.
 When multi-function input terminal MI7 = 0, MI7 is designated as pulse input terminal.
 If Pr. 02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control, terminal MI3 is for STOP contact. The function set
will be invalid automatically.
Summary of function settings
(Take the N.O. normally opened contact for example, ON: contact is closed, OFF: contact is open)
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
Multi-stage speed
1 command 1 / multi-stage
position command 1
Multi-stage speed
command 2 / multi-stage 15-stages speed or 15 positions could be set by the digital status
2
position command of these 4 terminals. 16-steps speed could be operate if the
2multi-stage
master speed is included when setting as 15 steps speed. (Refer
Multi-stage speed
3 command 3 / multi-stage to Parameter 04)
position command 3
Multi-stage speed
4 command 4 / multi-stage
position command 4
Use this terminal to reset the drive after the error of the drive is
5 Reset
eliminated.
This function is valid when the source of operation command is
external terminals.
The JOG operation executes when the drive stops completely.
During running, the operation direction can be changed, and
STOP key on the keypad is valid. Once the external terminal
receives OFF command, the motor will stop by the JOG
deceleration time. Refer to Pr. 01-20~01-22 for details.
01-22
JOG operation JOG frequency
6 KPC-CC01 required
(optional)
01-07
Min. output frequency
JOG accel. time JOG decel. time

01-20 01-21
MIx-GND ON OFF
Mix: external terminal
12.1-02-4


When this function is enabled, the drive will stop acceleration and
deceleration immediately. After this function is disabled, the AC
motor drive starts to accel. / decel. from the inhibit point.
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy A ccel . in hi bi t
De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
a re a A ctua l o pe ra tio n
Acceleration /
7 A ccel . in hi bi t fr eq ue ncy
deceleration speed inhibit a re a De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ctua l o pe ra tio n fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
MIx- GND ON ON ON ON
O pe ra tio n ON O FF
co mman d
The 1st, 2nd acceleration /

8 deceleration time
The acceleration / deceleration time of the drive can be selected
selection
from this function or the digital status of terminals; there are 4
The 3rd, 4th acceleration /
acceleration / deceleration for selection.
9 deceleration time
selection
For external fault input. The drive will decelerate by Pr. 07-20
EF input setting, and keypad will show EF. (It will have fault record when
10
(EF: External fault) external fault occurs). The drive will keep running until the fault is
cleared (terminal status restored) after RESET.
When the contact of this function is ON, output of the drive will
B.B input from external
11 stop immediately. The motor will be in free run and keypad will
(B.B.: Base Block)
display B.B. signal. Refer to Pr. 07-08 for details.
When the contact of this function is ON, output of the drive will
stop immediately. The motor will be in free run. The drive is in
output waiting status until the switch turned to OFF, the drive will
re-start to current setting frequency.
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
Output stop S etti ng
12 fr eq ue ncy
(Output pause)
Ti me
MI x - GND ON O FF ON
O pe ra tio n
ON
co mman d
12.1-02-5


Pr. 01-44 should be set to one of 01~04 modes before using this
Cancel the setting of the
13 function. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode
auto accel. / decel. time
and ON is for linear accel. / decel.
When the contact of this function is ON, the source of the
Rotating speed command
15 frequency will force to be AVI. (If the rotating speed commands
form AVI
are set to AVI, ACI at the same time, the priority is AVI > ACI)
When the contact of this function is ON, the source of the
Rotating speed command
16 frequency will force to be ACI. (If the rotating speed commands
form ACI
are set to AVI, ACI at the same time, the priority is AVI > ACI)
When the contact of this function is ON, the drive will ramp to
18 Forced to stop
stop by Pr. 07-20 setting.
When the contact of this function is ON, the frequency of drive
19 Digital up command will increase or decrease by one unit. If this function remains ON
continuously, the frequency will increase / decrease by Pr. 02-09
/ Pr. 02-10.
The frequency command returns to zero when the drive stops,
20 Digital down command and the displayed frequency is 0.00 Hz. Select Pr. 11-00, bit 7 =
1, frequency is not saved.
When the contact of this function is ON, the PID function is
21 PID function disabled
disabled.
When the contact of this function is ON, current counter value will
22 Clear counter command be cleared and display “0”. Only when this function is disabled,
the drive will keep counting upward.
Input the counter value The counter value will increase 1 once the contact of this function
23
(MI 6) is ON. The function needs to be set with Pr. 02-19.
external terminals. When the contact of this function is ON, the
24 FWD JOG command drive will execute forward JOG. When execute JOG command in
torque mode, the drive will automatically switch to speed mode.
The drive will return to torque mode after JOG command is done.
external terminals. When the contact of this function is ON the
25 REV JOG command drive will execute reverse JOG. When execute JOG command in
torque mode, the drive will automatically switch to speed mode.
The drive will return to torque mode after JOG command is done.
12.1-02-6


When the contact of this function is ON: output of the drive will
stop immediately, and display EF1 on the keypad. The motor will
be in free run. The drive will keep running until the fault is cleared
after pressing “RESET”. (EF: External Fault)
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
28 Emergency stop (EF1) fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
MI x - GND ON O FF ON
Re set ON O FF
O pe ra tio n
ON
co mman d
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F. If the contact of this function is
29
Y-connection ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/F.
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F. If the contact of this function is
30
-connection ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/F.
Disable EEPROM write
When the contact of this function is ON, the write of EEPROM is
38 function (Parameters
disabled. (Changed parameters will not be saved after power off)
memory disable)
When the contact of this function is ON during the operation, the
40 Force coast to stop
drive will free run to stop.
 When MI terminal is switched to OFF status, it executes a

STOP command. Therefore, if MI terminal is switched to OFF
41 HAND switch during operation, the drive will also stop.

 Using keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) to switch between HAND
/ AUTO, the drive will stop first then switch to the HAND or
AUTO status.
 The digital keypad KPC-CC01 (optional) will display current
status of drive (HAND / OFF / AUTO).
42 AUTO switch bit 1 bit 0
OFF 0 0
AUTO 0 1
HAND 1 0
OFF 1
Mechanical gear ratio When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio will switch to
48
switch the second group. (Refer to Pr. 10-04 ~ Pr. 10-07).
When drive is enabled, RUN command is valid.
When drive is disabled, RUN command is invalid.
49 Drive enable
When drive is operating, motor will coast to stop.
This function will interact with MO = 45
12.1-02-7


Input the message setting in this parameter when dEb occurs to
50 Master dEb input Master. This will ensure that dEb also occurs to Slave, then
Master and Slave will stop simultaneously.
Selection for PLC mode PLC status bit 1 bit 0

51
(bit 0) Disable PLC function (PLC 0) 0 0
Trigger PLC to operate (PLC 1) 0 1
Selection for PLC mode Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2) 1
52
(bit 1) No function 1 1
Trigger CANopen quick When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will
53
stop change to quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 for more details.
Use Pr. 00-29 to select LOCAL / REMOTE mode (refer to Pr.

00-29).
LOCAL / REMOTE When Pr. 00-29 is not set to 0, the digital keypad KPC-CC01
56
selection (optional) will display the status of LOC / REM.
bit 0
REM 0
LOC 1
Auxiliary frequency will be forced to return 0 when using this

function; PID will keep operating if PID is master frequency.
Auxiliary frequency is
70 (When Pr. 00-35 ≠ 0, master frequency is enabled, selecting
forced to 0
this function valid by terminal to force closing the auxiliary
frequency = 0)
When master and auxiliary frequency are enabled and using PID
Disable PID function, PID function, PID will not operate if setting terminal contact of this
71
output is forced to 0 parameter ON, integral value return to zero, and PID output is
forced to zero.
Master and auxiliary frequency are enabled and using PID
Disable PID function,
function, PID will not operate if setting terminal contact of this
72 remain the output value
parameter ON. Output value can be maintained at the value
before disabled
before PID is disabled.
When setting terminal contact of this parameter ON, PID
PID integral gain is forced
73 continues to operate, integral control is disabled, and integral
to 0, integral disabled
value return to zero.
When setting terminal contact of this parameter ON, PID
74 PID feedback reversed negative feedback will become positive feedback; PID positive
feedback will become negative feedback.
Use this function as trigger terminal for simple positioning with
Zero point position signal
Pr. 01.20~01.25. This function is for simple positioning,
81 input of simple
positioning accuracy should be evaluated by the user. Refer to
positioning
Pr. 01-25 for more details.
12.1-02-8


OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with
PLC program in washing machine system. When the contact of
OOB loading balance
82 this function is ON, receiving ∆θ value by Pr. 07-46 and Pr.
detection
07-47. PLC or higher level controller will decide the operation
speed of motor according to this ∆θ value.
When the contact of this function is ON, parameters can be
Multi-motors (IM) changed (Pr. 01.01~01.06, Pr. 01.26~01.43, Pr. 07.18~07.38,
83
selection bit 0 Pr. 07.00~07.06)
Example: MI1 = 27, MI2 = 28
When MI1 OFF, MI2 OFF: motor 1
Multi-motors (IM) MI1 ON, MI2 OFF: motor 2
84
selection bit 1 MI1 OFF, MI2 ON: motor 3
MI1 ON, MI1 ON: motor 4
 UP / DOWN Key Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: UP / DOWN by the accel. / decel. time
1: UP / DOWN constant speed (Pr. 02-10)
2: Pulse signal (Pr. 02-10)
3: External terminals UP / DOWN key mode
 Constant Speed. the Accel. / Decel. Speed of the UP / DOWN Key

Settings 0.001~1.000 Hz / ms
 These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19, 20 (UP / DOWN
Command). The frequency increases / decreases according to Pr. 02-09 and Pr. 02-10.
 Pr. 11-00 bit 7 = 1, frequency is not saved. The frequency command returns to zero when the
drive stops, and the displayed frequency is 0.00 Hz. The frequency increases / decreases
command by using UP / DOWN key is valid only when the drive is running.
 When Pr. 02-09 set to 0: increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) according to the setting
of acceleration / deceleration (Refer to Pr. 01-12~01-19)
Fr eq ue n cy
Fr eq ue n cy
co mma nd
Inc re as ed b y ac cel e ra tio n tim e

T ime
Mu lti - fun cti on i np u t ter mi na l 19 ON OFF
fr eq u en cy inc re as ed co mma nd
12.1-02-9

 When Pr. 02-09 set to 1: increasing / decreasing frequency command (F) according to the setting
of Pr. 02-10 (0.01~1.00 Hz/ms).
Frequenc y
Frequenc y
c ommand
In cr e a se b y 0 .0 1 - 1 .0 0 Hz/ms
Time
Multi-func tion input terminal 19 ON O FF

frequency increased c ommand
ON time > 2ms
 Multi-function Input Response Time

 This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals MI1~MI7.
 This function is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time is
confirmation time to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of
the digital terminals. Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve
effectively, but the response time will be delayed.
 Multi-function Input Mode Selection

Factory Setting: 0000
Settings 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.)
 The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter is to set the status of multi-function input signal (0: Normal Open；1: Normal Close)
and it is not affected by the status of SINK / SOURCE.
 bit 0 ~ bit 6 correspond to MI1 ~ MI7 respectively.
 bit 0 (MI1) default is FWD terminal, bit 1 (MI2) default is REV terminal. This parameter cannot be
used to change input mode when Pr. 02-00 ≠ 0.
 User can change terminal ON / OFF status by communicating.
For example: MI3 is set to 1 (multi-stage speed command 1), MI4 is set to 2 (multi-stage speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd stage speed command = 10012 = 910
As long as Pr. 02-12 = 9 be set by communication, there is no need to make wiring of any
multi-function terminal to run forward with 2nd stage speed.
bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
 Use Pr. 11-42 bit 1 to select whether FWD / REV terminal is controlled by Pr. 02-12 bit 0 and bit 1.
12.1-02-10

 Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)

Factory Setting: 11
 Multi-function Output 2 (MO1)
 Multi-function Output 3 (MO2)
Factory Setting: 0
1: Operation indication
2: Operation speed attained
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP (Frequency command)
7: Over torque 1 (Pr. 06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2 (Pr. 06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning (LV) (Pr. 06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
13: Overheat warning (Pr. 06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication (Pr. 07-00)
15: PID feedback error
17: Count value attained (Pr. 02-20; not return to 0)
18: Count value attained (Pr. 02-19; returns to 0)
19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation source
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
29: Output when frequency ≧ Pr.02-34 (≧ 02-34)
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34 (< 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop (actual output frequency)
12.1-02-11

40: Speed attained (including Stop)

42: Crane function
43: Motor actual speed output < Pr. 02-47
44: Low current output (Pr. 06-71 to Pr. 06-73)
45: UVW magnetic contactor ON / OFF switch
46: Master dEb signal output
50: Output for CANopen control
52: Output for communication card control
66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input level reached output
68: SO output logic B
73: Over torque 3
74: Over torque 4
 This parameter is used to set the function of multi-function terminals.
Summary of function settings
(Take N.O. normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed)
0 No Function Output terminal with no function
1 Indication during RUN Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Operating speed Active when output frequency of drive reaches to the setting
2
attained frequency.
Desired frequency
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr. 02-22) is attained.
attained 1 (Pr. 02-22)
Desired frequency
4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr. 02-24) is attained.
attained 2 (Pr. 02-24)
Zero speed (frequency Active when frequency command = 0. (the drive must be at RUN
5
command) status)
Zero speed, include
6 STOP (frequency Active when frequency command = 0 or stops.
command)
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr. 06-07 is for setting
the over-torque detection level (motor 1), and Pr. 06-08 is for
7 Over torque 1
setting over-torque detection time (motor 1).
Refer to Pr. 06-06~06-08.
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr. 06-10 is for setting
the over-torque detection level (motor 2), and Pr. 06-11 is for
8 Over torque 2
setting over-torque detection time (motor 2).
Refer to Pr. 06-09~06-11.
9 Drive is ready Active when the drive is ON with no abnormality detected.
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low.
10 Low voltage warn (LV)
(refer to Pr. 06-00 low voltage level)
12.1-02-12


11 Malfunction indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn off
13 Overheat
the drive. (refer to Pr. 06-15)
Software brake signal
14 Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr. 07-00)
indication
15 PID feedback error Active when the PID feedback signal error is detected.
16 Slip error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected.
When the drive executes external counter, this contact will active if
Count value attained the count value is equal to the setting value of Pr. 02-20. This
17
(Pr. 02-20) contact will not active when the setting value of Pr. 02-20 > Pr.
02-19.
Count value attained When the drive executes external counter, this contact will active if
18
(Pr. 02-19) the count value is equal to the setting value of Pr. 02-19.
External interrupt B.B. Active when external interrupt (B.B.) stop output occurs in the
19
input (Base Block) drive.
20 Warning output Active when the warning is detected.
21 Over-voltage warning Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current stall
22 Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
prevention warning
Over-voltage stall
23 Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention warning
Active when the source of operation command is controlled by
24 Operation source
digital keypad. (Pr. 00-21 = 0)
25 Forward command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when frequency
29 Active when frequency is ≥ Pr. 02-34. (Actual output H ≥ Pr. 02-34)
≥ Pr. 02-34
Output when frequency
30 Active when frequency is < Pr. 02-34. (Actual output H < Pr. 02-34)
< Pr. 02-34
Y-connection for the Active when Pr. 05-24 = 1, frequency output is lower than Pr.
31
motor coil 05-23 minus 2 Hz, and time is longer than Pr. 05-25.
△-connection for the Active when Pr. 05-24 = 1, frequency output is higher than Pr.
32
motor coil 05-23 plus 2 Hz, , and time is longer than Pr. 05-25.
Zero speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0.
33
output frequency) (the drive should be in RUN mode)
Zero speed include stop
34 Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or stop.
(actual output frequency)
Error output selection 1
35 Active when Pr. 06-23 is ON.
(Pr. 06-23)
12.1-02-13


Error output selection 2
(Pr. 06-24)
Error Output Selection 3
(Pr. 06-25)
Error Output Selection 4
(Pr. 06-26)
Speed attained Active when the output frequency attains to setting frequency or
40
(including Stop) stop.
This function should be used with Pr. 02-32, Pr. 02-33, Pr. 02-34,
Pr. 02-57 and Pr. 02-58.
Active when setting Pr. 07-16 = Pr.02-34, Fcmd > Pr. 02-34,
42 Crane function output current > Pr. 02-33 and time > Pr. 02-32; multi-function
output setting = 42 crane function.
The example of the crane application is as follows for your
reference.
Motor actual speed
43 Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr. 02-47.
output < Pr. 02-47
44 Low current output This function is used with Pr. 06-71 ~ Pr. 06-73.
Use this function with external terminal input = 49 (drive enabled) and
external terminal output = 45 (electromagnetic contractor enabled),
then the magnetic contactor will be ON or OFF according to the
status of drive.
En abl e
C onta cto r
UVW magnetic contactor
45
ON / OFF switch MC
AC Drive
U (T1 ) Mo to r
V(T2 )
IM
3~
W(T3 )
MOx=45
MIx=49
When dEb arises at Master, MO will send a dEb signal to Slave.

Output the message when dEb occurs to Master. This will ensure
46 Master dEb signal output
that dEb also occurs to Slave. Then Slave will follow the
decelerate time of Master to stop simultaneously.
12.1-02-14


Control multi-function output terminals by CANopen.
The mapping table of the CANopen DO is as follows:
Setting of
Physical
related Attribute Corresponding index
terminal
parameters
2026-41
Output for CANopen RY1 Pr. 2-13 = 50 RW
50 bit 0 of initial value 0x01
control
2026-41
MO1 Pr. 2-16 = 50 RW
bit 3 of initial value 0x01
2026-41
MO2 Pr. 2-17 = 50 RW
bit 4 of initial value 0x01
Refer to Chapter 15-3-5 for more information.
Control output by communication cards (CMM-MOD01,
CMM-EIP01, CMM-PN01, CMM-DN01)
Output for Physical Setting of related Corresponding
Attribute
52 communication card terminal parameters Address
RY Pr. 02-13 = 51 RW bit 0 of 2640
control
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 51 RW bit 3 of 2640
MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 51 RW bit 4 of 2640
Status of Status of safety output

66 SO output logic A drive Status A (MO = 66) Status B (MO = 68)
Broken circuit Short circuit
Normal
(Open) (Close)
Broken circuit
STO Short circuit (Close)
(Open)
68 SO output logic B
Broken circuit
STL1~STL3 Short circuit (Close)
(Open)
Multi-function output terminals operate when analog input level is

between high level and low level.
03-44: Select one of the analog input channels (AVI, ACI) to be
Analog input level compared.
67
reached output 03-45: The high level of analog input, factory setting is 50 %.
03-46: The low level of analog input, factory setting is 10 %.
If analog input > 03-45, multi-function output terminal operates.
If analog input < 03-46, multi-function output terminal stops output.
Active when over torque is detected. Pr. 14-75 is for setting
73 Over torque 3 over-torque detection level. Pr. 14-76 is for setting over-torque
detection time. (Refer to Pr. 14-74~14-76)
Active when over torque is detected. Pr. 14-78 is for setting
74 Over torque 4 over-torque detection level. Pr. 14-79 is for setting over-torque
detection time. (Refer to Pr. 14-77~14-79)
12.1-02-15

Example of crane application:
It is recommended to be used with Dwell function as shown as follows:
 Multi-function Output Direction

Settings 0000h~FFFFh (0:N.O.; 1:N.C.)
 The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter is set via bit setting. If the bit is 1, the corresponding multi-function output acts in
the opposite way.
Example:
If Pr. 02-13 = 1 (Indicate when operating). If output is positive, bit is set to 0, then Relay 1 is ON
when the drive runs and is OFF when the drive stops. On the contrary, if action is reversed, bit is
set to 1, then Relay is OFF when the drive runs and is ON when the drive stops.
bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

MO2 MO1 reserved reserved RY
12.1-02-16

 Terminal Counting Value Attained (return to 0)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
 This parameter needs to use KPC-CC01 (optional).
 Input point of the counter can be set by multi-function terminal MI6 as a trigger terminal (set
Pr. 02-06 to 23). When counting completed, the specified multi-function output terminal will be
activated (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-36, Pr. 02-37 is set to 18). Pr. 02-19 cannot be set to 0 at this time.
 When displayed c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If displayed c5555 , the actual count
value is 55,550 ~ 55,559.
 Preliminary Counting Value Attained (not return to 0)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65500
 This parameter needs to use KPC-CC01 (optional).
 When the count value counts from 1 to attain this value, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal will be activated (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-36, Pr. 02-37 is set to 17). This parameter can be used
for the end of counting to make the drive runs from the low speed to stop.
Time series diagram is shown below:
1.0 msec
Displayed value
[00-04=01]
TRG [0 2 - 0 6 =2 3 ]
Ext ernal counter trigger signal
(Output signal) 1.0 msec

The width of trigger signal
Multi-function output terminal
Attain count assigned 02-20= 3
RY1 Pr.02-13=17 02-13, 02-14, 02-36, 02-37
 Digital Output Gain (DFM)

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~55
 It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse, work period = 50 %). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr. 02-21.
 Desired Frequency Attained 1

 The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
 Desired Frequency Attained 2
12.1-02-17

 The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2

 Once output speed (frequency) reaches desired speed (frequency), if the corresponding
multi-function output terminal is set to 3 ~ 4 (Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-36, and Pr. 02-37), this
multi-function output terminal will be “closed”.
H
Fcmd=60Hz
42Hz
02-24=40Hz 40Hz
02-25=2Hz 38Hz
12Hz
02-22=10Hz 10Hz
02-23=2Hz 8Hz
T
02-13,02-14,
=3
02-36,02-37,
02-13,02-14,
02-36,02-37, =4
 Output Frequency Setting for Multi-function Output Terminal

 When output frequency is ≥ Pr. 02-34 (actual output H ≥ 02-34), the multi-function terminal
(Pr. 02-13, 02-16, 02-17) be set to 29 will activate.
 When output frequency is < Pr. 02-34 (actual output H < 02-34), the multi-function terminal
(Pr. 02-13, 02-16, 02-17) be set to 30 will activate.
 External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the run command still exists after reset or re-boots.
Set value is 1:
 Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the drive will
run.
 Status 2: After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON,
the drive can run after pressing RESET key.
 Zero-speed Level of Motor

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535 rpm
 This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals set to 43. Required to be
used with PG cared and motor with encoder feedback.
12.1-02-18

 This parameter is used to set the level of motor at zero-speed. When the actual speed is lower
than this setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal which is set to 43 will be ON,
as shown below:
a ctua l mo tor
sp ee d
0 2- 47
MO =d 43
Ti me
Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

Settings Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
Weights
Weights
Bit
0=ON
1=OFF
 For Example:
If Pr. 02-50 displays 0034h (Hex), i.e. the value is 52 (decimal), and 110100 (binary). It means
MI3, MI5 and MI6 are ON.
Weights
Bit
Settings
NOTE
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal

Factory Setting: Read
only
Settings Monitor the status of multi-function output terminals
 For Example:
When Pr. 02-51 displays 000Bh (hex), i.e. the value is 11 (decimal), and switched to 1011 (binary)
which means RY. MO1 is at ON status.
Weights
Bit Relay
0=ON Reserved
1=OFF Reserved
NOTE
MO1
MO2
12.1-02-19

Display External Multi-function Input Terminal Used by PLC

Settings Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
 Pr. 02-52 displays the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC.
Weights
Weights
Bit
0=ON
1=OFF
 For Example:
When Pr. 02-52 displays 0034h (hex) and switched to 110100 (binary), it means MI3, MI5 and
MI6 are used by PLC.
Weights Not used by PLC

Bit Used by PLC
Displays
NOTE
Display External Multi-function Output Terminal Occupied by PLC

Settings Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
 Pr. 02-53 displays the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
 For Example:
When Pr. 02-51 displays 000Bh (hex), i.e. the value is 11 (decimal), and switched to 1011 (binary)
which means RY. MO1 is at ON status.
Weights
Bit Relay
0=ON Reserved
1=OFF Reserved
NOTE
MO1
MO2
12.1-02-20

 For Example:
If the value of Pr. 02-53 displays 0003h (hex), it means RY is used by PLC.
0=Not used by PLC

1=Used by PLC
Weights
Bit Relay
Reserved Displayed value
Reserved
MO1
MO2
Display Memory of Frequency Command Used by External Terminal

Settings Read only
 When the source of frequency command set as external terminal, if Lv or Fault occurs at this time,
the frequency command of external terminal will be saved in this parameter.
 Multi-function Output Terminal: Function 42: Brake Frequency Checking Point

Factory setting: 0.00
 Pr. 02-34 can be used with Pr. 02-58 for crane function. (Choose crane action # 42 to set up
multi-function output Pr. 02-13, Pr. 02-16, and Pr. 02-17)
 When output frequency of the drive is higher than the setting of Pr. 02-34 set frequency level
(≥ Pr. 02-34), choose # 42 to set up multi-function output terminal.
 When the output frequency is lower than the setting of Pr. 02-58 (< Pr. 02-58), choose # 42 to
disable multi-function output terminal.
Deceleration Ratio for Motor

Settings 4.0~1000.0
Automatic Positioning Angle Setting
Factory setting:180.0
Settings 0.0~6480.0
 Automatic Positioning Deceleration Time
Settings 0.00 Function disable
0.01~100.00 s
 0.00 automatic positioning function is invalid.
 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained

Factory setting: 0
Settings 0: Terminal count value attained, no EF display (Continue to operate)
1: Terminal count value attained, EF active
12.1-02-21

 Initial Frequency Command (F) Mode after Stop

Factory setting: 0
Settings 0: By current freq. command
1: By zero freq. command
2: Refer to Pr. 02-83 to set up
 Initial Frequency Command (F) Setting after Stop
12.1-02-22

03 Analog Input / Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Analog Input Selection (AVI)

Factory Setting: 1
 Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
1: Frequency command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12: Auxiliary frequency input
13: PID compensation value
 When using analog input as PID reference value, Pr. 00-20 must set 2 (analog input).
Pr. 03-00~03-01 set 1 as PID reference input
If the setting value 1 and set value 4 exist at the same time, AVI input has highest priority to
become PID reference input.
 When using analog input as PID compensation value, Pr. 08-16 must set 1 (Source of PID
compensation is analog input). The compensation value can be observed via Pr. 08-17.
 When it is frequency command, the corresponding value for 0 ~ ± 10V / 4~20 mA is 0 ~ max.
output frequency (Pr. 01-00).
 When it is torque command, the corresponding value for 0 ~ ± 10V / 4~20 mA is 0 ~ max. output
torque (Pr.11-27).
 When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0 ~ ± 10V / 4~20 mA is 0 ~ rated
torque.
 When the setting of Pr. 03-00~Pr. 03-01 is the same, the AVI will be selected first.
 Analog Input Bias (AVI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0 %
 It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.
 Analog Input Bias (ACI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0 %
 It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
 Positive / Negative Bias Mode (AVI)

 Positive / Negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Zero bias
12.1-03-1

3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
 In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
 Reverse Setting when Analog Signal Input is Negative Frequency

Factory Setting: 0
0: Negative frequency input is not allowed. Forward and reverse run is
Settings
controlled by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Negative frequency input is allowed. Positive frequency = forward run;
negative frequency = reverse run. Run direction can not be switched by
digital keypad or the external terminal control.
 Pr. 03-10 is used to enable reverse run command when a negative frequency (negative bias and
gain) is input to AVI or ACI analog signal input.
 Condition for negative frequency (reverse)
1. Pr. 03-10 = 1
2. Bias mode = Serve bias as center
3. Corresponded analog input gain < 0 (negative), make input frequency be negative.
In using addition function of analog input (Pr. 03-18 = 1), when analog signal is negative after
adding, this parameter can be set for allowing reverse or not. The result after adding will be
restricted by “Condition for negative frequency (reverse)”
In the diagram below:

 Black line: curve with no bias.
 Gray line: curve with bias
Diagram 01
12.1-03-2

Diagram 02
Diagram 03
Diagram 04
12.1-03-3

Diagram 05
Diagram 06
Diagram 07
12.1-03-4

Diagram 08
Diagram 09
Diagram 10
12.1-03-5

Diagram 11
Diagram 12
Diagram 13
12.1-03-6

Diagram 14
Diagram 15
Diagram 16
12.1-03-7

Diagram 17
Diagram 18
Diagram 19
12.1-03-8

Diagram 20
Diagram 21
Diagram 22
12.1-03-9

Diagram 23
Diagram 24
Diagram 25
12.1-03-10

Diagram 26
Diagram 27
Diagram 28
12.1-03-11

Diagram 29
Diagram 30
Diagram 31
12.1-03-12

Diagram 32
 Analog Input Gain (AVI)

 Analog Input Gain (ACI)
Settings -500.0~500.0 %
 Pr. 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog voltage /
current signal.
 Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)

 Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
 These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.
 When the setting of the time constant is too large, the control will be stable but the control
response will be slow. When the setting of time constant is too small, the control response will be
faster but the control may be unstable. To find the optimal setting, please adjust the setting
according to the control stable or response status.
 Addition Function of the Analog Input

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable (AVI, ACI)
1: Enable (Exclude analog extension card)
 When Pr. 03-18 is set to 1:
EX1: Pr. 03-00 = Pr. 03-01 = 1 Frequency command = AVI + ACI
 When Pr. 03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and
AVI > ACI
12.1-03-13

 Signal Loss Selection of Analog Input 4-20 mA

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
 This parameter determines the behavior when 4~20 mA signal is loss, when ACIc (03-29 = 0).
 When Pr. 03-29≠0, it means the voltage input to ACI terminal is 0~10V or 0~20mA. At this
moment, Pr. 03-19 will be invalid.
 When setting is 1 or 2, it will display warning code “ANL” on the keypad. It will be blinking until the
loss of the ACI signal is recovered.
 When the motor drive stops, the condition of warning does not exist, then the warning will
disappear.
 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~23
Function Chart

0 Output frequency (Hz) Max. frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100 %.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Max. frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100 %.
2 Motor speed (Hz) Max. frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100 %
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100 %
4 Output voltage (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100 %
5 DC BUS voltage 450V (900V) = 100 %
6 Power factor -1.000~1.000 = 100 %
7 Power (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100 %
9 AVI 0~10 V = 0~100 %
10 ACI 4~20 mA = 0~100 %
12 Iq current command (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100 %
13 Iq feedback value (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100 %
14 Id current command (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100 %
15 Id feedback value (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100 %
12.1-03-14


16 Vq-axis voltage command 250V (500V) = 100 %
17 Vd-axis voltage command 250V (500V) = 100 %
19 PG2 frequency command Max. frequency Pr. 01-00 is regarded as 100 %.
20 CANopen analog output For CANopen communication analog output
21 RS-485 analog output For InnerCOM analog output
Communication card analog For communication analog output (CMM-MOD01,
22
output CMM-EIP01, CMM-PN01, CMM-DN01)
Pr. 03-32 controls voltage/current output level
23 Constant voltage output
0~100 % of Pr. 03-32 corresponds to 0~10V of AFM.
 Gain of Analog Output (AFM)

Settings 0~500.0 %
 This function is used to adjust the voltage level outputted to analog meter head from analog
signal (Pr. 03-20) output terminal AFM of drive.
 Analog Output when in REV Direction (AFM)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Absolute value of output voltage
1: Reverse output 0 V; Positive output 0~10 V
2: Reverse output 5~0 V; Positive output 5~10 V
Freq. Freq. Freq.
Analog output direction selection
 AFM Output Bias

Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 Example 1, AFM 0~10V is set output frequency, the output equation is
Output Frequency
10V  ( )  03 - 24  10V  03 - 27
01 - 00
 Example 2, AFM 0~20 mA is set output frequency, the output equation is

Output Frequency
20mA  ( )  03 - 24  20mA  03 - 27
01 - 00
12.1-03-15

 Example 3, AFM 4~20 mA is set output frequency, the output equation is

Output Frequency
4mA  16mA  ( )  03 - 24  16mA  03 - 27
01 - 00
 This parameter can set the corresponding voltage of analog output 0.
 AVI Terminal Input Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0~10 V
3: -10 V ~ +10 V (Pr. 03-69 ~ 03-74 is valid)
 ACI Terminal Input Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 4~20 mA
1: 0~10 V
2: 0~20 mA
 When changing the input mode, please check if the switch position of external terminal (ACI) is
correct or not.
Status of PLC Analog Output Terminal

Settings Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
bit 1: AFM
bit 2: AO10
bit 3: AO11
 P. 03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
0=ON
1=OFF
Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AFM 1
AFM 2
NOTE
7 6
2 =128 2 =64
5 4 3
2 =32 2 =16 2 =8
2 1 0
2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
 For Example:
If the value of Pr. 03-30 displays 0002h (Hex), it means AFM is used by PLC.
0 =N o t u se d b y P L C
1 =U se d b y P L C
W e ig h t s 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
B it 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 AFM 1
AFM 2
D is p la y v a lu e
1 0
2 = 1x 2 + 0 x 2
= bit 1x 2 + bit 0 x 2
1 0
12.1-03-16

 AFM Output Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0~10 V output
1: 0~20 mA output
2: 4~20 mA output
 AFM DC Output Setting Level
Settings 0.00~100.00 %

AFM Filter Output Time
Settings 0.00~20.00 Sec.
 VR Input Selection
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0：Disable
1：Frequency command
 VR Input Bias
Settings -100~100 %
 VR Positive / Negative Bias
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
 VR Gain
Settings -500.0~500.0 %
VR Filter Time
Settings 0~2.00 sec.
 Multi-function MO Output by Source of AI Level
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: AVI
1: ACI
 AI Upper Level 1
Factory Setting: 50
Settings -100 %~100 %
 AI Lower Level 2
Factory Setting: 10
Settings -100 %~100 %
12.1-03-17

 This function requires working with Multi-function Output item “67” Analog signal level achieved.
The MO active when AI input level is higher than Pr. 03-45 AI Upper level. The MO shutoffs when
the AI input is lower that Pr. 03-46 AI Lower level.
 AI Upper level must be higher than AI Lower level
 Analog Input Curve Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI (& AI10)
2: 3 point curve of ACI (& AI11)
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI (& AI10 & AI11)
(AI10, AI11 is valid when extension card is installed)
 ACI Lowest Point
Settings Pr. 03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
Pr. 03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Lowest Point
Settings 0.00~100.00 %
 ACI Mid-point
Settings 03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Mid-point
Settings 0.00~100.00 %
 ACI Highest Point
Settings 03-29 = 1, 0.00~10.00 V
03-29 ≠ 1, 0.00~20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Highest Point
Settings 0.00~100.00 %
 When Pr. 03-29 = 1, ACI setting is 0-10 V and the unit is in voltage (V).
 When Pr. 03-29 ≠ 1, ACI setting is 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA and the unit is in current (mA).
 When setting analog input ACI to frequency command, it 100 % corresponds to Fmax (Pr. 01-00
Max. operation frequency).
 The 3 parameters (Pr. 03-57, Pr. 03-59 and Pr. 03-61) must meet the following argument:
Pr. 03-57 < Pr. 03-59 < Pr. 03-61. The 3 proportional points (Pr. 03-58, Pr. 03-60 and Pr. 03-62)
doesn’t have any limit. Between two points is a linear calculation.
 The output % will become 0 % when the ACI input value is lower than low point setting.
12.1-03-18

For example:
If Pr. 03-57 = 2 mA; Pr. 03-58 = 10 %, then the output will become 0 % when AVI input is ≦
2mA. If the ACI input is swing between 2 mA and 2.1 mA, drive’s output frequency will beats
between 0 % and 10 %.
 AVI Voltage Lowest Point

Settings 0.00~10.00 V
 AVI Voltage Proportional Lowest Point
Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 AVI Voltage Mid-point
 AVI Voltage Proportional Mid-point
Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 AVI Voltage Highest Point
 AVI Voltage Proportional Highest Point
Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 When setting positive voltage AVI to frequency command, it 100 % corresponds to Fmax
(Pr. 01-00 Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in forward direction.
Pr. 03-63 < Pr. 03-65 < Pr. 03-67. The 3 proportional points (Pr. 03-54, Pr. 03-66 and Pr. 03-68)
 The output % will become 0 % when positive voltage AVI input value is lower than low point
setting.
For example:
If Pr. 03-63 = 1V; Pr. 03-64 = 10 %, then the output will become 0 % when AVI input is ≤ 1 V.
If input is swing between 1 V and 1.1 V, drive’s output frequency will beats between 0% and
10%.
 Negative AVI Voltage Lowest Point

Settings 0.00~ -10.00 V
12.1-03-19

 Negative AVI Voltage Proportional Lowest Point

Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 Negative AVI Voltage Mid-point
Factory Setting: -5.00
Settings 0.00~ -10.00 V
 Negative AVI Voltage Proportional Mid-point
Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 Negative AVI Voltage Highest Point
Settings 0.00~ -10.00 V
 Negative AVI Voltage Proportional Highest Point
Settings -100.00~100.00 %
 When setting negative voltage AVI to frequency command, it -100 % corresponds to Fmax
(Pr. 01-00 Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in reverse direction.
Pr. 03-69 < Pr. 03-71 < Pr. 03-73 The 3 proportional points (Pr. 03-70, Pr. 03-72 and Pr. 03-74)
 The output % will become 0% when the negative AVI input value is lower than low point setting.
For example:
If Pr. 03-63 = -1V; Pr. 03-64 = 10 %, then the output will become 0% when AVI input is ≧ -1V. If
the AVI input is swing between -1V and -1.1V, drive’s output frequency will beats between 0 %
and 10 %.
12.1-03-20

04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 1st Stage Speed Frequency

 2nd Stage Speed Frequency
 3rd Stage Speed Frequency
 4th Stage Speed Frequency
 The multi-function input terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr. 02-01~02-07 Multi-function input
command) are used to select multi-stage speed command (max. is 15th stage speed). The
multi-stage speed (frequency) is set by Pr. 04-00 to 04-14 as shown in the following diagram.
 The run / stop command can be controlled by the external terminal / digital keypad /
communication via Pr. 00-21.
 Each multi-stage speed can be set within 0.00~599.00 Hz during operation.
 Explanation for the timing diagram of multi-stage speed and external terminals
The related parameter settings are:
1. Pr. 04-00~04-14: setting 1st ~15th multi-stage speed (to set the frequency of each stage speed)
2. Pr. 02-01~02-07: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-stage speed command 1~4)
 Related parameters:
 01-22 JOG frequency setting
 02-01 multi-function input command 1 (MI1)
12.1-04-1

 PLC Buffer 0
 PLC Buffer 1
 PLC Buffer 2
 PLC Buffer 3
 PLC Buffer 4
 PLC Buffer 5
 PLC Buffer 6
 PLC Buffer 7
 PLC Buffer 8
 PLC Buffer 9
 PLC Buffer 10
 PLC Buffer 11
 PLC Buffer 12
 PLC Buffer 13
 PLC Buffer 14
 PLC Buffer 15
 PLC Buffer 16
 PLC Buffer 17
 PLC Buffer 18
 PLC Buffer 19
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
 PLC buffer can be combined with built-in PLC function for a variety of applications.
12.1-04-2
05 Motor Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
Motor Parameter Auto Tuning

Factory Setting: 0
1: Dynamic test for induction motor (IM)
2: Static test for induction motor (IM)
13: High frequency stall test for PM synchronous motor
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)

Unit: Ampere
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 10~120 % of drive’s rated current
 This value should be set according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. The factory setting is 90 % of rated current.
Example: The rated current of 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) is 25 A, the factory setting is 22.5 A.
The setting range will be 2.5~30 A. (25 × 10 % = 2.5 A and 25 × 120 % = 30 A)
 Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (kW)

Settings 0~655.35 kW
 It is used to set rated power of motor 1. Factory setting is the power value of drive.
 Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm)

Settings 0~65535
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)
 It is used to set the rated speed of the motor according to motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1

Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20
 It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
 Set up Pr. 01-01 and Pr. 05-03 before setting up Pr. 05-04 to make sure motor operates normally.
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)

Unit: Ampere
Settings 0~Pr. 05-01 factory setting
 The factory setting is 40 % of the motor rated current.
12.1-05-1

Stator Resistance (Rs) of Induction Motor 1

Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings 0~65.53 5 Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 1

Stator inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 1
Settings 0~6553.5 mH

Unit: Ampere
 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor


Settings 0~65535
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)

Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20

Unit: Ampere
Settings 0~ Pr. 05-13 factory setting
12.1-05-2


Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 2
Settings 0~65.535 Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 2
Settings 0~6553.5 mH
Multi-motors (Induction) Selection
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
 It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive. Multi-motors selection only supports
single control mode. For example: When motor 1 is set as SVC control mode, the control mode of
motor 2 ~ 4 is also set as SVC.
 Frequency for Y-connection /△-connection Switch of Induction Motor

Y-connection /△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor
 Pr. 05-23~Pr. 05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the
switch of Y-connection / -connection as required. (The wide range motors are related to the
motor design. In general, it has higher torque at low speed with Y-connection and has higher
speed at high speed with -connection)
 Pr. 05-24 is used to enable / disable the switch of Y-connection / -connection.
 When Pr. 05-24 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr. 05-23 setting and current motor frequency,
and switch current motor to Y-connection or -connection. Relevant parameter settings of the
motor can be switched simultaneously.
 Pr. 05-25 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection / -connection.
 When output frequency reaches Y-connection / -connection switch frequency, drive will delay by
Pr. 05-25 before multi-function output terminals are active.
12.1-05-3

-c onnec tion is finis hed U

Pr. 02-01~02-07=30
MI1 V
W
-c onnec t ion c ont rol W V U
Y-c onnec t ion is finis hed
Pr. 02-13 = 32
Pr. 02-01~02-07=29
MI2 RA
Y-c onnec t ion c ont rol IM
Pr. 02-13 = 31
MR A
X Y Z
Y- c onnec tion s w it c h: c an be us ed for w ide range motor

Y -c onnec tion for low s peed: higher torque c an be us ed f or rigid tapping
-c onnec tion for high s peed: higher torque c an be us ed f or high-s peed drilling
Free run status
Output frequency
Y-connection output
Pr. 02-13 = 31
ON
Y-connection confirmation
ON
input Pr. 02-01~0 7 = 29
△- connection output ON
Pr. 02-13 = 32
△-connection confirmation
input Pr. 02-01~0 7 = 30
Y -△switch error ON
2 seconds
Delay time
Pr. 05-23
12.1-05-4

Accumulative Watt-second of Motor in Low Word (W-sec)

Accumulative Watt-second of Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor (W-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in Low Word (KW-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in High Word (KW-Hour)
Settings Read only
 Pr. 05-26~05-30 records the amount of power consumed by motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The amount
of consumed watts will continue to accumulate when the drive is activated again. To clear the
accumulation, set Pr. 00-02 to 5 then the accumulation record will return to 0.
 Accumulated total watts of motor per second = Pr. 05-27 x 65536 + Pr. 05-26
Example: When Pr. 05-26 = 2548.1 and Pr. 05-27 = 15.2, the accumulated total watts of motor
per second = 15.2 x 65536 + 2548.1 = 996147.2 + 2548.1 = 998695.3
 Accumulated total kilowatts of motor per hour = Pr. 05-30 x 65536 + Pr. 05-29
Example: When Pr. 05-29 = 3361.4 and Pr. 05-30 = 11.2, the accumulated total kilowatts of
motor per hour = 11.2 x 65536 + 3361.4 = 734003.2 + 3361.4 = 737346.6
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~1439
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~65535
 Pr. 05-31 and Pr. 05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time,
set Pr. 05-31 and Pr. 05-32 to 00. Operation time shorter than 60 seconds will not be recorded.
Induction Motor (IM) or Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Induction Motor
1: SPM
2: IPM
Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor

12.1-05-5

Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor

Settings 0.00~655.35 kW
 It is used to set rated power of permanent magnet synchronous motor. Factory setting is the
power value of drive.
Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor

Pole number of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor
Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~65535
Stator Resistance of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor
Settings 0.000~65.535 
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Ld
Settings 0.00~655.35 mH
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor Lq
Settings 0.00~655.35 mH
Ke parameter of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor
Unit: V / 1000 rpm
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
Unit: Ampere
 Set this parameter according to nameplate of motor. The factory setting is 90 % of rated current.

12.1-05-6


Settings 0~65535
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)

Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20

Unit: Ampere

Settings 0~65.535 
Unit: Ampere
 This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor


Settings 0~65535
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)
12.1-05-7


Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20

Unit: Ampere

Settings 0~65.535 
12.1-05-8

06 Protection Parameters (1)  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Low Voltage Level

Factory Setting:
Settings 110V / 230V: 150.0~220.0 Vdc 180.0
460V: 300.0~440.0 Vdc 360.0
 This parameter is used to set the Low Voltage (LV) level. When the DC BUS voltage is lower than
Pr. 06-00, drive will stop output and free to stop.
 If LV fault is triggered during operation, the drive will stop output and free to stop. There are three
LV faults, LvA (LV during acceleration), Lvd (LV during deceleration), and Lvn (LV in constant
speed) which will be triggered according to the status of acceleration / deceleration. These faults
need to be RESET manually to restart the drive, while setting restart after momentary power off
function (Refer to Pr. 07-06 and Pr. 07-07), the drive will restart automatically.
 If LV fault is triggered when the drive is in stop status, the drive will display LvS (LV during stop),
which will not be recorded, and the drive will restart automatically when input voltage is higher
than LV level 30V (230V series) or 60V (460V series).
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
 Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Settings 0: Disabled Factory Setting:
110V / 230V: 0.0~450.0 Vdc 380.0
460V: 0.0~900.0 Vdc 760.0
 When Pr. 06-01 is set to 0.0, the over-voltage stall prevention function is disabled (connected with
braking unit or braking resistor). This setting is recommended when braking units or resistors are
connected to the drive.
 When the setting value is not 0.0, the over-voltage stall prevention is activated. This setting
should refer to power supply system and loading. If the setting is too low, then over-voltage stall
prevention will be easily activated, which may increase deceleration time.
 Related parameters: Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19 Decel. Time 1~4, Pr. 02-13
Multi-function output (Relay), Pr. 02-16~Pr. 02-17 Multi-function output (MO1, 2), and
Pr. 06-02 Selection for over-voltage stall prevention.
12.1-06-1

 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage stall prevention
 This function is used for the occasion that the load inertia is unsure. When it stops in normal load,
the over-voltage won’t occur during deceleration and meet the setting of deceleration time.
Sometimes, it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to stop when increasing the
load regenerative inertia. At this moment, the AC motor drive will extend the deceleration time
automatically until the drive stops.
 When Pr. 06-02 is set to 0: During deceleration, the motor will exceed the synchronous speed
due to load inertia. In this case the motor becomes an electric generator. The DC bus voltage
may exceed its maximum allowable value due to motor regeneration in some situation, such as
loading inertia is too high or Decel. Time is set too short. When traditional over-voltage stall
prevention is enabled and the DC voltage detected is too high, the drive will stop decelerating
(output frequency remains unchanged) until the DC voltage drops below the setting value again.
High-voltage
at DC si de
Ov er-v ol tage
detec ti on
level
Time
Output
frequency
F requenc y Held
D eceleration c har acteristic

w hen Ov er-Voltage Stall
Pr ev ention enabled
Time
previous deceleration time
requir ed time for decelerating to 0Hz when over- voltage
stall prevention is enabled.
 When Pr. 06-02 is set to 1: When use smart over-voltage stall prevention during deceleration, the
drive will maintain DC bus voltage when decelerating and prevent the drive from OV.
60Hz Output Frequency
DCBUS Voltage
370Vdc
310Vdc
0 Time
230V Series
12.1-06-2
 When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be longer than the
setting.
 When there is any problem as using deceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Increase suitable deceleration time.
2. Install brake resistor (refer to Chapter 7-1 for details) to dissipate the electrical energy that
regenerated from the motor as the form of heat.
 Related parameters: Pr. 01-13, Pr. 01-15, Pr. 01-17, Pr. 01-19 Decel. Time 1~4, Pr. 02-13
Multi-function output (Relay), Pr. 02-16~Pr. 02-17 Multi-function output (MO1, 2), and
Pr. 06-01 over-voltage stall prevention.
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Factory Setting:
Settings Normal Load: 0~150 % (100 % corresponds to the rated
120
current of the drive)
Heavy Load: 0~200 % (100 % corresponds to the rated
180
current of the drive)
 This parameter only works in VF, VFPG, and SVC mode.
 If the motor load is too large or acceleration time of drive is too short, the output current of drive
may be too high during acceleration, and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (OL or OC). This parameter is used to prevent these situations.
 During acceleration, the output current of drive may increase abruptly and exceed the setting
value of Pr. 06-03. The drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant, and
continues to accelerate after the output current drops.
 When the over-current stall prevention is enabled, the acceleration time of drive will be longer
than the setting.
 When the over-current stall prevention occurs due to the motor capacity is too small or operates
in the factory setting, please decrease Pr. 06-03 setting value.
 When there is any problem by using acceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Increase suitable deceleration time.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Auto Acceleration / Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto accel.)
3. Related parameters: Pr. 01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 (settings of accel. time 1~4), Pr. 01-44
Auto Acceleration / Deceleration Setting, Pr. 02-13 Multi-function Output (Relay),
Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
Output current
06-03
Setting frequency
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output frequency
Over-Current Stall p revention during
Acceleration,frequ ency held
Time
Original setting of acceleration time
actual acceleratio n time when over-current stall
prevention is ena bled
12.1-06-3

 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Factory Setting:
Settings Normal duty: 0~150 % (100 % corresponds to the
120
Heavy duty: 0~200 % (100 % corresponds to the
180
 This parameter only works in VF, VFPG, and SVC mode.
 It is a protection for drive to decrease output frequency automatically when the motor is over-load
abruptly during motor constant operation.
 If the output current exceeds the setting value of Pr. 06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
will decrease output frequency (according to Pr. 06-05) to prevent the motor from stall. If the
output current is lower than the setting value of Pr. 06-04, the drive will accelerate (according to
Pr. 06-05) again to the setting frequency.
06-04
Over-current stall prevention
level during operation Pr. 06-04 setting
Current
Pr. 06-04 setting-

rated current of drive x 5%
Over-current stall prevention
at constant speed, output
frequency decreases
Decreases by Output
deceleration time Frequency
Time
Over-current stall prevention at constant speed
 Accel. / Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: By current accel. / decel. time
1: By the 1st accel. / decel. time
2: By the 2nd accel. / decel. time
3: By the 3rd accel. / decel. time
4: By the 4th accel. / decel. time
5: By auto accel. / decel.
 It is used to set the accel. / decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
 Over-torque Detection Selection (Motor 1)

Factory Setting: 0
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation
2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during RUN
12.1-06-4

Factory Setting: 0
operation
 When Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09 are set to 1 or 3, warning message will be displayed but there will
not be an abnormal record.
 When Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09 are set to 2 or 4, warning message will be displayed and there will
be an abnormal record.
 Over-torque Detection Level (Motor 1)

Settings 10 to 250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current of the drive)
Settings 10~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current of the drive)
 Over-torque Detection Time (Motor 2)
 When the output current exceeds over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07 or Pr. 06-10) and also
exceeds over-torque detection time (Pr. 06-08 or Pr. 06-11), the over-torque detection will follow
the setting of Pr. 06-06 and Pr. 06-09.
 When Pr. 06-06 or Pr. 06-09 is set to 1 or 3, there will be ot1 / ot2 warning displayed while the
drive will keep running. The warning will be off only until the output current is smaller than 5 % of
the over-torque detection level.
Out put current

Ov er-t orque
det ect ion level
06- 07( 0 6- 10 )
0 6- 07( 0 6- 10) * 9 5%
Multi-fu nct ion output ON ON

terminal=7 or 8
Over-t orque
detection time
06-08(06-11)
12.1-06-5

 When Pr. 06-06 or Pr. 06-09 is set to 2 or 4, there will be ot1 / ot2 warning displayed and the drive
will stop running after over-torque detection. The drive will keep running after manually reset.
Ove r-t orque det ect ion leve l

06-07 (06-10)
Out put current
Manually reset
Multi-fu nct ion outpu t ON

terminal=7 or 8
O ver-torqu e dete ction time

06-08 (06-11)
 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection 1 (Motor 1)

Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft)
2: Disable
 It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic
thermal relay to limit the output power of drive.
 Setting as 0 is suitable for Inverter motor (motor fan using independent power supply). For this
kind of motor, there is no significant correlation between cooling capacity and motor speed.
Therefore the action of electronic thermal relay will remain stable in low speed to ensure the load
capability of motor in low speed.
 Setting as 1 is suitable for standard motor (motor fan is fixed on the rotor shaft). For this kind of
motor, the cooling capacity is lower in low speed. Therefore the action of electronic thermal relay
will reduce the action time to ensure the life of motor.
 When the power ON / OFF is switched frequently, if the power is switched OFF, the electronic
thermal relay protection will be reset. Therefore even setting as 0 or 1 may not protect the motor
well. If there are several motors connected to one drive, please install electronic thermal relay in
each motor respectively.
 Electronic Thermal Relay Action Time 1 (Motor 1)

 The parameter is set by 150 % of motor rated current and used with the setting of Pr. 06-14 and
Pr. 06-28 to prevent the motor from damage due to overheating. When it reaches the setting, the
drive will display “EoL1 / EoL2”, and the motor will be free running to stop.
12.1-06-6
 This parameter is to set the action time of electronic thermal relay. It works based on the I2t
characteristic curve of electronic thermal relay, output frequency and current of drive, and
operation time to prevent motor from overheating.
Motor rated Motor rated
current % current %
1 00 10 0
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
Motor rated Motor rated

25 50 75 10 0 125 1 50 frequenc y % 25 50 75 10 0 125 1 50 frequenc y %
Motor c ooling curve with shaf t-fixed fan Mot or coo ling curv e wit h indepen dent fan
 The action of electronic thermal relay depends on the setting of Pr. 06-13 and Pr. 06-27.
1. Pr. 06-13 or Pr. 06-27 is set 0 (using inverter motor):
When output current of drive is higher than 150 % of motor rated current (refer to motor
cooling curve with independent fan), the drive will start to count the time. Electronic thermal
relay will act when the accumulated time exceeds Pr. 06-14 or Pr. 06-28.
2. Pr. 06-13 or Pr. 06-27 is set 0 (using standard motor):
When output current of the drive is higher than 150 % of motor rated current (refer to motor
cooling curve with shaft-fixed fan), the drive will start to count the time. Electronic thermal
relay will act when the accumulated time exceeds Pr. 06-14 or Pr. 06-28.
The actual electronic thermal relay action time will adjust according to drive output current
(shown as motor loading rate %). The action time is short when the current is high, and the
action time is long when the current is low. Please refer to the following chart:
Op eratio n time
(se c.)
6 00
5 50
5 00
4 50
4 00
3 50 F= 50Hz
30 0 F= 40Hz
F= 20Hz
2 50
2 00
1 50
1 00
50
Motor l oa din g ra te
0
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1 08
1 20
1 32
1 44
1 56
1 68
1 80
1 92
(%)
 Temperature Level Over-heat (OH) Warning

o
Settings 0.0~110.0 C
 The factory setting of this parameter is 105 oC. When using Heavy Duty or Sensorless control
mode, the OH warning will be disabled if Pr. 06-15 is not reduced. When the temperature reaches
100 oC, the drive will stop with IGBT over-heat fault.
 When using control mode except Normal Duty or Sensorless mode, if Pr. 06-15 is set to 110 oC.
When the temperature reaches 110 oC, the drive will stop with IGBT over-heat fault.
12.1-06-7

 Stall Prevention Limit Level

Settings 0~100 % (Refer to Pr. 06-03, Pr. 06-04)
 Over-current stall prevention level when operation frequency is larger than Pr. 01-01.
Example: When Pr. 06-03 = 150 %, Pr. 06-04 = 100 % and Pr. 06-16 = 80 %.
The over-current stall prevention level during acceleration:
Pr. 06-03 * Pr. 06-16 = 150 x 80 % = 120 %.
The over-current stall prevention level during operating:
Pr. 06-04 * Pr. 06-16 = 100 x 80 % = 80 %.
Fault Record 1
Fault Record 2
Fault Record 3
Fault Record 4
Fault Record 5
Fault Record 6
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
18: TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error ( tH1o)
12.1-06-8

. 48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
106: CANopen station number setting error (CAdE)
12.1-06-9


143: Auto tuning error 2 (High frequency test stage) (AUE2)
144: Auto tuning error 3 (Rotary test stage) (AUE3)
 When the fault occurs and force stopping, it will be recorded in this parameter.
 During stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warning, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage
Lv (LvA, Lvd, Lvn error, with record).
 When dEb function is valid and enabled, the drive will execute dEb and record fault code 62 to
Pr. 06-17 ~ Pr. 06-22 simultaneously.
 Fault Output Option 1

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
 These parameters can be used with multi-function output terminal (set to 35-38) for the specific
requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (binary value
needs to be converted to decimal value before filled in Pr. 06-23 ~ Pr. 06-26).

Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
12.1-06-10

Fault Code
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS) ●
15: Phase loss protection (OrP) ●
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ●
18: TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error
( tH1o)
●
21: Drive over-load (oL) ●
22: Electronics thermal relay protection 1
(EoL1)
●
23: Electronics thermal relay protection 2
(EoL2)
●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) ●
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ●
28: Low current (uC) ●
31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ●
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ●
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ●
40: Auto tuning error (AUE) ●
41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●
45: PG slip error (PGF4) ●
48: Analog current input loss (ACE) ●
49: External fault input (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop (EF1) ●
51: External Base Block (bb) ●
52: Password error (Pcod) ●
54: Communication error (CE1) ●
12.1-06-11


Fault Code
58: Communication Time-out (CE10) ●
61: Y-connection / ᇞ-connection switch error
(ydc)
●
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) ●
63: Slip error (oSL) ●
72: Channel 1 (S1~DCM) safety loop error
(STL1)
●
76: Safety torque off (STo) ●
77: Channel 2 (S2~DCM) safety loop error
(STL2)
●
78: Internal loop error (STL3) ●
79: U phase Over current before run (Aoc) ●
80: V phase Over current before run (boc) ●
81: W phase Over current before run (coc) ●
82: U phase output phase loss (oPL1) ●
83: V phase output phase loss (oPL2) ●
84: W phase output phase loss (oPL3) ●
87: Drive over load in low frequency (oL3) ●
89: Initial rotor position detection error (roPd) ●
101: CANopen software disconnect 1 (CGdE) ●
102: CANopen software disconnect 2 (CHbE) ●
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE) ●
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE) ●
106: CANopen station number setting error
(CAdE)
●
107: CANopen memory error (CFrE) ●
121: Internal communication error (CP20) ●
127: Software version error (CP33) ●
134: Electronics thermal relay 3 protection
(EoL3)
●
135: Electronics thermal relay 4 protection
(EoL4)
●
140: GFF detected when power on (Hd6) ●
141: GFF occurs before run (b4GFF) ●
12.1-06-12

Fault Code
142: Auto tuning error 1 (DC test stage) (AUE1) ●
143: Auto tuning error 2 (High frequency test
stage) (AUE2)
●
144: Auto tuning error 3 (Rotary test stage)
(AUE3)
●
 PTC Detection Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
3: No warning
 This is the operating mode of a drive after Pr. 06-29 is set to define PTC detection.
 PTC Level
Settings 0.0~100.0 %
 It needs to set AVI / ACI analog input function Pr. 03-00~03-02 to 6 [Positive temperature
coefficient (PTC) thermistor input value)].
 It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100 % is analog input max. value.
Frequency Command for Malfunction

 When malfunction occurs, user can check current frequency command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Output Frequency at Malfunction

 When malfunction occurs, user can check current output frequency. If it happens again, it will
Output Voltage at Malfunction

 When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will
12.1-06-13

DC Voltage at Malfunction
 When malfunction occurs, user can check current DC voltage. If it happens again, it will overwrite
the previous record.
Output Current at Malfunction

Settings 0.00~655.35 Amp
 When malfunction occurs, user can check current output current. If it happens again, it will
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction

o
Settings 0.0~6553.5 C
 When malfunction occurs, user can check current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it will
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction

o
Settings -0.0~6553.5 C
 When malfunction occurs, user can check current capacitance temperature. If it happens again, it
will overwrite the previous record.
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction

 When malfunction occurs, user can check current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will
Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction

Settings 0000h~FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
 When malfunction occurs, user can check current status of multi-function input / output terminals.
If it happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction

 When malfunction occurs, user can check current drive status (communication address 2101H).
If malfunction happens again, the previous record will be overwritten by this parameter.
12.1-06-14
 STO Latch Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: STO Latch
1: STO no Latch
 Pr. 06-44 = 0 STO Alarm Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, a Reset command is
needed to clear STO Alarm.
 Pr. 06-44 = 1 STO Alarm no Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, the STO Alarm will
be cleared automatically.
 All of STL1~STL3 error are “Alarm latch” mode (in STL1~STL3 mode, the Pr. 06-44 function is
not effective).
 Treatment to Output Phase Loss Detection (OPHL)

Factory Setting: 3
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
3: No warning
 The OPHL protect will be active when the setting is not 3.
 Detection Time of Output Phase Loss

 Current Detection Level of Output Phase Loss
Settings 0.00~100.00 %
 DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss
 When Pr. 06-48 is 0, OPHL detection function will be disabled
 Status 1: The drive is in operation
When any phase is less than Pr. 06-47 setting level and exceeds Pr. 06-46 setting
time, the drive will execute according to Pr. 06-45 setting.
Drive’s st atus
Operation command
O PH L
OPHL detec tion
P r.06 -4 7
Outpu t current Time

P r. 06 -46 Whe n OPHL, Pr06-45 acts
12.1-06-15

 Status 2: The drive is in stop; Pr. 06-48 = 0; Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0

After the drive starts, DC brake will be applied according to Pr. 07-01 and Pr. 07-02.
During this period, OPHL detection will not be conducted. After DC brake is completed,
the drive starts to run, and conducts the OPHL protection as mentioned in status 1.
Drive’s st atus
Operation command
O P HL
OPHL detec tion
Pr.0 6-4 7
Pr.0 7-0 1
Outpu t current Time

Pr.06 -46 Whe n OPHL, Pr06-45 acts
P r. 07 -02
 Status 3: The drive is in stop; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 ≠ 0

When the drive starts, it will execute Pr. 06-48 first and then Pr. 07-02 (DC brake). DC
brake current level in this status includes two parts, one is 20 times of Pr. 06-47 setting
value in Pr. 06-48 setting time, and the other is Pr. 07-01 setting value in Pr. 07-02
setting time. In this period, if OPHL happens within the time of Pr. 06-48, the drive will
execute Pr. 06-45 setting after the drive starts counting for half time of Pr. 06-48.
Sta tus 3-1: P r0 6-48≠0, Pr07 -0 2≠0 (No OPHL d e tected be fore ope ra tion )
Drive’s s tat us
Operat io n co mman d
OP HL det ect ion ac tion OPHL det ect io n acts
No OPHL detec ted

O PHL detec tion
20 *[ Pr0 6-4 7 ]
Pr.07-01
Pr.06-47
Out put current Time
Start to op era te
Pr. 06-48 Pr. 07-02
Total DC brak e time
12.1-06-16
Sta tus 3-2: P r0 6-48≠0, Pr07 -0 2≠0 (OPHL d ete cte d befo re o perati on)
Drive’s st atus
O peration command
OP HL de tec tion ac tion OPHL dete ction act s
OPHL det ect ion O PHL detected Whe n OPHL, Pr06-45 act s
DC brake c om mand
20 *[Pr06-47]
P r.07 -01
Actual output c urrent
P r.06 -47
Outp ut current Time
Pr. 06- 48
2
Pr.06 -48 P r.07 -02 S tart to ope ra te
Tota l DC brak e time
 Status 4: The drive is in stop; Pr. 06-48 ≠ 0; Pr. 07-02 = 0

When the drive starts, it will execute Pr. 06-48 as DC brake. The DC brake current
level is 20 times of Pr. 06-47 setting value. In this period, if OPHL happens within the
time of Pr. 06-48, the drive will execute Pr. 06-45 setting after the drive starts counting
for half time of Pr. 06-48.
Sta tus 4-1: P r0 6-48≠0, Pr07 -0 2=0 (N o OPH L d etected b efore op eratio n)
Drive ’s st atus
Operation command
OP HL de tec tion action O PHL detec tion acts
No OPHL detected
O PHL detection
20 *[P r06-47 ]
P r. 06- 47
O utput current Time
Start to operate
Pr.06- 48
Total DC brak e time
12.1-06-17

Sta tus 4-2: P r0 6-48≠0, Pr07 -0 2=0 (OPHL d e tected be fore ope ra tion )
Driv e’s statu s
Operation command
OP HL de tection action O PHL detection acts
OPHL dete ction OPHL det ect ed When OPHL, Pr06-45 acts
DC brak e c ommand
2 0 *[P r 0 6 - 47 ]
Actual output c urrent

P r.06 -47
O utput current Time
Pr. 06-48
2
Pr.06 -48
Total DC brake time
 LvX Auto Reset

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Treatment for the Detected Input Phase Loss (OrP)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Warn and ramp to stop
 If DC bus ripple detected is larger than Pr. 06-52 setting, and continue the time of Pr. 06-50, then
after 30 seconds, the drive will execute input phase loss protection according to Pr. 06-53.
 If ripple voltage decreases below the set value of Pr. 06-52 within the time of Pr. 06-50 plus 30
seconds, the OrP protection function will be recalculate.
 Derating Protection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: Constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: Constant rated current (same as setting 0), but close current limit
 Allowable max. output frequency and the min. carrier wave limit in control mode:
VF, SVC, VFPG
When max. output frequency is 599 Hz, the min. carrier wave is 6 k.
 Setting 0:
When the operating point is greater than the derating curve (when the operating carrier
wave is greater than the rated carrier wave), the rated current is constant, and carrier frequency
(Fc) outputted by the drive will auto decrease according to ambient temperature, overload
12.1-06-18
output current and overload time. If overload situation is not frequent and only cares the carrier
frequency operated with the rated current for a long time, and can accept the change of carrier
wave due to short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.
Refer to the following diagram for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD9A0MS43ANSAA
in normal duty for example: ambient temperature 50 °C, UL open-type, and independent
installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 10 kHz, corresponding to 55 % rated output
current. At the same conditions, ambient temperature 40°C is corresponding to 75 % of rated
output current. When output current is higher than the value, it will auto decrease the carrier
wave according to ambient temperature, output current and overload time. At this time, the
overload capacity of drive is still 150 % of rated current.
 Setting 1:
When the operating point exceeds derating curve 1, carrier frequency is fixed to the set
value. Please select this mode if the change of carrier wave and motor noise caused by ambient
temperature and frequent overload are not accepted. (Please refer to Pr. 00-17)
Refer to the following diagram for the derating level of rated current. Take
VFD9A0MS43ANSAA in normal duty for example, when the carrier frequency is to be
maintained at 10 kHz, the rated current is decreased to 55 %. The OL protection will execute
when the current is 120 % * 55 % = 66 % for a minute. Therefore, it needs to operate by the
curve to keep the carrier frequency.
 Setting 2:
The protection method and action is the same as set to 0, but disables the current limit
when output current is derating Ratio ×120 % (default value) in normal duty and is derating
Ratio ×180 % (default value) in heavy duty.
The advantage is that it can provide higher starting output current when the carrier
frequency setting is higher than the factory setting. The disadvantage is that the carrier wave
derates easily when overload.
Example: when Pr. 06-55 = 0 or 1, over-current stall prevention level = Ratio*Pr. 06-03.
When Pr. 06-55 = 2, over-current stall prevention level = Pr. 06-03.
 It should be used with Pr. 00-16 and Pr.00-17 for setting.
 The derating will also be affected by ambient temperature, please refer to ambient temperature
derating curve.
Example: take VFD9A0MS43ANSAA in normal duty for example: ambient temperature 50
°C, UL open-type, and independent installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 10 kHz,
corresponding to 55 % rated output current. The ambient temperature 60°C is corresponding to
55 % * 75 % of rated output current.
 Derating curve (when Pr. 00-10 = 0 and Pr. 00-11 = 0~3), modulation mode can be adjusted by
Pr. 11-41.
12.1-06-19

In normal duty mode (Pr. 00-16 = 0) In heavy duty mode (Pr. 00-16 = 1)
Normal duty / 2-phase modulation mode Heavy duty / 2-phase modulation mode
Normal duty / space vector modulation mode Heavy duty / space vector modulation mode
NOTE Line 1: Ta = 50 oC or Pr. 06-55 = 1

Line 2: Ta = 40 oC and Pr. 06-55 = 0/2
Ambient temperature derating curve for general control
 PT100 Voltage Level 1

Settings 0.000~10.000 V
 PT100 Voltage Level 2
Settings 0.000~10.000 V
 Condition settings: Pr. 06-57 > Pr. 06-56.
 PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

12.1-06-20
 Delay Time of Activating PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

Factory Setting: 60
Settings 0~6000 sec.
 PT100 operation instructions
(1) Use voltage type analog input (AVI, ACI voltage 0-10V) and select PT100 mode.
(2) User can select one of voltage type analog input below:
(a) Pr. 03-00 =11, (b) Pr. 03-01 = 11 and Pr. 03-29 = 1
(3) When selecting Pr. 03-01 = 11 and Pr. 03-29 = 1, must switch AFM to 0-10V.
(4) AFM outputs constant voltage or current, Pr. 03-20 = 23. Must switch ACM to 0-20 mA, and
set AFM output level to 45% (Pr. 03-32 = 45%) of 20 mA = 9 mA.
(5) Pr. 03-32 is for adjusting the constant voltage or constant current of AFM output, the setting
range is 0~100.00 %.
(6) There are two types of action level for PT100. The diagram of PT100 protecting action is
shown below:
L e ve l 2 = 0 6 - 5 7
S e tti n g r a n g e : 0 .0 0 0 ~1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto r y se tti n g : 7 .0 0 0 V
L e ve l 1 = 0 6 - 5 6
S e tti n g r a n g e : 0 .0 0 0 ~1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto r y se tti n g : 5 .0 0 0 V
Wh e n i n p u t vo l ta g e o f P T1 0 0 r e a ch e s l e ve l 1 ,
Fr e q u e n cy a fte r th e d r i ve p a sse s th e d e l a y ti me se t a t P r. 0 6 - 5 9 ,
Co mma n d th e o u tp u t fr e q u e n cy g o e s b a ck to P r. 0 6 - 5 8 .
Wh e n i n p u t vo l ta g e o f P T1 0 0 r e a ch e s l e ve l 2 ,
th e d r i ve e xe cu te s b y th e se tti n g o f P r. 0 6 - 2 9
P r. 0 6 - 5 9 De l a y ti me
to p r e ve n t th e mo to r fr o m o ve r h e a ti n g .
 When Pr. 06-58 = 0.00 Hz, PT100 function is disabled.

Example:
When using PT100, if motor temperature is higher than 135 °C (275 °F), the drive will start to
count the delay time of auto deceleration (Pr. 06-59). The drive will decrease motor frequency to
the setting of Pr. 06-58 when reaches count value. The drive will operate at the frequency set by
Pr. 06-58 till the motor temperature is lower than 135 °C (275 °F). If motor temperature is higher
than 150°C (302 °F), the drive will decelerate to stop automatically and display warning “OH3”.
Set up process:
1. Switch AFM to 0-20 mA on control board.
2. Wiring:
Connect external terminal AFM to “+”
Connect external terminal ACM to “-“
Connect AFM and AVI to “short-circuit”
3. Pr. 03-00 = 11, Pr. 03-20 = 23, Pr. 03-32 = 45 % (9 mA)
12.1-06-21

4. Refer to RTD temperature and resistance comparison table

Temperature = 135 °C, resistance = 151.71 , input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.37 Vdc
Temperature = 150°C, resistance = 157.33 , input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.42 Vdc
5. When RTD temperature > 135 °C, the drive will decelerate to specified operation frequency
automatically. Pr. 06-56 = 1.37 and Pr. 06-58 = 10 Hz. (When Pr. 06-58 = 0, specified
operation frequency is disabled)
6. When RTD temperature > 150 °C, the drive will output fault and decelerate to stop
displaying warning “OH3” simultaneously. Pr. 06-57 = 1.42 and Pr. 06-29 = 1 (warning and
decelerate to stop).
 Software Detection GFF Current Level

Settings 0.0~6553.5 %
 Software Detection GFF Filter Time
 When the drive detects the unbalanced three-phase output current is higher than the setting of
Pr. 06-60, GFF protection will be activated. Then the drive will stop outputting.
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Day)

Settings 0~65535 days
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Min.)
Operation of Fault Record 4 (Min.)
Settings 0~1439 min.
 If there is any malfunction when the drive operating, Pr. 06-17~06-22 will record malfunctions,
and Pr. 06-63~06-70 can record the operation time for 4 malfunctions in sequence. It can help to
check if there is any problem with the drive according to the spacing of fault time recorded.
For example: The 1st error: ocA occurs after motor drive operates for 1000 minutes.
The 2nd error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The 3rd error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes.
12.1-06-22
The 4th error: ocA occurs after another 1000 minutes.

The 5th error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The 6th error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes.
Then Pr. 06-17~06-22 and Pr. 06-63~06-70 recorded as follows:
Parameter record method as follows:
1st fault 2nd fault 3rd fault 4th fault 5th fault 6th fault
06-17 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd ocn
06-18 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd
06-19 0 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA
06-20 0 0 0 ocA ocd ocn
06-21 0 0 0 0 ocA ocd
06-22 0 0 0 0 0 ocA
06-63 1000 560 120 1120 680 240

06-64 0 1 2 2 3 4
06-65 0 1000 560 120 1120 680
06-66 0 0 1 2 2 3
06-67 0 0 1000 560 120 1120
06-68 0 0 0 1 2 2
06-69 0 0 0 1000 560 120
06-70 0 0 0 0 1 2
※ By time record, it can be known that the last fault (Pr. 06-17) happened after the drive run for 4
days and 240 minutes.
 Low Current Setting Level

Settings 0.0 ~ 100.0 %
 Low Current Detection Time
Settings 0.00 ~ 360.00 sec.
 Treatment for Low Current
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue
 The drive will operate as the setting of Pr. 06-73 when output current is lower than the setting of
Pr. 06-71 and when low current exceeds detected time Pr. 06-72. This parameter can be used
with external multi-function output terminal 44 (for low current output).
 The low current detection function will not be executed when drive is at sleep or standby status.
12.1-06-23

07 Special Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Software Brake Level

Settings 110 V / 230 V: 350.0~450.0 Vdc
460 V: 700.0~900.0 Vdc
 This parameter sets the level of brake transistor which refers to the DC-bus voltage. Users can
choose suitable brake resistor to achieve the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 “Optional
Accessories” for the information of brake resistor.
 DC Brake Current Level

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100 %
 This parameter sets the level of DC brake current outputted to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting the percentage of DC brake current, the rated current is regarded as
100%. Be sure to start with a low DC brake current level, and increase slowly until proper brake
torque has been attained. However, the DC brake current can NOT exceed the rated current to
avoid burning the motor. Therefore, DO NOT use the DC brake as mechanical retention,
otherwise it may cause injury accident.
 DC Brake Time at Startup

 The motor may be in rotation status due to external force or the inertia itself. If the drive is used
with the motor at this moment, it may cause motor damage or drive protection due to over current.
This parameter can output DC current generating torque to force the motor stop before motor
operation to get a stable start. This parameter determines the duration of the DC brake current
when the drive start-up. When set to 0.0, the DC brake is invalid at startup.
 DC Brake Time at Stop

 The motor may be in rotation status after the drive stops outputting due to external force or inertia
itself, and cannot stop completely. This parameter can output DC current generating torque to
force the drive stop after the drive stops outputting to make sure that the motor stops.
 This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during brakes. To enable DC
brake at stop, this function will be valid when Pr. 00-22 (stop method) is set to 0 (ramp to stop).
 Related parameters: Pr. 00-22 Stop Method, Pr. 07-04 DC Brake Start Frequency.
12.1-07-1

 DC Brake Start Frequency

 This parameter determines the start frequency of DC brake before the drive ramp to stop. When
this setting is less than start-up frequency (Pr. 01-09), the start frequency of DC brake will start
from the min. frequency.
O u tp u t fr e q u e n cy
DC b r a ke ti me
a t sta r tu p DC b r a ke ti me
07-04 a t sto p
01-09 DC b r a ke sta r t
S ta r t- u p fr e q u e n cy
07-04 fr e q u e n cy 07-03
Ru n / S to p
O FF
ON Ti me
DC B r a ke O u tp u t Ti mi n g Di a g r a m
 DC brake before run is used for occasions when the load is movable at stop, such as fans and
pumps. The motor is in free operating status and in uncertain running direction before the drive
startups. Execute DC brake first before starting the motor.
 DC Brake at stop is used for occasions that hoping to brake the motor quickly or to control the
positioning, such as crane or cutting machine.
 Voltage Incrasing Gain

Settings 1~200 %
 When using speed tracking, adjust Pr. 07-05 to slow down the increasing speed of voltage if
there are errors such as oL or oc. However, the time of speed tracking will be longer.
 Restart after Momentary Power Loss

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by the speed before the power loss
2: Speed tracking by the minimum output frequency
 This parameter determines the operation mode when the drive restarts from a momentary
power loss.
 The power system connected to the drive may be power off momentarily due to many reasons.
This function allows the drive to keep outputting after the drive is repowered and will not cause
the drive stops.
 Setting 1: Tracking the frequency before momentary power loss, accelerating to master
frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
This setting is recommended if the characteristics of motor load are large inertia and small
resistance. Example: In the equipment with big inertia flywheel, there is NO need to wait till the
flywheel stops completely after restart to execute operation command, therefore it saves time.
12.1-07-2
 Setting 2: Frequency tracking starts from the minimum output frequency, accelerating to master
frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
This setting is recommended if the characteristics of motor load are small inertia and large
resistance.
 In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed tracking function automatically by
PG speed when this setting is NOT set to 0.
 Allowed Power Loss Duration

 This parameter determines the maximum time of allowable power loss. If the duration of a power
loss exceeds this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will stop outputting.
 Pr. 07-06 is valid when the maximum allowable power loss time is  20 seconds and the AC
motor drive displays “LU”. But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the
maximum allowable power loss time is  20 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr. 07-06 is
not executed. In that case it
 Base Block Time

 When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait
for a specified period of time (determined by Pr. 07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at the time which allows the residual voltage at output
side to decrease to 0V before the drive is activated again.
In p u t B .B . si g n a l
O u tp u t fr e q u e n cy ( H)
S to p o u tp u t vo l ta g e
Di sa b l e B .B . si g n a l
Wa i ti n g ti me P r. 0 7 - 0 8
O u tp u t vo l ta g e ( V )
S p e e d tr a cki n g
S yn ch r o n o u s sp e e d d e te cti o n
O u tp u t cu r r e n t A Fr e q u e n cy co mma n d b e fo r e B .B .
P r. 0 7 - 0 9
Cu r r e n t l e ve l o f
sp e e d tr a cki n g
Ti me
FWD Ru n
B.B.
B .B . S p e e d tr a cki n g : fr o m l a st o u tp u t fr e q u e n cy
12.1-07-3

In p u t B .B . si g n a l
O u tp u t fr e q u e n cy ( H)
S to p o u tp u t vo l ta g e
Di sa b l e B .B . si g n a l
Wa i ti n g ti me P r. 0 7 - 0 8
O u tp u t vo l ta g e ( V )
S p e e d tr a cki n g
S yn ch r o n o u s sp e e d d e te cti o n
O u tp u t cu r r e n t A
P r. 0 7 - 0 9
Cu r r e n t l e ve l o f
sp e e d tr a cki n g
Ti me
FWD Ru n
B.B.
B .B . S p e e d tr a cki n g : fr o m mi n i mu m o u tp u t fr e q u e n cy
Input B.B. signal

Output frequency (H)
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Output voltage (V) Waiting time Pr. 07-08

Speed track ing
Synchronous speed detection
Output c urrent A
Pr. 06-03
Over-current stall
prevention level
during accel.
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Over-c urrent stall prevention
 Current Limit of Speed Tracking

Settings 20~200 %
 The AC motor drive will execute the speed tracking only if the output current is greater than the
value set by Pr. 07-09.
 The maximum current of speed tracking will affect the synchronous time. The larger the
parameter setting is, the faster the synchronization arrives. However, if parameter setting is too
large, overload protection function may be activated.
12.1-07-4
 Treatment of Restart after Fault

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by current speed
the PG speed when this setting is NOT set to 0.
 Fault includes: bb, oc, ov, occ. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr. 07-11 can NOT be set to 0.
 Restart Times after Fault

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10
 After fault (allowed fault: oc, ov, occ) occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset / restarted
automatically up to 10 times.
 If the times of fault occurs exceeds Pr. 07-11 setting, the fault will not be restart /reset until user
press “RESET” manually and execute operation command again.
 Speed Tracking during Start-up

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Speed tracking by maximum output frequency
2: Speed tracking by motor frequency at start
 Speed tracking function is suitable for punch, fans and other large inertia load. For example,
mechanical punch usually has a large inertia flywheel, and the general stop method is coast to
stop. Therefore, if it needs to be restarted again, the flywheel will take 2-5 minutes or longer to
stop. By setting this parameter, there is NO need to wait till the flywheel stops completely to
make the flywheel start operating immediately.
the PG speed when this setting is NOT set to 0.
 dEb Function Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: dEb with auto accel. / decal., the frequency will not return after power
recovery.
2: dEb with auto accel. / decal., the frequency will return after power recovery
 dEb (Deceleration Energy Backup) let the motor decelerate to stop when momentary power loss
occurs. When the power loss instantly, this function can be used to let the motor decelerate to
zero speed. If the power recovers at this time, drive can restart the motor after dEb return time.
 Lv return level: Default value will depend on the drive power model.
Frame A, B, C, D = Pr. 06-00 + 60V / 30V (220V series)
Frame E and above = Pr. 06-00 + 80V / 40V (220V series)
12.1-07-5

 Lv level: Default is Pr. 06-00

 During dEb in operation, it may be interrupted by other protection, such as ryF, ov, oc, occ,
EF…etc., and these error codes will be recorded.
 The STOP (RESET) command will be ineffective during the dEb auto deceleration, and the drive
will keep decelerating to stop. To make the drive coast to stop immediately, please use another
function EF instead.
 B.B. function is ineffective when executing dEb. B.B. function is enabled after dEb function is
finished.
 Even though Lv warning is not displayed during the dEb operates. If DC BUS voltage is lower
than Lv level, MO = 10 (Low voltage warning) still operates.
 dEb action illustrated as follows:
When DC voltage drops below dEb activated level, the dEb function starts to work (soft start relay
remain closed), and the drive will execute auto deceleration.
 Situation 1: Momentary power loss/ power current too low and unstable/ power supply sliding down
because of sudden heavy load
Pr. 07-13 = 1 and power recovers
When the power recovers and DC BUS voltage exceeds dEb return level, the drive will linear
decelerates to 0 Hz and stop. The keypad will display “dEb” warning until reset manually, to avoid
that the users do not know the reason of stopping.
DC BU S volta ge
d Eb re turn le ve l
dEb activa ted le ve l
Lv l eve l
So ft sta rt r el ay a t
pow er si de
dEb activa ted

Ou tput f req uen cy L ine ar d ecel eratio n
Au to dece lerati on
0H z
12.1-07-6
 Situation 2: Momentary power loss/ power current too low and unstable/ power supply sliding down
because of sudden heavy load
Pr. 07-13 = 2 and power recovers
During the dEb deceleration (includes 0 Hz run), if the power recovers higher than dEb return level,
the drive will maintain the frequency for 3 seconds and then accelerate again. The dEb warning on
the keypad will be cleared automatically.
DC BUS vo lta ge
dEb retu rn l evel

dEb activate d l evel
L v l evel
Soft s tart re lay a t

po we r side
dEb a cti vated
O utpu t f re que ncy

Auto de ce le ra tion Lin ea r acclera tion
0 Hz
3 s ec
dEb retu rn time
 Situation 3: Power supply unexpected shut down / power loss

Pr. 07-13 = 1 and power will not recover
The keypad will display “dEb” warning and stop after decelerating to the lowest running frequency.
When the DC BUS voltage is lower than Lv level, the drive will disconnect soft start relay until
running out of power completely.
DC BUS voltage
dEb return level

Completed
dEb ac tiv ated level power los s
Lv lev el
Soft s tart relay at

power side
dEb ac tiv ated
O utput frequency
0 Hz
MO = 10
Lv warning
12.1-07-7

 Situation 4: Power supply unexpected shut down / power loss

Pr. 07-13 = 2 and power will not recover
The drive will decelerate to 0 Hz. The DC BUS voltage will continue to decrease until the voltage is
lower than Lv level, then the drive will disconnect soft start relay. The keypad will display “dEb”
warning until the drive run out of power completely.
 Situation 5: Pr. 07-13 = 2 and power will recover after DC BUS voltage is lower than Lv level.
The drive will decelerate to 0 Hz. The DC BUS voltage will continue to decrease until the voltage is
lower than Lv level, then the drive will disconnect soft start relay. The soft start relay will close again
after the power recovers and DC BUS voltage is higher than Lv return level. When the DC BUS
voltage is higher than dEb return level, the drive will maintain the frequency for 3 seconds and
restart to linear accelerate, the dEb warning on the keypad will be cleared automatically.
DC B US vo l ta g e
d E b r e tu r n l e ve l
L v r e tu r n l e ve l
d E b a cti va te d l e ve l
L v l e ve l
S o ft sta r t r e l a y a t
p o we r si d e
d E b a cti va te d
O u tp u t fr e q u e n cy
A u to d e ce l e r a ti o n L i n e a r a cce l e r a ti o n
0 Hz
3 sec.
dE b r e tu r n ti me
MO = 1 0
L v wa r n i n g
 Dwell Time at Accel.

 Dwell Time at Decel.
 Dwell Frequency at Accel.
 Dwell Frequency at Decel.
 In heavy load situation, Dwell can maintain stable output frequency temporarily. It can be applied
to crane, elevators and so on.
12.1-07-8
 When the load is heavier, use Pr. 07-15 ~ Pr. 07-18 to avoid the protection of OV or OC.
Frequency
07-18
07-16 Dwell
07-17
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Frequency at Decel.
07-15 at Decel.
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel. Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
 Fan Cooling Control

Factory Setting: 3
Settings 0: Fan always ON
1: Fan will be OFF after the AC motor drive stops 1 minute
2: 2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When the AC motor drive
stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when the temperature attain around 60 oC
 This parameter is used for controlling the fan.
 Setting 0: Fan will run immediately when the power of drive is turned ON.
 Setting 1: AC motor drive runs and fan will run.1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be
OFF
 Setting 2: AC motor drive runs and fan will run. AC motor drive stops and fan will stop
immediately
 Setting 3: When temperature of IGBT or capacitance is higher than 60 degrees, fan will run.
When temperature of IGBT and capacitance both are lower than 40 degrees, fan will
stop.
 Deceleration of Emergency or Forced Stop

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by 4th deceleration time
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
 When the multi-function input terminal is set to EF (10) or forced stop (18) and the terminal
contact is ON, the drive will stop according to the setting of this parameter.
12.1-07-9

 Auto Energy-saving Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 When energy-saving is ON, the acceleration will operate with full voltage. During constant speed
operation, it will calculate the best voltage value automatically by the load power for the load.
This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or the load which is nearly full during
operation.
 When the output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will decrease
automatically as the load decreases. Therefore, the drive will operate with min. multiplication of
voltage and current (electric power).
 Energy-saving Gain
Settings 10~1000 %
 When Pr. 07-21 is set to 1, this parameter can be used to adjust the gain of energy-saving. The
factory setting is 100 %. If the result is not well, it can be adjusted by decreasing the setting
value. If the motor oscillates, then increase the setting value.
 In certain applications such as high speed spindle, the temperature rise of motor is highly
concerned. Thus, when the motor is not in working status, the motor current should reduce to a
lower level. Reducing this parameter setting can meet this requirement.
 Auto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
 The rated voltage of the motor is usually AC 220V / 200 V, 60 Hz / 50 Hz, and the input voltage
of the AC motor drive may vary from AC 180 V to 264V, 50 Hz / 60 Hz. Therefore, when the AC
motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input
voltage. When the motor runs at the voltage exceeding 12 % ~ 20 % of rated voltage, it will
cause higher temperature, damaged insulation and unstable torque output, which will result in
losses due to shorter lifetime of motor.
 AVR function automatically regulates the output voltage of AC motor drive to the motor rated
voltage. For example, if V/F curve is set at AC 200V / 50 Hz and the input voltage is at AC 200V
to 264V, then output voltage to the motor will automatically be reduced to a maximum of AC
200V / 50 Hz. If the input voltage is at AC 180V to 200V, the output voltage to motor and input
power will be in direct proportion.
 Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual DC
BUS voltage. The output voltage will NOT change when DC BUS voltage changes.
12.1-07-10
 Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual DC
BUS voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC BUS voltage. It may cause insufficient /
over current or shock.
 Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR when deceleration to stop, and may accelerate to brake.
 When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time will be shorter when setting this parameter
to 2 with auto acceleration / deceleration, the deceleration will be more stable and quicker.
 Filter Time of Torque Command (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

 When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delayed.
When the setting is too short, the response will be quicker but the control may be unstable. User
can adjust the setting according to the stability of control and response time.
 Filter Time of Slip Compensation (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

 The response time of compensation can be changed by Pr. 07-24 and Pr. 07-25.
 If Pr. 07-24 and Pr. 07-25 are set to 10 seconds, the response time of compensation is the
slowest. However, the system may be unstable if the time set is too short.
 Torque Compensation Gain

. Torque Compensation Gain (Motor 2)
 Torque Compensation Gain (Motor 3)
 Torque Compensation Gain (Motor 4)
Factory Setting: 1
Settings IM: 0~10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
PM: 0~5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
 When the motor load is large, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the resistor of stator
winding, therefore, the air gap magnetic field is insufficient, which causes insufficient voltage at
motor induction and result in over output current but insufficient output torque. Auto torque
compensation can auto adjust output voltage according to the load, and keep the air gap
magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
 In the V/F control, the voltage will decrease in direct proportion with the frequency decreased. It
will cause the torque decreasing at low speed due to the AC resistor is smaller while DC resistor
is unchanged. Therefore, auto torque compensation function will increase output voltage in low
frequency to get higher start torque.
 When compensation gain is set too large, it may cause motor overflux and result in too large
output current, motor overheat or protection function be triggered.
12.1-07-11

 Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

 Slip Compensation Gain (Motor 2)
Settings 0.00~10.00 (Default value is 1 in SVC mode)
 The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the
higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3 % of slip.
 In operation, the slip and the synchronous frequency will be in reverse proportion to produce the
same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction of synchronous frequency.
The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency decreases to a specific value. Therefore,
the slip seriously affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
 In another situation, when the drive is used with induction motor, the slip will increase when the
load increases. It also affects the accuracy of motor speed.
 This parameter can be used to set compensation frequency, and reduce the slip to make the
synchronous speed when the motor runs in rated current, thereby to improve the accuracy of
the drive. When the drive output current is higher than Pr. 05-05 No-load Current of Induction
Motor 1 (A), the drive will compensate the frequency by this parameter.
 This parameter will be set to 1.00 automatically when the control method (Pr. 00-11) is changed
from V/F mode to vector mode. Please do the compensation of slip after loaded and
acceleration. The compensation value should be increased from small to big gradually. That is
to add the output frequency with motor rated slip  Pr. 07-27 Slip Compensation Gain when
the motor is at rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slower than expected, then increase the
setting value. Otherwise, decrease the setting value.
 Slip Deviation Level

Factory Setting: 0
0: No detection
 Detection Time of Slip Deviation
 Treatment of Slip Deviation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
3: No warning
 The Pr. 07-29 to Pr. 07-31 is to set allowable slip level / time and the over slip treatment when
the drive is running.
12.1-07-12
 Motor Shock Compensation Factor

Settings 0~10000
 If there are current wave motion of motor in some specific area, setting this parameter can
improve this situation effectively. (When running with high frequency or PG, it can be set to 0.
when the current wave motion occurs in low frequency and high-powered, please increase the
value of Pr. 07-32.)
 Return Time of Fault Restart

 When a reset / restart after fault occurs, the drive will regards Pr.07-33 as a time period and start
counting the number of faults occurred within this time period. Within the period, if the number of
faults occurred did not exceed the setting in Pr. 07-11, the counting will be cleared and starts
from 0 when next fault occurs.
OOB Sampling Time

Number of OOB Sampling Times

Factory Setting: 20
Settings 00~32
OOB Average Sampling Angle

Settings Read Only
 OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with PLC program in washing machine
system. Set Pr. 02-01~02-07 (Multi-function Input Command) to 82 “OOB loading balance
detection”, and receiving Pr. 07-48 (Average Sampling Angle) ∆θ value according to Pr. 07-46
(Sampling Time) and Pr. 07-47 (Number of Sampling Times) when the terminal is turned ON.
 PLC or Host controller determines the motor speed according to Pr. 07-48 Average Sampling
Angle ∆θ value. When Average Sampling Angle ∆θ value is large, the load is unbalanced. In this
case, PLC or host controller needs to reduce the frequency command. On the contrary,
high-speed operation can be executed.
 Related parameters: Pr. 02-01~Pr. 02-07 Multi-function Input Command.
 dEb Gain
Settings 0~65535
12.1-07-13

08 High-function PID Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
 Terminal Selection of PID Feedback

Factory Setting: 0
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction
(Pr. 10-16)
4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input (Pr. 03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback: by PG card pulse input, without direction (Pr. 10-16)
7: Negative PID feedback: by communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback: by communication protocol
 Negative feedback means: + target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
 Positive feedback means: - target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
 When Pr. 08-00 ≠ 7 neither ≠ 8, input value is disabled. The value of the setting remains the
same after the drive is off.
1. Common applications for PID control
 Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and performs accurate flow
control.
 Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and performs
precise pressure control.
 Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have
excellent air volume regulation.
 Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data
for comfortable temperature control.
 Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave
operation. Pr. 10-00 sets the PID set point source (target value).
2. PID control loop:
K p: Proportional gain(P) Ti : Integral time(I) Td: Deriv ative c ontrol(D) : O perator

3. Concept of PID control
Proportional gain (P):
The output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there will always be a
steady-state error.
12.1-08-1

Integral time (I):
The controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the
steady-state error, an “integral part” needs to be added to the controller. The integral time
decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by time
even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it
is 0. In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional gain control
and integral time control.
Differential control (D):
The controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During elimination
of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can be used to suppress
these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0, the differential control
should be 0. Proportional gain (P) + differential control (D) can be used to improve the system
state during PID adjustment.
4. When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:
Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The
pressure sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set
point and PID feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the
output by using proportional gain (P), integral time (I) and differential time (D) to control the
pump. It controls the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control
by using a 4-20 mA signal corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.
no fuse breaker
( NFB) water pump
R(L1) R(L1) U(T 1)

S(L2) S( L2) V(T2) IM
T(L3) T(L3)
3~
W(T 3)
throttle
F eedback 4-20mA
cor responds pressure
0-10bar sensor
ACI/A VI
(4- 20mA /0- 10V )
DC
ACM - +
analog si gnal common
 Pr. 00-04 is set to 10 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))
 Pr. 01-12 Acceleration Time will be set as required
 Pr. 01-13 Deceleration Time will be set as required
12.1-08-2

 Pr. 00-21 = 0 to operate from the digital keypad

 Pr. 00-20 = 0, the set point is controlled by the digital keypad
 Pr. 08-00 = 1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
 ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 set to 5, PID feedback signal.
 Pr. 08-01-08-03 will be set as required
If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr. 08-01 (Proportional Gain (P))
If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr. 08-02 (Integral Time (I))
If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr. 08-03 (Differential Time (D))
 Refer to Pr. 08-00 to 08-21 for PID parameters settings.
 Proportional Gain (P)

Settings 0.0~500.0
 When the setting is 1.0, it means Kp gain is 100 %; setting is 0.5, Kp gain means 50 %.
 It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster
response speed. But if the value is set too high, it may cause the system oscillation and
instability.
 If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.
 Integral Time (I)

 The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control
doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller
integral time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and
oscillation to make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The
integral control is often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.
 This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will
have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral
time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.
 When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.
 If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr. 08-02 will be disabled.
 Derivative Time (D)

 The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview
the change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve
system state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment
time. However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference. Please note that
too large differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change
and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change. Therefore, the differential
control can’t be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD
controller or PID controller.
12.1-08-3

 This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error
change. The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease
the oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system
oscillation.
 The differential controller acts for the change of error and can’t reduce the interference. It is not
recommended to use this function in the serious interference.
 Upper Limit of Integral Control

 This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency. The formula is:
Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00) x (Pr. 08-04 %)
 Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it
may cause motor stall or machine damage.
 PID Output Command Limit (Positive Limit)

 This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr. 01-00) × Pr. 08-05 %.
 PID Feedback Value by Communication Protocol

Settings -200.00 %~200.00 %
 When PID feedback input is set as communication (Pr. 08-00 = 7 or 8), PID feedback value can
be set by this value.
 PID Delay Time

PID Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
 When setting is 0, it uses conventional PID control structure.
 When setting is 1, proportional gain, integral gain and derivative gain are independent. The P, I
and D can be customized to fit users’ demand.
 Pr. 08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the response rate of drive.
 Output frequency of PID control will filter by primary low pass function. This function could filter a
mix frequency. A long primary low pass time means filter degree is high and vice versa.
 Inappropriate setting of delay time may cause system error.
12.1-08-4

 PI Control:
Controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control
is utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the
constant external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the
responding toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system
that possesses the integral components.
 PD Control:
When deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load that is
greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of the
deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the
P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P action’s vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with
loading of no brake functions over the processes.
 PID Control:
Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration, thereafter,
combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could obtain a
control Process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
Serial connection
PID Canc elled

Input Selec tion of the 08-00=0
PID Target Value F requenc y
or 02-01~06=21(dis able) c ommand
00-20: KPMS-LE01/ 08-00=0
RS-485 1
03-00~02=4 PID 2 08-00 ≠0
target v alue PID
C om pensation
Selection PID D elay Tim e
08-16
08-07
+ P D + +
Proportion Differential
gain Time
Dis play of the PID feedbac k
00-04 =10 dis play of the
- 08-01 08-03 +
PID feedbac k P ID
d i re c ti o n
I 08-21 08-05
PID F req.
08-02
08-04 output
Input Selec tion Integral upper limit
of the PID F eedbac k limit
Time for Integral
08-00: AVI / ACI / PG
08-09 Treatment of the F eedbac k Signal F ault
If Hz > 08-05 time ov er 08-08
12.1-08-5

Parallel connection
Input Selection of the

PID Target Value
00-20: KPMS-LE01 / R S-485
03-00~ 02 = 4 PID target value
PID C ancelled 08-00= 0 F requency
or 02-01~ 06= 21( disable) command
08-00=0
1
2
08-00 ≠0
P
Proportion gain
PID
compensation
+
PID Delay Time
08-07
08-01 selection
08- 16
+ D
D ifferential
+ +
T ime
- 08-03 + 08-05
D isplay of the PID feedback
I
00-04= 10 display of the
PID feedback
08-21
PID F r eq.
08-02 output
Input Selection Integr al 08-04 command limit
of the PID F eedback T ime upper limit
08-00: AVI / AC I / PG for Integr al
08-09
T reatment of the F eedback Signal F ault
If H z > 08- 05, time over 08- 08
 Feedback Signal Detection Time

 Pr. 08-08 is valid only for ACI 4-20 mA.
 This parameter sets the detection time of abnormal PID signal feedback. If detection time is set
to 0.0, detection function is disabled.
 Feedback Signal Fault Treatment

Factory Setting: 0
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
 This parameter is valid only for ACI 4-20 mA.
 AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals analog PID feedback is abnormal.
 Sleep Frequency
 Setting value of Pr. 08-10 determines if sleep reference and wake-up reference is enable or
disable. When Pr. 08-10 = 0, it means disable. When Pr. 08-10 ≠ 0, it means enable.
12.1-08-6

 Wake-up Frequency
 When Pr. 08-18 = 0, the unit of Pr. 08-10 and that of Pr. 08-11 become frequency. The settings
then become to 0 ~ 599.00 Hz.
 When Pr. 08-18 = 1, the unit of Pr.08-10 and that of Pr. 08-11 switch to percentage. The settings
then switch to 0~200.00 %.
 And the percentage is based on the input command value not the maximum. E.g. If the maximum
value is 100 Kg, the current value is 30 kg, if Pr. 08-11 = 40 %, the value is 12 kg.
 Pr. 08-10 is according to the same logic for calculation.
 Sleep Time
 When the frequency command is smaller than the sleep frequency and less than the sleep time,
the frequency command is equal to the sleep frequency. However the frequency command
remains at 0.00 Hz until the frequency command becomes equal to or bigger than the wake-up
frequency.
 PID Deviation Level

Settings 1.0~50.0 %
 PID Deviation Time
 Filter Time for PID Feedback
 When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to
the target value.
 Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr. 08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr. 08-14
setting, it will be judged as the PID control fault. Multiple-function output MO = 15 (PID feedback
error) will activate.
 PID Compensation Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Parameter setting
1: Analog input
 Pr. 08-16 = 0: PID compensation value is given via Pr. 08-17 setting.
12.1-08-7

 PID Compensation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0 ~ +100.0 %
 The PID compensation value = Max. PID target value × Pr. 08-17. For example, the max. output
frequency Pr. 01-00 = 60 Hz, Pr. 08-17 = 10.0 %, PID compensation value will increase output
frequency 6.00 Hz. 60.00 Hz × 100.00 % × 10.0 % = 6.00 Hz
Setting of Sleep Mode Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Refer to PID output command
1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 When Pr. 08-18 = 0, the unit of Pr. 08-10 and that of Pr. 08-11 becomes frequency. The settings
then become 0.00~599.00 Hz.
 When Pr. 08-18 = 1, the unit of Pr. 08-10 and that of Pr. 08-11 switches to percentage. The
settings then switch to 0~200.00 %.
 Wake-up Integral Limit

 The wake-up integral limit of drive is to prevent sudden high speed running when drive wakes up.
 The wake-up integral frequency limit = (01-00 × 08-19 %)
 The Pr. 08-19 is used to reduce the reaction time from sleep to wake-up.
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Operation direction can be changed
1: Operation direction cannot be changed
 Wakeup Delay Time
 Refer to Pr. 08-18 for more information.
 PID Control Flag

Factory Setting: 2
Settings bit 0 = 1, PID reverse running must follow the setting of Pr. 00-23
bit 0 = 0, PID reverse running refers to PID’s calculated value
 bit 0, When Pr. 08-21 = 1, PID reverse running is enable.
 bit 0 = 0, if the PID calculated value is positive, it will be forward running. If the PID calculated
value is negative, it will be reverse running.
 When the setting of bit 1 changes, Kp gain will not change. For example: Kp = 6, when Pr. 08-23
bit 1 = 0, Kp = 6.0; when Pr. 08-23 bit 1 = 1, Kp = 6.00.
12.1-08-8

There are three scenarios for sleep and wake-up frequency.

1) Frequency Command (PID is not in use, Pr. 08-00 = 0. Only works in VF mode)
When the output frequency ≤ the sleep frequency, and the drive reaches the preset sleep
time, then drive will be at the sleep mode. When the frequency command reaches the wake-up
frequency, the drive will start to count the wake-up delay time. Then when drive reaches the
wake-up delay time, the drive will begin acceleration time to reach the frequency command.
Frequency command
Actual output frequency
Frequency
Pr. 08-11
Command Actual Output Frequency
Wake -up
Reference Point
Pr. 08-10
Sleep
Reference Point
Pr. 08-12 0 Hz Pr. 08-22

Wake-up
Sleep Time Delay
Time
2) Frequency Command Calculation of the Internal PID

When the PID calculation reaches the sleep frequency, the drive will start to count the sleep
time and the output frequency will start to decrease. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, it
will directly go to sleep mode which is 0 Hz. But if the drive doesn’t reach the sleep time, it will
remain at the lower limit (if there is a preset of lower limit.). Or it will remain at the lowest output
frequency set at Pr. 01-07 and wait to reach the sleep time then go to sleep mode (0 Hz).
When the calculated frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the drive will start
to count the wake-up delay time. Once reaching the wake-up delay time, the drive will start the
acceleration time to reach the PID frequency command.
12.1-08-9

3) PID Feedback Rate Percentage (Use PID, Pr. 08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr. 08-18 = 1)
When the PID feedback rate reaches the sleep level percentage, the drive starts to count the
sleep time. The output frequency will also decrease. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep time, it
will go to sleep mode which is 0 Hz. But if the drive doesn’t reach the sleep time, it will remain at
the lower limit (if there is a preset of lower limit.). Or it will remain at the lowest output frequency
set at Pr. 01-07 and wait to reach the sleep time then go to sleep mode (0 Hz).
When PID feedback value reaches the wake up percentage the motor drive will start to count
the wake up delay time. Once reaches the wake up delay time, the motor drives starts the
accelerating time to reach PID frequency command
 PID Output Command Limit (Reverse Limit)

 When PID enables reverse, PID output amount is negative value, and the output amount of PID
will be limited by the setting of Pr. 08-26. Need to use with Pr. 08-21.
 Acceleration / deceleration time of PID command

Factory Setting：0.00
 When Pr. 08-27 is setting to 0.00 sec., there is no command of PID acceleration / deceleration,
the target value is equal to PID command. When the settings is not equal to 0.00 sec., the
command of PID acceleration / deceleration is active, the acceleration and deceleration of PID
is that when PID target value change, the command value increment / decrement is according
to this parameter.
12.1-08-10

 For example, if we set the parameter to 10.00 sec. , when PID target value change from 0 % to
100 %, it needs to take 10 sec. for PID command from 0 % to 100 %; the same situation when
target value change from 100 % to 0 %, it also needs to take 10 sec. for PID command from
100 % to 0 %.
Selection of frequency base corresponding to 100.00 % PID

Factory Setting：0
Settings 0: PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to max. output frequency
(Pr. 01-00)
1: PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to the input value of auxiliary
frequency
 This parameter is valid when auxiliary and master frequency function opens.
When Pr. 08-29 = 0, PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to the max. output frequency;
When Pr. 08-29 = 1, PID control output 100.00 % corresponding to the input value of auxiliary
frequency (If the auxiliary frequency changes, PID output frequency is also followed changes
together.)
12.1-08-11

09 Communication Parameters  The parameter can be set during the operation.

8 1
Modbus RS- 485
When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7,8: Reserv ed
connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND
Delta IFD6530 or IFD 6500. Pin 4: SG-
RS-485 Pin 5: SG+
 Communication Address
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~254
 If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address
for this drive must be set via this parameter and each AC motor drive’s communication address
must be different.
 COM1 Transmission Speed

Settings 4.8~115.2 Kbps
 This parameter is for setting up the transmission speed of computer and the drive.
 Please set 4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps, 57.6 Kbps, or 115.2 Kbps. Otherwise the
transmission speed will be replaced by 9.6 Kbps.
 COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment

Factory Setting: 3
3: No warning and continue operation
 This parameter is to set the reaction of MODBUS transmission errors with the host. Detection
time can be set in Pr. 09-03.
 COM1 Time-out Detection

 It is used to set the communication transmission time-out.
 COM1 Communication Protocol

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
12.1-09-1

9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
 Control by PC (Computer Link)
 When using RS-485 serial communication interface, each drive must be pre-specified its
communication address in Pr. 09-00, the computer can implement control according to their
individual address.
 MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in
ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
Communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0” … “9”, “A” … “F”, every 16 hexadecimal
represent ASCII code. For example:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):

(7, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
(7, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
12.1-09-2

(7, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For RTU):
(8, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
(8, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
(8, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
3. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame

ASCII mode :
STX Start character = ‘ : ’ (3AH)
Address Hi Communication address:
Address Lo 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Hi Command code:
Function Lo 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
……. N x 8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
N ≤ 16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes (20 sets of data)
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum:
LRC CHK Lo 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
END Hi End characters:
END Lo END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF (0AH)
12.1-09-3

RTU mode:
START A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
Contents of data:
…….
N × 8-bit data, n ≤16
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check sum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Communication Address (Address)

00H: broadcast to all AC motor drives
01H: AC motor drive of address 01
0FH: AC motor drive of address 15
10H: AC motor drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC motor drive of address 254
Function code (Function) and DATA (Data characters)

03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of register ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting register
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ register 2102H ‘7’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of register 2103H
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
12.1-09-4

RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of register
Starting data register 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of register 00H Content of register 17H
(count by world) 02H address 2102H 70H
CRC CHK Low 6FH Content of register 00H
CRC CHK High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH
06H: single write, write single data to register.

Example: writing data 6000 (1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Target register Target register
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Register content Register content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
00H 00H
17H 17H
Register content Register content
70H 70H
CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H
10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers) (at most 20 sets of data can be
written simultaneously)
Example: Set the multi-stage speed of AC motor drive (address is 01H):
Pr. 04-00 = 50.00 (1388H), Pr. 04-01 = 40.00 (0FA0H)
12.1-09-5

ASCII Mode
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘5’ ‘5’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of register ‘0’ Number of register ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘E’
LRC Check
(count by Byte) ‘4’ ‘8’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message:
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 1 10H
05H 05H
00H 00H
Number of register 00H Number of register 00H
(Count by word) 02H (Count by word) 02H
Quantity of data (Byte) 04 CRC Check Low 41H
13H CRC Check High 04H
The first data content
88H
0FH
The second data content
A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’
Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256 and the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of
the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example:
01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
12.1-09-6

RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the
16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to
the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value
A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a
complete 8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this
until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC
value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of
the CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data  a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length  the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc; // return register CRC
12.1-09-7

4. Address list
Content Register Function
AC motor drive GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
GGnnH
parameters example, the address of Pr. 04-01 is 0401H.
Command write only 2000H bit 1~0 00B: No function
01B: Stop
10B: Run
11B: JOG + RUN
bit 3~2 Reserved
bit 5~4 00B: No function
01B: FWD
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
bit 7~6 00B: 1st accel. / decel.
01B: 2nd accel. / decel.
10B: 3rd accel. / decel.
11B: 4th accel. / decel.
bit 11~8 000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st Stage speed frequency
0010B: 2nd Stage speed frequency
0011B: 3rd Stage speed frequency
0100B: 4th Stage speed frequency
bit 12 1: Enable bit 06-11 function
bit 14~13 00B: No function
01B: Operated by digital keypad
10B: Operated by Pr. 00-21 setting
11B: Change operation source
bit 15 Reserved
2001H Frequency command(XXX.XX Hz)
2002H bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on
bit 1 1: Reset
bit 2 1: B.B ON
bit 15~3 Reserved
Status monitor read High byte: Warn code
2100H
only Low Byte: Error code
2101H AC motor drive operation status
bit 1~0
00B: Drive stops
01B: Drive decelerating
10B: Drive standby
11B: Drive operating
bit 2 1: JOG command
bit 4~3 Operation direction
00B: FWD run
01B: From REV run to FWD run
10B: REV run
11B: From FWD run to REV run
12.1-09-8


1: Master frequency controlled by communication
bit 8
interface
bit 9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
bit 10
communication interface
bit 11 1: Parameter locked
bit 12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad
bit 15~13 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
2103H Output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
Output current (XX.XX A). When current is higher than 655.35,
2104H it will shift decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High
byte of 211F.
2105H DC-BUS voltage (XXX.X V)
2106H Output voltage (XXX.X V)
2107H Current step number of multi-stage speed operation
2108H Reserved
2109H Counter value
210AH Power factor angle (XXX.X)
210BH Output torque (XXX.X %)
210CH Actual motor speed (XXXXX rpm)
210DH Number of PG feedback pulses (0~65535)
210EH Number of PG2 pulse commands (0~65535)
210FH Power output (X.XXX KWH)
2116H Multi-function display (Pr. 00-04)
Max. operation frequency (Pr. 01-00) or Max. user defined
value (Pr. 00-26)
When Pr. 00-26 is 0, this value is equal to Pr. 01-00 setting
211BH When Pr. 00-26 is not 0, and the command source is Keypad,
this value = Pr. 00-24 * Pr. 00-26 / Pr. 01-00
When Pr. 00-26 is not 0, and the command source is 485, this
value = Pr. 09-10 * Pr. 00-26 / Pr. 01-00
211FH High byte: decimal of current value (display)
Display output current (A). When current is higher than 655.35,
2200H it will shift decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High
byte of 211F.
2201H Display counter value (c)
2202H Actual output frequency (XXXXX Hz)
2203H DC-BUS voltage (XXX.X V)
2204H Output voltage (XXX.X V)
2205H Power angle (XXX.X)
2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (XXXXX kW)
Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder
2207H
feedback (XXXXX rpm)
Display positive / negative output torque in %, estimated by the
2208H
drive (t0.0: positive torque, -0.0: negative torque) (XXX.X %)
2209H Display PG feedback (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 1)
220AH PID feedback value after enabling PID function (XXX.XX %)
220BH Reserved
Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4-V20 mA / 0-10 V
220CH
corresponds to 0.00~100.00% (2.) (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 2)
220DH Reserved
220EH IGBT temperature of drive power module (XXX.X °C)
220FH The temperature of capacitance (XXX.X °C)
The status of digital input (ON / OFF), refer to Pr. 02-12
2210H
(as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 3)
12.1-09-9


The status of digital output (ON / OFF), refer to Pr. 02-18
2211H
(as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 4)
2212H The multi-step speed that is executing (S)
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.)
2213H
(as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 3)
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.)
2214H
(as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 4)
Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (P.) it will
2215H start from 9 when the actual operation direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0. Max. is 65535
2216H Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (XXX.XX Hz)
Pulse input position (PG card PG2), maximum setting is
2217H
65535.
2218H Position command tracing error
2219H Display times of counter overload (XXX.XX %)
221AH GFF (XXX.XX %)
221BH DCbus voltage ripples (XXX.X V)
221CH PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor
221EH User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH Output Value of Pr. 00-05 (XXX.XX Hz)
Number of motor turns when drive operates (keeping when
2220H
drive stops, and reset to zero when operation)
Operation position of motor (keeping when drive stops, and
2221H
reset to zero when operation)
2222H Fan speed of the drive (XXX %)
2223H Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode 1: torque mode
2224H Carrier frequency of the drive (XX KHZ)
2225H Reserved
Drive status
bit 1~0 00b: No direction
01b: Forward
10b: Reverse
bit 3~2 01b: Driver ready
2226H
10b: Error
bit 4 0b: Motor drive did not output
1b: Motor drive did output
bit 5 0b: No alarm
1b: Have Alarm
Drive’s estimated output torque (positive or negative direction)
2227H
(XXXX Nt-m)
2228H Torque command (XXX.X %)
2229H KWH display (XXXX.X)
222AH MI7pulse input in Low Word
222BH MI7 pulse input in High Word
222CH Motor actual position in Low Word
222DH Motor actual position in High Word
222EH PID reference (XXX.XX %)
222FH PID offset (XXX.XX %)
2230H PID output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
2231H Hardware ID
2232H Display auxiliary frequency
2233H Display master frequency
Display frequency after addition and subtraction of auxiliary
2234H
and master frequency
12.1-09-10

5. Exception response:
When drive is doing communication connection, if an error occurs drive will respond the error
code and set the highest bit (bit 7) of code to 1 (function code AND 80H) then response to control
system to know that an error occurred.
If keypad displays “CE-XX” as a warning message, “XX” is the error code at that time. Please
refer to the meaning of error code in communication error for reference.
Example:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC CHK
‘7’
CR
END
LF
The explanation of exception codes:

Exception code Explanation
1 Function code is not supported or unrecognized.
2 Address is not supported or unrecognized.
3 Data is not correct or unrecognized.
4 Fail to execute this function code
 Delay Time of Communication Response

Settings 0.0~200.0 ms
 This parameter is the response delay time after AC motor drive receives communication
command as shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
PC or PLC command Response Message
of the AC Drive
Handling time Response Delay Time
of the AC drive Pr.09-09
Main Frequency of the Communication

 When Pr. 00-20 is set to 1 (RS-485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr. 09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After
reboots the power, it will regard the frequency set in Pr. 09-10 if no new frequency command is
inputted. When frequency command of 485 is changed (the source of frequency command
needs to be set as MODBUS), this parameter is also be changed.
12.1-09-11

 Block Transfer 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
 There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr. 09-11 to
Pr. 09-26). Through communication code 03H, user can use them (Pr. 09-11 to Pr. 09-26) to
save those parameters that you want to read.
Communication Decoding Method

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Decoding method 1
1: Decoding method 2
Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2

Digital Keypad Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
External Terminal External terminal controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Source of
RS-485 Refer to address: 2000h~20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
Operation
CANopen Refer to index: 2020-01h~2020-FFh Refer to index:2060-01h ~ 2060-FFh
Control
Communication Card Refer to address: 2000h ~ 20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
PLC PLC commands the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
 PLC Command Force to 0

Factory Setting：0
Setting 0~65535
 It defines the action that before PLC scans time sequence, the frequency command or speed
command needs to be cleared as 0 or not.
bit Explanation
bit 0 Before PLC scan, set up PLC target frequency = 0
bit 1 Before PLC scan, set up the PLC target torque = 0
bit 2 Before PLC scan, set up the speed limit of torque control mode = 0
12.1-09-12

PLC Address
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 1~254
CANopen Slave Address
Factory Setting: 0
0: Disable
Settings
1~127
CANopen Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 1 Mbps
1: 500 kbps
2: 250 kbps
3: 125 kbps
4: 100 kbps (Delta only)
5: 50 kbps
CANopen Warning Record
Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0: CANopen software disconnection 1 (CANopen Guarding Time out)
bit 1: CANopen software disconnection 2 (CANopen Heartbeat Time out)
bit 3: CANopen SDO time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: CANopen hardware disconnection warning (Can Bus Off)
bit 6: Error protocol of CANOPEN
CANopen Decoding Method
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Delta defined decoding method
1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol
CANopen Communication Status
Settings 0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
12.1-09-13

CANopen Control Status

Settings 0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Error reaction activation state
14: Error state
CANopen Reset Index
Settings bit 0: CANopen reset, the internal address 20XX is 0
bit 1: CANopen reset, the internal address 264X is 0
bit 2: CANopen reset, the internal address 26AX is 0
Identifications for Communication Card
Factory Setting: ##
Settings 0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
10: Backup Power Supply
Firmware Version of Communication Card
Product Code
Error code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings Read only
 Address of Communication Card
Factory Setting: 1
Settings DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
 Setting of DeviceNet Speed
Factory Setting: 2
Settings Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125 Kbps
1: 250 Kbps
2: 500 Kbps
3: 1 Mbps (Delta Only)
12.1-09-14

Non standard DeviceNet: (Delta only)

0: 10 Kbps
1: 20 Kbps
2: 50 Kbps
3: 100 Kbps
4: 125 Kbps
5: 250 Kbps
6: 500 Kbps
7: 800 Kbps
8: 1 Mbps
 Other Setting of DeviceNet Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
In this mode, baud rate can only be 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 500 Kbps,
1 Mbps in standard DeviceNet speed
1: Enable
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be same as CANopen (0-8).
 It needs to use with Pr. 09-71.
 Setting 0: the baud rate can only be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3.
 Setting 1: setting of DeviceNet communication rate can be the same as CANopen (setting 0-8).
 IP Configuration of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Static IP
1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
 Setting 0: it needs to set IP address manually.
 Setting 1: IP address will be auto set by host controller.
 IP Address 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
 Pr. 09-76~09-79 should be used with communication card.
 Address Mask 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
12.1-09-15

 Getway Address 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
 Password for Communication Card (Low word)
 Password for Communication Card (High word)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~99
 Reset Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Reset, return to factory setting
 Additional Setting for Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0: Enable IP filter
bit 1: Internet parameters enable (1 bit)
When IP address is set up, this bit will be enabled. After updating the
parameters of communication card, this bit will change to disable.
bit 2: Login password enable (1 bit)
When enter login password, this bit will be enabled. After updating the
parameters of communication card, this bit will change to disable.
Status of Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0: Password enable
When the communication card is set with password, this bit is enabled.
When the password is clear, this bit will be disabled.
12.1-09-16

10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters

 This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the
abbreviation for Pulse Generator.
Encoder Type Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disabled
5. Pulse input (MI7)
 If you use MI7 single-phase pulse input function, you only can choose one of them: Encoder
input type (Pr. 10-02) or Pulse input type setting (Pr. 10-16).When you set speed feedback
function, pulse command can NOT be set, it needs to cancel the speed feedback function first
thus you can set the pulse command function. Speed feedback function should be used with
Pr. 10-02 = 5 (single-phase input (MI7)), drive will calculate MI7 single-phase pulse input speed
when control modes are VF, VFPG and SVC. In addition if MI7 single-phase pulse input is using
for speed feedback of close loop control, it only can use in VFPG close loop control mode.
Encoder Pulse Per Round

Settings 1~20000
 This parameter can set the encoder pulse per revolution (PPR). It is defined as a feedback
control signal source when using PG , the encoder must set the pulse number for motor rotating
a circle, it means the pulse number generated by A / B phase cycle.
 This setting is also the encoder resolution. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be
more accurate.
 If this parameter is setting error, it will cause motor stall, drive overcurrent, or magnetic pole
origin detection error of PM motor in closed loop control. When using PM motor, the pole zero
point detection (Pr. 05-00 = 13) must be done again if the content of this parameter is modified.
Encoder Input Type Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
 Electrical Gear at Load Side A1

 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
 Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
Settings 1~65535
 Pr. 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch to
Pr. 10-04~10-05 or Pr. 10-06~10-07, shown as follows.
12.1-10-1

Drive
PG
card
G ear G ear Motor

Load
A 1 or A 2 B 1 or B 2
E ncoder is used
at load side G ear ratio
MI = 48 O N = A 2 :B 2
O FF = A 1 :B 1
 Treatment for Encoder Feedback Fault

Factory Setting: 2
 Detection Time of Encoder Feedback Fault
Settings 0.0~10.0 sec. (0: No function)
 When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time
exceeds the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr. 10-09), the encoder signal error will
occur. Refer to Pr. 10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
 When speed controller signal is abnormal, if time exceeds the detection time for encoder speed
controller fault (Pr. 10-09), the feedback fault will occur. Refer to Pr. 10-08 for encoder feedback
fault treatment.
 Encoder Stall Level

Settings 0~120 % (0: No function)
 This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(Max. output frequency Pr. 01-00 = 100 %)
 Detection Time of Encoder Stall

 Treatment for Encoder Stall
Factory Setting: 2
 When drive output frequency exceeds encoder stall level (Pr. 10-10), it will start to accumulate
time, when the error time exceeds detection time of encoder stall (Pr. 10-11), it will start to
implement treatment for encoder stall, please refer to the settings of this parameter for detail.
12.1-10-2
 Encoder Slip Range

Factory Setting: 50
Settings 0~50 % (0: No function)
 Detection Time of Encoder Slip
 Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error
Factory Setting: 2
 Action principle of Pr. 10-13~Pr. 10-15:
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr. 10-13 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr. 10-14; it will start to accumulate time. If detection time exceeds Pr. 10-14, the
encoder feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr. 10-15 encoder stall and slip error
treatment.
 Pulse Input Type Setting

Factory Setting: 0
 When this setting is different from Pr. 10-02 setting and the source of the frequency command is
pulse input (Pr. 00-20 is set to 5), it will cause 4 times frequency problem.
Example: Assume that Pr. 10-01 = 1024, Pr. 10-02 = 1, Pr. 10-16 = 3, Pr. 00-20 = 5, MI = 37 and
ON, the pulse needed to rotate the motor a revolution is 4096.
 Assume that Pr. 10-01 = 1024, Pr. 10-02 = 1, Pr. 10-16 = 1, Pr. 00-20 = 5, MI = 37 and ON, the
pulse needed to rotate the motor a revolution is 1024.
 Electrical Gear A
 Electrical Gear B
Settings 1~65535
 Rotation speed = pulse frequency / encoder pulse (Pr. 10-01) * Electrical Gear A / Electrical
Gear B.
 PG2 Pulse Input Speed Command Filter Time

 When Pr. 00-20 is set to 5 and multi-function input terminal is set to 37 (OFF), the pulse
command will be regarded as frequency command. This parameter can be used to suppress the
jump of speed command.
12.1-10-3

PG2 Pulse Input Speed Command Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Electronic frequency
1: Mechanical frequency (base on pole pair)
 Top Limit of Frequency Deviation
 This parameter can limit the maximum of frequency deviation.
 When this parameter is set too large, abnormal feedback malfunction will occur.
 If the application needs higher setting of Pr. 10-29, please note that: Higher setting of Pr. 10-29
value will result in larger motor slip, which will cause PG Error (PGF3, PGF4) easily. In this case,
setting Pr. 10-10 and Pr. 10-13 as 0 will disable PGF3 and PGF4 detection, but must make sure
the MI7 wiring and application is correct. Otherwise it may lose the instant PG protection. Too
High Pr. 10-29 setting is not a common setting.
 I/F Mode, Current Command

Factory Setting: 40
Settings 0~150 % rated current of motor
 The parameter is the current command of the drive in low-speed area (low-speed area: frequency
command < Pr. 10-39). When it is stalling on heavy duty start-up or forward / reverse with load,
adjust the parameter (increase). If inrush current is too high to cause oc stall, then decrease it.
 PM FOC Sensorless Speed Estimator Bandwidth

 The parameter is speed estimator bandwidth. Adjust the parameter will influence the stability and
the accuracy of speed for motor.
 If there is low frequency vibrates (the waveform is similar to sin wave) during the process, then
increase the bandwidth. If there is high frequency vibrates (the waveform vibrates extremely and
is like spur), then decrease the bandwidth.
 PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain

Settings 0.00~655.35
 Adjust the parameter will influence the response speed of speed estimator.
increase the gain. If there is high frequency vibrates (the waveform vibrates extremely and is like
spur), then decrease the gain.
12.1-10-4
 Frequency Point when Switch from I/F Mode to PM Sensorless Mode

 The parameter is the switch point which is from low frequency to high frequency.
 If the switch point is too low, motor will not generate enough back emf to let the speed estimator
measure the right position and speed of rotator, and cause stall and oc when the frequency of
switch point is running.
 If the switch point is too high, the active area of I/F will be too wide, which will generate larger
current and cannot save energy. (The reason is that if the current of Pr. 10-31 sets too high, and
the high switch point will make the drive keeps outputting with the setting value of Pr. 10-31).
 Frequency Point when Switch from PM Sensorless Mode to I/F Mode

 The parameter is the switch point which is from high frequency to low frequency.
 If the switch point is too low, motor will not generate enough back emf to let the speed estimator
measure the right position and speed of rotator when the frequency of switch point is running.
the high switch point will make the drive keeps outputting with the setting value of Pr. 10-31)
 Initial Angle Detection Pulse Value

Settings 0.0~3.0
 The angle detection is fixed to 3: Use the pulse injection method to start. The parameter
influences the value of pulse during the angle detection. The larger the pulse is, the higher of
the accuracy of rotator’s position. But larger pulse might cause oc easily.
 Increase the parameter when the running direction and the command are opposite while
start-up. If oc occurs in the start-up moment, then decrease the parameter.
 Please refer to Chapter 12-2 Adjustment & Application for detailed motor adjustment procedure.
 Zero Voltage Time while Start Up

 This parameter is valid only when the setting of Pr. 07-12 (Speed tracking during start-up) = 0.
 When the motor is in static status at the startup, the accuracy to estimate angles will be
increased. In order to make the motor in “static status”, 3 phase of drive output 0V to motor to
reach this goal. Pr. 10-49 setting time is the length of time when 3 phase output 0V.
 It is possible that even when this parameter is being applied but the motor at the installation site
cannot go in to the “static status” caused by the inertia or by any external force. So, if the motor
doesn’t go into a complete “static status” in 0.2 sec., increase this setting value appropriately.
 If Pr. 10-49 sets too high, the start-up time will be longer obviously. If it is too low, then the
braking performance will be weak.
12.1-10-5

 Injection Frequency
Settings 0~1200 Hz
 This parameter is a high frequency injection command in PM SVC control mode, and usually it
doesn’t need to be adjusted. But if a motor’s rated frequency (i.e. 400 Hz) is too close to the
frequency setting of this parameter (i.e. factory setting 500 Hz), the accuracy of angles detected
will be affected. Therefore, refer to the setting of Pr. 01-01 before adjusting this parameter.
 If the setting value of Pr. 00-17 is lower than Pr. 10-51*10, then increase the frequency of carrier
wave.
 Pr. 10-51 is valid only when Pr. 10-53 = 2.
 Injection Magnitude
 The parameter is magnitude command of high frequency injection signal in PM SVC control
mode.
 Increasing the parameter can get more accurate estimated value of angle. But the noise of
electromagnetic might be louder if the setting value is too high.
 This parameter will be received when motor’s parameter is “Auto”. And this parameter will
influence the accuracy of angel‘s estimation.
 When the ratio of salient pole (Lq / Ld) is lower, increase Pr. 10-52 to make angle detection be
accurate.
 Position Detection Method

Factory Setting: 0
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
 It is suggested to set as “2” if it is IPM; set as “3” if it is SPM. If there is bad effect when set as
“2” or “3”, then set as “1”.
12.1-10-6
11 Advanced Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator.
System Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 3: Dead time compensation closed
bit 7: Selection to save or not save the frequency
 bit 7 = 0: frequency is saved before power turns off. When power turns ON again, the displayed
frequency will be the memorized frequency.
bit 7 = 1: frequency is not saved before power turns off. When power turns ON again, the
displayed frequency will be 0.00 Hz.
 ASR 1 Gain
Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~40 Hz (IM) / 1~100 Hz (PM)
 ASR 1 Integral Time
PWM Mode Selection
Factory Settings: 2
Settings 0: 2-phase
2: Space vector
 When setting is 2-phase mode, it can reduce the drive power components losses effectively and
provide better performance in the long wire applications.
 When setting is space vector mode, it can reduce the power loss and electromagnetic noise of
motor effectively.
 System Control Flag

Factory Settings: 0000
Settings 0000~FFFFh
bit No. Function Description

0 Reserved
0: FWD / REV cannot be controlled by Pr. 02-12 bit 0 & 1
1 FWD / REV action control
1: FWD / REV can be controlled by Pr. 02-12 bit 0 & 1
2~15 Reserved
12.1-11-1

13 Macro / User Define Macro

Application Selection
Factory Setting: 00
01: User parameter
02: Compressor
03: Fan
04: Pump
05: Conveyor
06: Machine tool
07: Packing
08: Textiles
 Note: After selecting the macro, some of default values will be adjusted automatically according
to the application selection.
 Group setting 02: Compressor
The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for compressor
settings.
00-11 Control of speed mode 0 (V/F control mode)
00-16 Load selection 0 (Normal load)
00-17 Carrier frequency Factory default setting
00-20 Source of the master frequency command (AUTO) 2 (External analog input)
00-21 Source of the operation command (AUTO) 1 (External terminals)
00-22 Stop method 0 (Ramp to stop)
00-23 Control of motor direction 1 (Disable reverse)
01-00 Max. operation frequency of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-07 Min. output frequency of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-08 Min. output voltage of motor 1 Factory default setting
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 20 (Hz)
01-12 Accel. time 1 20 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 20 (s)
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 0 (No function)
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1 (Frequency command)
05-01 Full-load current of induction motor 1 (A) Factory default setting
05-03 Rated speed of induction motor 1 (rpm) Factory default setting
05-04 Pole number of induction motor 1 Factory default setting
12.1-13-1
 Group setting 03: Fan

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for fan settings.

00-11 Control of speed mode 0 (VF)
00-22 Stop method 1 (Coast to stop)
00-30 Source of the master frequency command (HAND) 0 (Digital keypad)
00-31 Source of the operation command (HAND) 0 (Digital keypad)
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (Hz)
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35 (Hz)
01-12 Accel. time 1 15 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 15 (s)
01-43 V/F curve selection 2 (2nd V/F curve)
16 (Rotating speed command
02-05 Multi-function input command 5 (MI5)
from ACI)
02-16 Multi-function output 2 (MO1) 11 (Malfunction indication)
02-17 Multi-function output 3 (MO2) 1 (Indication during RUN)
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI) 1 (Frequency command)
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1 (Frequency command)
03-28 AVI terminal input selection 0 (0-10V)
03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1 (0-10V)
03-31 AFM output selection 0 (0-10V)
03-50 Analog input curve selection 1 (3 point curve of AVI)
2 (Speed tracking by minimum
07-06 Restart after momentary power loss
output frequency)
07-11 Restart times after fault 5 (times)
07-33 Return time of fault restart 60 (s)
12.1-13-2
 Group setting 04: Pump

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for pump settings.

01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (HZ)
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35 (HZ)
01-12 Accel. time 1 15 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 15 (s)
01-43 V/F curve selection 2 (2nd V/F curve)
2 (Speed tracking by minimum
07-06 Restart after momentary power loss
output frequency)
07-11 Restart times after fault 5 (times)
07-33 Return Time of Fault Restart 60 (s)
 Group setting 05: Conveyor

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for conveyor
settings.

12.1-13-3

01-12 Accel. time 1 10 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 10 (s)
 Group setting 06: Machine tool

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for machine tool
settings.

01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 0
01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1 0
01-05 Mid-point frequency 2 of motor 1 0
01-06 Mid-point voltage 2 of motor 1 0
01-12 Accel. time 1 5 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 5 (s)
01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1 0
01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2 0
01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 0
01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 0
02-03 Multi-function input command 3 (MI3) 1 (Multi-stage speed command 1)
02-04 Multi-function input command 4 (MI4) 2 (Multi-stage speed command 2)
02-13 Multi-function output 1 RY1 11 (Malfunction indication)
02-16 Multi-function output 2 (MO1) 1 (Indication during RUN)
02-17 Multi-function output 3 (MO2) 2 (Operation speed attained)
06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention 0 (Disabled)
12.1-13-4
06-03 Over-current stall prevention during acceleration 0 (Disabled)

06-04 Over-current stall prevention during operation 0 (Disabled)
Accel. / Decel. time selection of stall prevention at
06-05 0 (By current accel. / decel. time)
constant speed
07-01 DC brake current level 20 (%)
07-03 DC brake time at stop 0.3 (s)
07-04 DC brake start frequency 0 (Hz)
07-23 Auto voltage regulation (AVR) function 1 (Disable AVR)
 Group setting 07: Packing

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for packing settings.

00-20 Source of the master frequency command (AUTO) 0 (Digital keypad)
00-21 Source of the operation command (AUTO) 2 (Communication RS-485 input)
1: 2-wire mode 1, power on for
02-00 2-wire / 3-wire operation control operation control (M1: FWD /
STOP, M2: REV / STOP)
01-12 Accel. time 1 10 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 10 (s)
01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1 Factory default setting
01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2 Factory default setting
01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 Factory default setting
01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 Factory default setting
03-28 AVI terminal input selection Factory default setting
12.1-13-5
 Group setting 08: Textiles

The following table of contents is the relevant application parameters used for textiles settings.

Source of the master frequency command
00-20 1 (Communication RS-485 input)
(AUTO)
01-12 Accel. time 1 10 (s)
01-13 Decel. time 1 10 (s)
01-24 S-curve acceleration begin time 1 0.2 (s)
01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2 0.2 (s)
01-26 S-curve deceleration begin time 1 0.2 (s)
01-27 S-curve deceleration arrival time 2 0.2 (s)
06-03 Over-current stall prevention during acceleration 180 (%)
06-04 Over-current stall prevention during operation 180 (%)
06-07 Over-torque detection level (motor 1) 200 (%)
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the
07-19 Fan cooling control fan is ON. When the AC motor
drive stops, the fan is OFF
~ Application Parameters (User Defined)
12.1-13-6
14 Protection Parameters (2) This parameter can be set during operation.
Output Frequency at Malfunction 2

 When error occurs, user can check output frequency at malfunction. If the error happens again,
this parameter will cover previous record.
DC Voltage at Malfunction 2
 When error occurs, user can check DC voltage at malfunction. If the error happens again, this
parameter will cover previous record.
Output Current at Malfunction 2

Settings 0.00~655.35 Amp
 When error occurs, user can check output current at malfunction. If the error happens again,
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction 2

o
Settings -3276.7~3276.7 C
 When error occurs, user can check IGBT temperature at malfunction. If the error happens again,
12.1-14-1
Fault Record 7
Fault Record 8
Fault Record 9
Fault Record 10
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
18: TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error ( tH1o)
12.1-14-2

48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
106: CANopen station number setting error (CAdE)
12.1-14-3

143: Auto tuning error 2 (High frequency test stage) (AUE2)
144: Auto tuning error 3 (Rotary test stage) (AUE3)
 As long as the fault is forced to stop, it will be recorded.
 Low voltage (Lv) when stopped (LvS warning, no record). Low voltage (Lv) when operation (LvA,
Lvd, Lvn error, it will be recorded).
 When dEb function is effective and enable, drive will start the dEb function and also record the
error code 62 to Pr. 06-17~06-22, Pr. 14-70~14-73 at same time.

Factory Setting: 0
operation
 When Pr. 14-74 and Pr. 14-77 setting are 1 or 3, there will have a warning message but no error
record.
 When Pr. 14-74 and Pr.14-77 setting are 2 or 4, there will have an error message and error
record.

Settings 10~250 % (100 % corresponds to the rated current of the drive)
 When the output current exceeds over-torque detection level (Pr. 14-75 / Pr.14-78) and over-
torque detection time (Pr. 14-76 / Pr. 14-79), the over-torque detection will follow Pr. 14-74 or
Pr. 14-77 setting.
 When Pr. 14-74 or Pr. 14-77 setting is 1 or 3, drive will display ot3 / ot4 warning when
over-torque detection but drive is still continuous operation, until the output current is less than
5 % of over-torque detection, the warning message will be relieved.
12.1-14-4
Output current
Over-torque
detection level
14-75 (14-78)
14-75 (14-78)*95 %
Multi-function
output terminal
= 73 or 74
Over-torque
detection time
14-76 (14-79)
 When Pr. 14-74 or Pr. 14-77 setting is 2 or 4, drive will display ot3 / ot4 error when over-torque
detection and drive will stop operation, it will operate by manual reset.
Over-torque
detection level
Manual reset
14-75 (14-78)
Output current
Manual reset
Multi-function
output terminal
= 73 or 74
Over-torque
detection time
14-76 (14-79)

Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft)
2: Disabled
 In order to prevent the self-cooling motor occurs motor overheating during low speed operation,
users can set the electronic thermal relay to limit the drive output power allowable.
 The setting 0 is suitable for inverter motor (with external forced cooling). There is no obvious
correlation between the heat dissipation capability and speed of motor, so the low speed
electronic thermal relay is fixed, it can ensure that the load capacity of the motor at low speed.
 The setting 1 is suitable for standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft). The cooling capacity of
motor is poor at low speed, so the electronic thermal relay action time will be appropriate to
reduce, it can ensure the life of the motor.
 When power ON/OFF uses frequently, the thermal relay protection will be reset when power
OFF, so even if the setting is 0 or 1, it may not be protected. If there are several motors
connected to a drive, please install the electronic thermal relay in each of motors.
12.1-14-5

 Electronic thermal relay is according to the motor 150 % rated current value and with Pr. 14-81
settings, the settings of Pr. 14-83 is to protect the motor to avoid burned due to motor
overheating. When it reaches the setting time, the drive will display "EoL3 / EoL4", and the
motor will be free run to stop.
 This parameter function is based on the operating characteristic curve of electronic thermal
relay I2t, it is according to the drive output frequency, current and running time to protect the
motor and prevent the overheating of motor.
Ra te d cu r r e n t Ra te d cu r r e n t
o f mo to r % o f mo to r %
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
25 50 75 100 125 150 25 50 75 100 125 150

Ra te d fr e q u e n cy o f mo to r % Ra te d fr e q u e n cy o f mo to r %
Mo to r co a xi a l co o l i n g cu r ve fi g u r e Mo to r i n d e p e n d e n t co o l i n g cu r ve fi g u r e
 The electronic thermal relay action condition should be follow the settings of Pr. 14-80 /
Pr. 14-82:
1. Pr. 14-80 / Pr. 14-82 set to 0:Inverter motor (with external forced cooling):
When drive output current is higher than the rated current 150 % of motor (please refer to the
motor independent cooling curve figure as above), drive starts to accumulate time if the
accumulation time exceeds the settings of Pr. 14-81 / Pr. 14-83, electronic thermal relay will be
actuated.
2. Pr. 14-80 / Pr. 14-82 set to 1:Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft)：
When drive output current is higher than the rated current 150 % of motor (please refer to the
motor coaxial cooling curve figure as above), drive starts to accumulate time if the
accumulation time exceeds the settings of Pr. 14-81 / Pr. 14-83, electronic thermal relay will be
actuated. The electronic thermal relay action time will depend on the drive output current (load
rate of motor %) to make appropriate adjustments, the short action time when the current is
high, the long action time when the current is low, please see the figure showing as below:
Op eratio n time
(se c.)
6 00
5 50
5 00
4 50
4 00
3 50 F= 50Hz
30 0 F= 40Hz
F= 20Hz
2 50
2 00
1 50
1 00
50
Motor l oa din g ra te
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
1 08
1 20
1 32
1 44
1 56
1 68
1 80
1 92
0
(%)
12.1-14-6
12-2 Adjustment & Application

Standard PM Motor Adjustment Procedure
 Pr. 00-11 = 2 SVC (Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
Flow chart of adjustment when starting up WITHOUT load
Freque nc y c ommand sett ing

(higher than switc hi ng frequen cy)
Start running
Available on Pr.10-53 =2 or 3
Lower init ia l angle pulse
width (Pr. 10-42)
Th e d i r ec ti on
i s ri g h t o r n o t wh e n
i t sta r ts r u n ni n g I nrush curre nt is too high
during press ing RUN
Yes
No-load test
wit h 1/ 4 rated speed
Incre ase Pr.07-26
No-load current
No- lo ad cu rr e nt is i s normal or not
too hi gh
No-l oa d cu rr en t is no r mal
(1 0~ 2 0% o f moto r ’s rate d cur r e n t)
I ncreas e the estima t ed Yes Decreas e the es timated

w idth (10-32)/ width (10 -32)/
I ncreas e the system Decreas e the syst em
in ertia (11 - 01 ) inertia (11 -01 )
Run ni ng on hi gh
fr e q ue ncy, the ou tpu t
O utp ut fr eq ue ncy wa ves or fr eq ue ncy is stab le Hig h fr eq ue n cy sp ur
d isp er ses su bsta n ti al ly o f no t on ou tpu t fre q u en cy
Yes
- Incr e a se the esti mate d wi dth (1 0- 32 )/
-In cre a se th e wa ve ca rr ie r fr eq ue ncy (00 -1 7)
-In cre a se PM sen ser le ss ob ser ver lo w-p ass
filte r ga in (1 0- 34 )
No Reach the
highe s t out put frequenc y
Moto r l ose s spe ed or not
on hi gh sp e ed
Yes
Test with load
12.2-1
Flow chart of adjustment when starting up WITH load
A t est of perf or mance on

lo w f req ue ncy & with l oad
In cr ea se P r1 0-3 1 De cre ase Pr 1 0 -31
Pe rfo rma n ce on
lo w fre qu e n cy &
Cap aci ty with lo ad o n lo w fr eq ue n cy wi th l oa d is no rma l Ou tpu t cur re nt o f lo w f re qu en cy
( 1 /1 0 rat e d sp ee d) is we ak o r no t (1 /10 ra ted spe ed ) is a littl e hi g he r
C apacity w i th load on low frequency
m eets the r equirem ent
Perf o rmance test o n

Ac cel. & Decel.
In cre ase P r0 5- 4 3
Ac ce l. & D ece l.
In hig h s pee d a rea , c ur rent a re no rma l o r no t
dur in g Ac ce l. i s a l ittle h ighe r
and s tal ling
Ac ce l. & D ece l. a r e n or m al
C apacit y of
stab le spee d t est
De crease Pr10 - 32 Increa se Pr1 0 -32

or Pr10 - 3 4 or P r1 0 - 34
Sta ble spe ed

in wh ole pro ces s
Hi gh f r eq ue n cy o f ou tpu t is n ormal o r not Lo w fr eq u e ncy o f
fr eq u e ncy flu ctua te s extre m el y ou tpu t fre qu en cy fluctu a te s
Yes
Finishe d
12.2-2
PMSVC control diagram

Pr07- 24 Filter t ime of t orque command
Pr07-26 Torque compensation gain
Pr10- 31 I /F m ode curr ent c ommand (I d)
Torque
compensation
control
Pr05-40 PM m otor Ld
Pr05-41 PM m otor Lq
Pr05-43 PM m otor Ke
d-axis voltage
command
Inv.
q-axis voltage
command Park
Pr05-39 St ator r esistance
o f PM m otor
Pr 05-43 PM m otor Ke
Electrical angle
d-axis current
feedback
q-axis current
feedback
to
Pr10- 32 PM s ensorless o bserver b andwidth

( high f requency area) 3-phase current
Pr 10-34 PM s ensorless observer low-pass filter gain feedback
Adjustment procedure
1. Select PM motor control
Pr. 05-33 =1 or 2
2. Set up motor parameter according to the nameplate on the motor
Pr. 01-01 Rated frequency
Pr. 01-02 Rated voltage
Pr. 05-34 Rated current
Pr. 05-35 Rated Power
Pr. 05-36 Rated speed
Pr. 05-37 Pole number of motor
3. Execute PM Auto-tuning (static)
Set Pr. 05-00 =13 and press Run. When the tuning is done, the following parameters will be
obtained.
Pr. 05-39 Stator resistance
Pr. 05-40 Permanent magnet motor Ld
Pr. 05-41 Permanent magnet motor lq
Pr. 05-43 (V / 1000 rpm), the Ke parameter of PM motor (this can be calculated
automatically according to power, current and speed of motor).
Pr. 10-52 The amplitude of the high frequency signal injected during angle detection
12.2-3
accurate.
4. Set the speed control mode: Pr. 00-10 = 0, Pr. 00-11 = 2 SVC.
5. It is suggested that cutting off the power after finishing tuning, and then re-power on.
6. The ration of PMSVC control mode is 1:20.
7. When PMSVC control mode is under 1 / 20 rated speed, load bearing capacity = 100 % motor
rated torque.
8. PMSVC control mode is not applicable for zero speed control.
9. Start-up with load and forward / reverse load bearing capacity of PMSVC control mode = 100 %
rated torque of motor.
10. Set up the speed estimators related parameters.
 I/F Mode Current Command

Factory Setting: 40
Settings 0~150 % of motor’s rated current
 The parameter is the current command of the drive in low-speed area (low-speed area: frequency
command < Pr. 10-39). When it is stalling on heavy duty start-up or forward / reverse with load,
adjust the parameter (increase). If inrush current is too high to cause oc stall, then decrease it.
 PM FOC Sensorless Speed Estimator Bandwidth

 The parameter is speed estimator bandwidth. Adjust the parameter will influence the stability and
the accuracy of speed for motor.
increase the bandwidth. If there is high frequency vibrates (the waveform vibrates extremely and
is like spur), then decrease the bandwidth.
12.2-4
 PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain

Settings 0.00~655.35
 Adjust the parameter will influence the response speed of speed estimator.
increase the gain. If there is high frequency vibrates (the waveform vibrates extremely and is like
spur), then decrease the gain.
 Frequency Point when Switch from I/F Mode to PM Sensorless Mode

 The parameter is the switch point which is from low frequency to high frequency. It will influence
the switch point of speed observer in high / low frequency area.
 If the switch point is too low, motor will generate not enough back emf to let the speed estimator
measure the right rotator’s position and speed, and cause stall and oc when the frequency of
switch point is running.
the high switch point will make the drive keeps outputting with the setting value of Pr. 10-31)
 Initial Angle Detection Pulse Value

Settings 0.0~3.0
 The angle detection is fixed to 3: Use the pulse injection method to start. The parameter
influences the value of pulse during the angle detection. The larger the pulse is, the higher of the
accuracy of rotator’s position. But larger pulse might cause oc easily.
 Increase the parameter when the running direction and the command are opposite while start-up.
If oc occurs in the start-up moment, then decrease the parameter.
 Please refer to Chapter 12-2 Adjustment & Application for detailed motor adjustment procedure.
 Zero Voltage Time While Start Up

 This parameter is valid only when the setting of Pr. 07-12 (Speed tracking during start-up) = 0.
 When the motor is in static status at the startup, the accuracy to estimate angles will be
increased. In order to make the motor in “static status”, 3 phase of drive output 0V to motor to
reach this goal. The Pr. 10-49 setting time is the length of time when 3 phase output 0V.
 It is possible that even when this parameter is being applied but the motor at the installation site
cannot go in to the “static status” caused by the inertia or by any external force. So, if the motor
doesn’t go into a completer “static status” in 0.2 sec, increase this setting value appropriately.
 If Pr. 10-49 sets too high, the start-up time will be longer obviously. If is too low, then the braking
performance will be weak.
12.2-5
 Injection Frequency
Settings 0~1200 Hz
 This parameter is a high frequency injection command in PM SVC control mode and it doesn’t
often need to be adjusted. But, if a motor’s rated frequency (i.e. 400 Hz) is too close to the
frequency setting of this parameter (i.e. factory setting 500 Hz), the accuracy of angles detected
will be affected. Therefore, refer to the setting of Pr. 01-01 before adjusting this parameter.
 If the setting value of Pr. 00-17 is lower than Pr. 10-51*10, then increase the frequency of carrier
wave.
 The parameter is magnitude command of high frequency injection signal in PM SVC control
mode.
accurate.
 Position Detection Method

Factory Setting: 0
1: Internal 1/4 rated current attracting the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
 It is suggested to set as “2” if it’s IPM; set as “3” if it’s SPM. If there is bad effect when set as “2”
or “3”, then set as “1”.
11. Parameters for speed adjustment
 Torque Compensation Gain

Factory Setting: 1
Settings IM: 0~10 (when Pr. 05-33 = 0)
PM: 0~5000 (when Pr. 05-33 = 1 or 2)
 The parameter influences the output current during operation. There will be less effect on low
speed area.
 Increase the setting value if the current with no-load is too high. However, it might also cause
the motor to vibrate. If the motor vibrates during operation, decrease the setting value.
12.2-6
12.2-7
Chapter 13 Warning CodesMS300
Chapter 13 Warning Codes

Model name of digital keypad: KPMS-LE01
ID No. Display Descriptions

Modbus function code error (Illegal function code)
Corrective Actions
1
 Check if the function code is correct.
(Function code must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
Modbus data address is error (Illegal data address (00 H to 254 H)

2 Corrective Actions
 Check if the communication address is correct.
Modbus data error (Illegal data value)

 Check if the data value exceeds max. / min. value.
Modbus communication error (Data is written to read-only address)

5 Modbus transmission time-out
6 Keypad transmission time-out
Keypad COPY error 1

7 Keypad simulation error, including communication delays, communication
error (keypad received error FF86) and parameter value error.
Keypad COPY error 2

8
Keypad simulation done, parameter writes error.
13-1

IGBT is over-heated than protection level 1~10 HP: 90 oC
Corrective Actions
 Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the specified
temperature range.
9  Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed.
 Remove any foreign objects from the heat sink and check for possible
dirty in heat sink.
 Check the fan and clean it.
 Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
11 PID feedback loss
ACI signal loss

12
When Pr. 03-19 is set to 1 or 2.
13 Low current
15 PG feedback error
16 PG feedback loss
17 Over-speed warning
18 Over speed deviation warning
When the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07
or Pr. 06-10) and also exceeds Pr. 06-08 or Pr. 06-11, when Pr. 06-06 or Pr.
20
06-09 is set as 1 or 3, it will display warning without abnormal record; when
Pr. 06-06 or 06-09 is set as 2 or 4, it will display error, stop running and there
will be an abnormal record.
Corrective Actions
 Check if motor is overloaded.
21
 Check Pr. 05-01 motor rated current is correct or not.
 Increase motor capacity.
22 Motor over-heating
24 Over slip
25 Auto tuning processing
13-2
28 Output phase loss
Keypad COPY error 3

30
Keypad copy between different power range drive
31 Over torque warning of motor 3
32 Over torque warning of motor 4
36 CANopen guarding time-out 1
37 CANopen heartbeat time-out 2
39 CANopen bus off
40 CANopen index error
41 CANopen station address error
42 CANopen memory error
43 CANopen SDO transmission time-out
44 CANopen SDO received register overflow
45 CANopen boot up fault
46 CANopen protocol format error
50 PLC download error, opposite data defect
51 PLC download and save error
52 Data error during PLC operation
53 PLC download Function code error
54 PLC register overflow
55 PLC operation Function code error
13-3
56 PLC checksum error
57 PLC end command is missing
58 PLC MCR command error
59 PLC download fail
60 PLC scan time fail
73 Bus-off detected
74 No network power
75 Factory default setting error
76 Serious internal error
78 Profibus parameter data error
79 Profibus configuration data error
80 Ethernet link fail
81 Communication time-out for communication card and drive
82 Check sum error for communication card and drive
83 Communication card returns to default setting
84 Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication value
85 EtherNet/IP exceed maximum communication value
86 IP fail
87 Mail fail
88 Communication card busy
13-4
90 Copy PLC: password error
91 Copy PLC: read mode error
92 Copy PLC: write mode error
93 Copy PLC: version error
94 Copy PLC: capacity size error
95 Copy PLC: must disable PLC function
96 Copy PLC: time out
13-5
13-6
Chapter 14 Error CodesMS300
Chapter 14 Error Codes

Model name of digital keypad: KPMS-LE01
*Follow the settings of Pr. 06-17 ~ Pr. 06-22 and Pr. 14-70 ~ Pr. 14-73
Over-current during acceleration (Output current exceeds triple rated current
during acceleration.)
Corrective Actions
 Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor insulation at the
1
output.
 Acceleration time too short: Increase acceleration time.
 AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the AC motor drive
with higher power model.
Over-current during deceleration (Output current exceeds triple rated current
during deceleration.)
Corrective Actions
2
output.
Over-current during steady state operation (Output current exceeds triple
rated current during constant speed.)
Corrective Actions
3
output.
14-1

When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit current is more
than 50 % of AC motor drive rated current, the AC motor drive power module
may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC motor drive protection,
not for protecting the user.
4
Corrective Actions
 Check the wiring connections between the AC motor drive and motor for
possible short circuits, also to ground.
 Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged.
 Check for possible poor insulation at the output.
Over-current during stop. Hardware failure in current detection.
 Return to the factory.
DC BUS over-voltage at constant speed (230V: 450 Vdc; 460 V: 900 Vdc)
Corrective Actions
 Check if the input voltage spike without the rated AC motor drive input
7 voltage range.
 Check for possible voltage transients.
 If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase the
acceleration time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage during deceleration (230V: 450 Vdc; 460V: 900 Vdc)
Corrective Actions
8 voltage range.
 If DC BUS is over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase
the deceleration time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage at constant speed (230V: 450 Vdc; 460V: 900 Vdc)
Corrective Actions
9 voltage range.
 If DC BUS is over-voltage due to regenerative voltage, please increase
the deceleration time or add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in voltage detection.
Corrective Actions
10  Check if the input voltage spike without the rated AC motor drive input
voltage range.
14-2

DC BUS voltage is less than Pr. 06-00 during acceleration.
Corrective Actions
11  Check if the input voltage is normal.
 Check for possible sudden load.
 Check the setting of Pr. 06-00.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr. 06-00 during deceleration.
Corrective Actions
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr. 06-00 in constant speed.
Corrective Actions
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr. 06-00 at stop.
Corrective Actions
Phase Loss.
Corrective Actions
15
 Check if there is any phase loss in 3-phase model or in 1-phase input
application.
IGBT is over-heated than protection level.
Corrective Actions
temperature range.
16  Make sure that the ventilation holes are not obstructed.
 Remove any foreign objects from the heat sink and check for possible
dirty in heat sink.
 Check the fan and clean it.
 Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
IGBT Hardware Error.
Overload. The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current.
Corrective Actions
21
 Check if the motor is overloaded.
 Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
14-3

Electronics thermal relay 1 protection.
Corrective Actions
22
 Check the setting of electronics thermal relay (Pr. 06-14)
Electronics thermal relay 2 protection.
Corrective Actions
23
 Check the setting of electronics thermal relay (Pr. 06-28)
Motor overheating.
The AC motor drive detecting internal temperature exceeds the setting of Pr.
06-30 (PTC level)
Corrective Actions
24
 Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
temperature range.
 Change to a higher power motor.
When the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07 or
Pr. 06-10) and also exceeds Pr. 06-08 or Pr. 06-11, when Pr. 06-06 or Pr.
26 06-09 is set as 1 or 3, it will display warning without abnormal record; when
Pr. 06-06 or 06-09 is set as 2 or 4, it will display error, stop running and there
will be an abnormal record.
Corrective Actions
27  Check if motor is overloaded.

 Check Pr. 05-01 motor rated current is correct or not.
 Increase motor capacity.
Low current detection.
 Check Pr. 06-71, Pr. 06-72, Pr. 06-73.
Internal EEPROM can not be read.
Corrective Actions
31
 Press “RESET” key to the factory setting.
 Return to the factory if it invalid.
U-phase current error.
Corrective Actions
33
 Reboots the power.
 If fault code is still displayed on the keypad please return to the factory.
V-phase current error.
Corrective Actions
34
14-4

W-phase current error.
Corrective Actions
35
 If fault code is still displayed on the keypad please return to the factory
CC (current clamp) hardware error.
Corrective Actions
36
OC hardware error.
Corrective Actions
37
Motor parameters auto tuning error.
Corrective Actions
40  Check if motor wiring is correct or not.
 Check if motor capacity and parameters are correct or not.
 Try again.
PID loss (ACI).
Corrective Actions
41
 Check the wiring of the PID feedback.
 Check the setting of the PID parameters.
PG feedback error.
Corrective Actions
42
 Check if the setting of encoder parameter is correct when drive is in PG
feedback close-loop control.
PG feedback loss.
 Check the wiring of the PG feedback.
PG feedback stall.
Corrective Actions
44  Check the wiring of the PG feedback.
 Check if the setting of PI gain and acceleration or deceleration is suitable.
PG slip error.
Corrective Actions
45  Check the wiring of the PG feedback.
 Check if the setting of PI gain and acceleration or deceleration is suitable.
14-5

ACI loss.
Corrective Actions
48
 Check the wiring of ACI.
 Check if the ACI signal is less than 4 mA.
External Fault. When the multi-function input terminal (EF) is active, the AC
motor drive will stop output.
49
Corrective Actions
 Press “RESET” key after fault has been cleared.
Emergency stop. When the multi-function input terminal (EF1) is active, the
AC motor drive will stop output.
50
Corrective Actions
 Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
External Base Block. When the multi-function input terminal (B.B) is active,
the AC motor drive will stop output.
 Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to operate the AC motor drive
again.
Keypad is locked after enter wrong password three times.
Corrective Actions
52
 Refer to Pr. 00-07 and Pr. 00-08.
 Turn the power ON after power OFF to re-enter the correct password.
Modbus function code error (Illegal function code)
 Check if the function code is correct (Function code must be 03, 06, 10, 63).
Modbus data address is error [ Illegal data address (00 H to 254 H) ]
 Check if the data address is correct.
Modbus data error (Illegal data value)
 Check if the data value exceeds max. / min. value.
Modbus communication error (Data is written to read-only address)
14-6

Modbus transmission time-out
Corrective Actions
 Check if the host controller transmits the communication command within
setting time (Pr. 09-03).
58
 Check the communication wiring and grounding. 90 degrees wiring layout
or separation from main circuit is suggested to prevent interference.
 Check the setting of Pr. 09-02 is the same as the host controller.
 Check the status of communication cable or change new cable.
Y-connection / ∆-connection switch error
Corrective Actions
61
 Check the wiring of the Y-connection / ∆-connection.
 Check the parameters settings.
When Pr. 07-13 is not set to 0 and momentary power off or power cut, it will
display dEb during accel. / decel. stop.
 Set Pr. 07-13 to 0.
 Check if input power is stable.
When motor slip exceeds Pr. 07-29 setting and exceeds Pr. 07-30 time
setting, it will show the fault.
 Check if motor parameter is correct, please decrease the load if overload.
 Check the settings of Pr. 07-29 and Pr. 07-30.
S1~DCM internal hardware detect error
Corrective Actions
 Check wiring of S1 terminal.
 Reset emergency switch (ON: activated) and re-power
72
 Check the input voltage to maintain at least 11V.
 Check the wiring of S1 and +24V terminal.
 After make sure the wiring is correct, if STL1 fault still exists after
re-power, please contact Delta.
Safety torque off function active
Corrective Actions
 Check wiring of S1 and S2 terminal.
 Reset emergency switch (ON: activated) and re-power.
76
 Check the wiring of S1/S2 and +24V terminal.
 After make sure the wiring is correct, if STO fault still exists after
14-7

S2~DCM internal hardware detect error.
Corrective Actions
77
S1~DCM & S2~DCM internal hardware detect error.
Corrective Actions
78
79 U-phase short circuit
80 V-phase short circuit
81 W-phase short circuit
Output phase loss 1 (Phase U)

Output phase loss 2 (Phase V)
82
Output phase loss 3 (Phase W)
Corrective Actions
 Check the motor internal wiring, change the motor if there is still error.
83  Check the cable status.
 Choose three phases motor, and make sure the capacity of drive and
motor match.
 Check the cable of control board.
84
 Check three phases current is balanced or not. If it is balanced and OPHL
fault still exists, please return to the factory.
87 Over load protection at low frequency
Initial rotor position detection error.

Corrective Actions
89
  Verify if the UVW output cable are loss.
 Verify if the motor internal coil is broken.
 Verify if the drive UVW output are normal.
14-8

CANopen guarding error.
Corrective Actions
 Increase guarding time (Index 100C).
101
 Make sure the communication wiring is serial.
 Use dedicated CANopen cable and install terminating resistor.
CANopen heartbeat error.
Corrective Actions
 Increase Heart beat time (Index 1016).
102
CANopen bus off error.
Corrective Actions
 Re-install CANopen card.
104
CANopen index error.
 Reset CANopen index (Pr. 00-02 = 7).
CANopen station address error.
Corrective Actions
106  Disable CANopen (Pr. 09-36 = 0).
 Reset CANopen setting (Pr. 00-02 = 7).
 Reset the station address (Pr. 09-36).
CANopen memory error.
Corrective Actions
107
  Disable CANopen (Pr. 09-36 = 0).
 Reset CANopen setting (Pr. 00-02 = 7).
 Reset the station address (Pr. 09-36).
Internal communication error.
 If the fault still appears after reset, please return to the factory.
14-9

If the fault still appears after reset, please return to the factory.
127 Software version error
128 Over torque fault 3
129 Over torque fault 4
134 Electronics thermal relay 3 protection
135 Electronics thermal relay 4 protection
140 GFF detected when power on
141 GFF occurs before run
142 Auto tune error 1 (In DC test stage)
143 Auto tune error 2 (High frequency test stage)
144 Auto tune error 3 (Rotary test stage)
14-10
Chapter 15 CANopen OverviewMS300
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
15-1 CANopen Overview

15-2 Wiring for CANopen
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes
15-6 CANopen LED Function
15-1
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive
by using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized
communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data
(Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency
message). And it also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message, and
Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details. The content of this
instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most
updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Delta CANopen supporting functions:

 Support CAN2.0A Protocol
 Support CANopen DS301 V4.02
 Support DSP-402 V2.0
Delta CANopen supporting services:
 PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO4
 SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.
 SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
 NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
 Time Stamp service
15-2
15-1 CANopen Overview

 CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented
machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is
standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and
communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302),
recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations
(CiA 303-2).
Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA

DSP-401 DSP-404 DSP-XXX
OSI Layer 7
Application Communication Profile CiA DS-301
OSI Layer 2
CAN Controller CAN 2.0A
Data Link Layer
+ -
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer + - ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ-45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
PIN Signal Description

1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
6 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
15-3
 CANopen Communication Protocol

It has services as follows:
 NMT (Network Management Object)
 SDO (Service Data Objects)
 PDO (Process Data Object)
 EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only
one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All CANopen nodes have
a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram
of a node is shown as follows:
(1)
Initializing
(15)
Reset Application (9)

(10)
(11)
(16)
Reset Communication
(2)F
(14)
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3) (4) (5) (7)
(13)
Stopped AB
(6) (8)
(12)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state

(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically A: NMT
(3) (6) Start remote node B: Node Guard
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state C: SDO
(5) (8) Stop remote node D: Emergency
(9) (10) (11) Reset node E: PDO
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication F: Boot-up
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped

PDO ○
SDO ○ ○
SYNC ○ ○
Time Stamp ○ ○
EMCY ○ ○
Boot-up ○
NMT ○ ○ ○
15-4
SDO (Service Data Objects)
SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model.
One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between
two nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data
exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in
the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The
access path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has
sub-index if necessary. The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown
as follows:
PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the
network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to
be processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one
another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a
RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode. All transmission types are listed in the
following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0 ○ ○
1-240 ○ ○
241-251 Reserved
252 ○ ○
253 ○ ○
254 ○
255 ○
 Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
 Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving
SYNC.
 Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
 Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.
 Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
EMCY (Emergency Object)

When errors occurred inside the hardware, an emergency object will be triggered an
emergency object will only be sent when an error is occurred. As long as there is nothing wrong
with the hardware, there will be no emergency object to be served as a warning of an error
message.
15-5
15-2 Wiring for CANopen
An external adapter card: CMM-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring to connect

CANopen to MS300. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be
terminated with 120Ω terminating resistors.
M M M
Termination
resistor
Termination
resistor
15-6
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Descriptions

15-3-1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr. 09-40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode
DS402 standard and Pr.09-40 set to 0 is Delta’s standard setting mode.
Actually, there are two control modes according to Delta’s standard, one is the old control
mode (Pr. 09-30=0).
This control mode can only control the motor drive under frequency control. Another mode is a
new standard (Pr. 09-30=1)
This new control mode allows the motor drive to be controlled under all sorts of mode.
Currently, C2000 support speed, torque, position and home mode.
The definition of relating control mode are:
Control mode
CANopen
Speed
control mode
Index Description
DS402 6042-00 Target rotating speed (RPM)
Pr. 09-40=1 ----- -----
Delta Standard
(Old definition) 2020-02 Target rotating speed (Hz)
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=0
Delta Standard 2060-03 Target rotating speed (Hz)

(New definition)
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=1 2060-04 Torque limit (%)
CANopen Operation control

control mode Index Description
DS402 6040-00 Operation Command
Pr. 09-40=1 ----- -----
Delta Standard
(Old definition) 2020-01 Operation Command
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=0
Delta Standard 2060-01 Operation Command

(New definition)
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=1 ----- -----
CANopen Other
control mode Index Description
DS402 605A-00 Quick stop processing mode
Pr. 09-40=1 605C-00 Disable operation processing mode
Delta Standard
(Old definition) ----- -----
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=0
Delta Standard ----- -----
(New definition)
Pr. 09-40=0, Pr. 09-30=1 ----- -----
However, you can use some index regardless DS402 or Delta’s standard.
For example:
1. Index which are defined as RO attributes.
2. Index correspond to parameters such as (2000 ~200B-XX)
3. Accelerating/Decelerating Index: 604F 6050
15-7
15-3-2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15-3-2-1 Related set up of ac motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below:
1. Wiring for hardware (refer to chapter 15-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr. 00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr. 00-20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
4. Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33. (Choose source of torque commend from
CANopen setting.)
5. Set DS402 as control mode: Pr. 09-40=1
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr. 09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
7. Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is
disable). If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one of the following
parameter: Pr. 02-01 ~Pr. 02-08 or Pr. 02-26 ~ Pr. 02-31. (Note: This function is available in
DS402 only.)
15-3-2-2 The status of the motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
According to the DS402 definition, the motor drive is divided into 3 blocks and 9
statuses as described below.
3 blocks
1. Power Disable: That means without PWM output

2. Power Enable: That means with PWM output
3. Fault: One or more than one error has occurred.
9 status
1. Start: Power On
2. Not ready to switch on: The motor drive is initiating.
3. Switch On Disable: When the motor drive finishes the initiation, it will be at this mode.
4. Ready to switch on: Warming up before running.
5. Switch On: The motor derive has the PWM output now, but the reference commend is
not effective.
6. Operate Enable: Able to control normally.
7. Quick Stop Active: When there is a Quick Stop request, you have to stop running the
motor drive.
8. Fault Reaction Active: The motor drive detects conditions which might trigger error(s).
9. Fault: One or more than errors has occurred to the motor drive.
15-8
Therefore, when the motor drive is turned on and finishes the initiation, it will remain at
Ready to Switch on status. To control the operation of the motor drive, you need to change this
status to Operate Enable status. The way to change it is to commend the control word's bit0 ~
bit3 and bit7 of the Index 6040H and to pair with Index Status Word (Status Word 0X6041).
The control steps and index definition are described as below:
Index 6040
15~9 8 7 6~4 3 2 1 0
Enable Enable
Reserved Halt Fault Reset Operation Quick Stop Switch On
operation Voltage
Index 6041
15~14 13~12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Internal
Target Switch on Quick Voltage Operation Ready to
Reserved Operation limit Remote Reserved Warning Fault Switch on
reached disabled stop enabled enable switch on
active
Power
Start Fault Reaction Active
Disable
X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On

X0XX0000 Fault
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
0XXXXX0X X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110 or
and 0XXXX01X
Disable QStop=1 or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
X01X0001 or
0XXXX01X Fault
0XXXX111 0XXXX110 or
Disable QStop=0 Power
Switch On
Enable
X01X0011 0XXXXX0X
or
0XXX1111 0XXXX111 0XXXX01X Fout=0
or
0XXXX110 Disable QStop=0
Operation Enable Quick Stop Active
X01X0111 0XXXX01X X00X0111
and
Disable QStop=1
Set command 6040 =0xE, then set another command 6040 =0xF. Then the motor drive can be
switched to Operation Enable. The Index 605A decides the dashed line of Operation Enable when
the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. (When the setting value is 1~3, this dashed line is
active. But when the setting value of 605A is not 1~3, once he motor derive is switched to Quick Stop
Active, it will not be able to switch back to Operation Enable.)
15-9
PDO
Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down ramp
2: slow down on quick stop ramp
5 slow down on slow down ramp and
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No stay in QUICK STOP
6 slow down on quick stop ramp and
stay in QUICK STOP
7 slow down on the current limit and
stay in Quick stop
Besides, when the control section switches from Power Enable to Power Disable, use 605C to
define parking method.
PDO
Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
0: Disable drive function
605Ch 0 Disable operation option code 1 RW S16 No 1: Slow down with slow down ramp;
disable of the drive function
15-3-2-3 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard)
Speed mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the speed control mode: Set Index6060 to 2.
2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: Set 6040=0xE, then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. To set target frequency: Set target frequency of 6042, since the operation unit of 6042 is rpm,
there is a transformation:
120
nf n: rotation speed (rpm) (rounds/minute) P: motor’s pole number (Pole)
p
f: rotation frequency (Hz)
For example:
Set 6042H = 1500 (rpm), if the motor drive's pole number is 4 (Pr05-04 or Pr05-16), then the
motor drive's operation frequency is 1500(120/4)=50Hz.
Besides, the 6042 is defined as a signed operation. The plus or minus sign means to rotate
clockwise or counter clockwise
4. To set acceleration and deceleration: Use 604F(Acceleration) and 6050(Deceleration).

5. Trigger an ACK signal: In the speed control mode, the bit 6~4 of Index 6040 needs to be
controlled. It is defined as below:
Index 6040
SUM
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
Speed mode
1 0 1 Locked at the current signal.
(Index 6060=2)
1 1 1 Run to reach targeting signal.
Other Decelerate to 0Hz.
15-10
NOTE 01: To know the current rotation speed, read 6043. (unit: rpm)
NOTE 02: To know if the rotation speed can reach the targeting value; read bit 10 of 6041.
(0: Not reached; 1: Reached)
15-11
15-3-3 By using Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode)
15-3-3-1 Various mode control method (Delta Old Standard)

Please follow the steps below:
1. Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
4. Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) as control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and
Pr. 09-30 = 0.
5. CANopen station setting: set Pr. 09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0,
CANopen slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error arised (CAdE or CANopen memory
error) as station setting is completed, press Pr. 00-02=7 for reset.)
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr. 09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
15-3-3-2 By speed mode

1. Set the target frequency: Set 2020-02, the unit is Hz, with a number of 2 decimal places. For
example 1000 is 10.00.
2. Operation control: Set 2020-01 = 0002H for Running, and set 2020-01 = 0001H for Stopping.
15-12
15-3-4 By using Delta Standard (New definition)
15-3-4-1 Related set up of ac motor drive (Delta New Standard)
Please follow the steps below:

1. Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr. 00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr. 00-20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
4. Set Delta Standard (New definition) as control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and 09-30 = 1.
5. CANopen station setting: set Pr. 09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error arised (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
setting is completed, press Pr. 00-02=7 for reset.)
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr. 09-37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
15-3-4-2 Various mode control method (Delta New Standard)
Speed Mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the speed control mode: Set Index6060 = 2.
2. Set the target frequency: set 2060-03, unit is Hz, with a number of 2 decimal places. For
example 1000 is 10.00Hz.
3. Operation control: set 2060-01 = 008H for Server on, and set 2060-01 = 0081H for Running.
15-13
15-3-5 DI/DO AI AO are controlled via CANopen
To control the DO AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow the steps below:
1. To set the DO to be controlled, define this DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr.
02-13=50 to control RY1.
2. To set the AO to be controlled, define this AO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr.
03-20=20 to control AFM.
3. To control the mapping index of CANopen. If you want to control DO, then you will need to control
Index2026-41. If you want to control AO, then you will need to control 2026-AX. If you want to set
RY1 as ON, set the bit 1 of Index 2026-41 =1, then RY1 will output 1. If you want to control AFM
output = 50.00%, then you will need to set Index 2026-A2 =5000, then AFM will output 50%.
Mapping table of CANopen DI DO AI AO:

DI:
Terminal Related Parameters R/W Mapping Index
MI 1 == RO 2026-01 bit 2
MI 2 == RO 2026-01 bit 3
MI 3 == RO 2026-01 bit 4
MI 4 == RO 2026-01 bit 5
MI 5 == RO 2026-01 bit 6
MI 6 == RO 2026-01 bit 7
MI 7 == RO 2026-01 bit 8
DO：
RY Pr. 02-13 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit 0
MO1 Pr. 02-16 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit 3
MO2 Pr. 02-17 = 50 RW 2026-41 bit 4
AI：
AVI == RO Value of 2026-61
ACI == RO Value of 2026-62
AO：
AFM Pr. 03-20 = 20 RW Value of 2026-A1
15-14
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index

MS300 Index:
Parameter index corresponds to each other as following:
Index sub-Index
2000H + Group member+1
For example:
Pr. 10-15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group member
10(0 A H) - 15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A

Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
MS300 Control Index:
Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)

Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
0 Number 3 R U8
Bit 1~0 00B:disable
01B:stop
10B:disable
11B: JOG Enable
Bit3~2 Reserved
Bit5~4 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
Bit7~6 00B: 1st step Accel. /Decel.
01B: 2nd step Accel. /Decel.
10B: 3rd step Accel. /Decel.
11B: 4th step Accel. /Decel.
Bit11~8 0000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st step speed
0010B: 2nd step speed
2020H 0011B: 3rd step speed
1 Control word 0 RW U16
0100B: 4th step speed
Bit12 1: Enable the function of
Bit6-11
Bit14~13 00B: no function
01B: Operation command by
the digital keypad
15-15
Factory
Setting
10B: Operation command by
Pr. 00-21 setting
11B: Switch the source of
operation command
Bit 15 Reserved
Freq. command
2 0 RW U16
(XXX.XXHz)
Bit0 1: E.F. ON
3 Other trigger 0 RW U16 Bit1 1: Reset
Bit15~2 Reserved
2021H 0 Number DH R U8
1 Error code 0 R U16
2 AC motor drive status 0 R U16 Bit 1~0 00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
Bit 2 1: JOG command
Bit 4~3 00B: forward running
01B: switch from reverse
running to forward running
10B: switch from forward
running to reverse running
11B: reverse running
Bit 7~5 Reserved
Bit 8 1: master frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9 1: master frequency command
controlled by analog signal
input
Bit 10 1: operation command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 15~11 Reserved
Freq. command
3 0 R U16
(XXX.XXHz)
4 Output freq. (XXX.XXHz) 0 R U16
5 Output current (XX.XA) 0 R U16
6 DC bus voltage (XXX.XV) 0 R U16
7 Output voltage (XXX.XV) 0 R U16
the current segment run by
8 the multi-segment speed 0 R U16
commend
9 Reserved 0 R U16
A Display counter value（c） 0 R U16
Display output power angle
B 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
Display output torque
C 0 R U16
(XXX.X%)
Display actual motor speed
D 0 R U16
(rpm)
Number of PG feed back
E 0 R U16
pulses (0~65535)
Number of PG2 pulse
F 0 R U16
commands (0~65535)
10 power output (X.XXXKWH) 0 R U16
Multi-function display
17 0 R U16
(Pr.00-04)
15-16
Factory
Setting
2022H 0 Reserved 0 R U16
1 Display output current 0 R U16
2 Display counter value 0 R U16
Display actual output
3 0 R U16
frequency (XXX.XXHz)
Display DC-BUS voltage
4 0 R U16
(XXX.XV)
Display output voltage
5 0 R U16
(XXX.XV)
Display output power angle
6 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
7 Display output power in kW 0 R U16
Display actual motor speed
8 0 R U16
(rpm)
Display estimate output
9 0 R U16
torque (XXX.X%)
A Display PG feedback 0 R U16
Display PID feedback value
B after enabling PID function 0 R U16
in % (To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of AVI analog
C input terminal, 0-10V 0 R U16
corresponds to 0-100% (To 2
decimal places)
Display signal of ACI analog
input terminal,
D 4-V20mA/0-10V 0 R U16
corresponds to 0-100% (To 2
decimal places)
Display the IGBT
F temperature of drive power 0 R U16
module in oC
Display the temperature of
10 0 R U16
capacitance in oC
The status of digital input
11 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
The status of digital output
12 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
Display the multi-step
13 0 R U16
speed that is executing
The corresponding CPU pin
14 0 R U16
status of digital input
The corresponding CPU pin
15 0 R U16
status of digital output
Number of actual motor
revolution (PG1 of PG
card). it will start from 9
16 when the actual operation 0 R U16
direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0.
Max. is 65535
Pulse input frequency (PG2
17 0 R U16
of PG card)
Pulse input position (PG
18 card PG2), maximum 0 R U16
setting is 65535.
Display times of counter
1A 0 R U16
overload (0.00~100.00%)
1B Display GFF in % 0 R U16
Display DCbus voltage
1C 0 R U16
ripples (Unit: Vdc)
15-17
Factory
Setting
Display PLC register D1043
1D 0 R U16
data
Display Pole of Permanent
1E 0 R U16
Magnet Motor
User page displays the
1F 0 R U16
value in physical measure
20 Output Value of Pr.00-05 0 R U16
Number of motor turns
21 0 R U16
when drive operates
22 Operation position of motor 0 R U16
23 Fan speed of the drive 0 R U16
Control mode of the drive 0:
24 0 R U16
speed mode 1: torque mode
Carrier frequency of the
25 0 R U16
drive
CANopen Remote IO mapping

Index Sub R/W Definition
2026H 01h R Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
02h R Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
03h~40h R Reserved
41h RW Each bit corresponds to the different output terminals
42h~60h R Reserved
61h R AVI (%)
62h R ACI (%)
63h R AUI (%)
64h~A0h R Reserved
A1h RW AFM1 (%)
A2h RW AFM2 (%)
Index
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
2026-01
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
1：Control broad I/O(Standard)
2：Add external card, EMM-D33A
Index Bit
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
2026-41 0
1 RY 保留保留 MO1 MO2
1：Control broad I/O(Standard)
15-18
Delta Standard Mode (New definition)
Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode
bit DefinitionPriority
00h R U8
0:fcmd =0
0 Ack 4
1:fcmd = Fset(Fpid)
0: FWD run command
1 Dir 4
1: REV run command
2
0: drive run till target speed is attained
3 Halt
1: drive stop by declaration setting
0: drive run till target speed is attained
1: frequency
4 Hold
stop at current
01h RW U16 frequency
0:JOG OFF
5 JOG
Pulse 1:JOG RUN
2060h
6 QStop Quick Stop
0:Power OFF
7 Power
1:Power ON
Multi-step
Cmd
14~8 frequency
SW
switching
15 Pulse 1: Fault code cleared
02h RW U16
03h RW U16 Speed command (unsigned decimal)
04h RW U16
05h RW S32
06h RW
07h RW U16
08h RW U16
0 Arrive Frequency attained
0: Motor FWD run
1 Dir
1: Motor REV run
2 Warn Warning
01h R U16 3 Error Error detected
4
5 JOG JOG
2061h 6 QStop Quick stop
7 Power On Switch ON
15~8
02h R
03h R U16 Actual output frequency
04h R
05h R S32 Actual position (absolute)
06h R
07h R S16 Actual torque
15-19
DS402 Standard
Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
0: No action
6007h 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 Yes 2: Disable Voltage,
3: quick stop
603Fh 0 Error code 0 R0 U16 Yes
6040h 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes
6041h 0 Status word 0 R0 U16 Yes
6042h 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes vl
6043h 0 vl velocity demand 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
6044h 0 vl control effort 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
604Fh 0 vl ramp function time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl Unit must be: 100ms, and
6050h 0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl check if the setting is set to
6051h 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl 0.
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No 5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
0: Disable drive function
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow
605Ch 0 1 RW S16 No
code down ramp; disable of the
drive function
1: Profile Position Mode
2: Velocity Mode
6060h 0 Mode of operation 2 RW S8 Yes
4: Torque Profile Mode
6: Homing Mode
6061h 0 Mode of operation display 2 RO S8 Yes Same as above
15-20
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes
① Display error signal

Fault
② Abbreviate error code
ocA The code is displayed as shown on KPMS-LE01
Oc at accel ③ Display error description
* Refer to setting of Pr. 06-17~Pr. 06~22 and Pr. 14-70~Pr. 14-73

Setting CANopen
Fault CANopen
Display Description fault register
* code (bit 0~7) fault code
Fault
1 ocA 0001H Over-current during acceleration 1 2213H
Oc at accel
Fault
2 ocd 0002H Over-current during deceleration 1 2213H
Oc at decel
Fault Over-current during steady status

3 ocn 0003H 1 2214H
operation
Oc at normal SPD
Ground fault. When (one of) the output

terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit
Fault
current is more than 50% of AC motor
4 GFF 0004H 1 2240H
drive rated current.
Ground fault
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for
AC motor drive protection, not for protection of the
user.
Fault Over-current at stop. Hardware failure in

6 ocS 0006H 1 2214H
current detection
Oc at stop
Over-current during acceleration.

7 ovA 0007H 2 3210H
Hardware failure in current detection
Ov at accel
Fault Over-current during deceleration.

8 ovd 0008H 2 3210H
Hardware failure in current detection.
Ov at decel
Fault Over-current during steady speed.

9 ovn 009H 2 3210H
Hardware failure in current detection.
Ov at normal SPD
15-21
Setting Fault CANopen

CANopen
Fault
Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in
10 ovS 000AH 2 3210H
current detection
Ov at stop
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

11 LvA 000BH 2 3220H
during acceleration.
Lv at accel
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

12 Lvd 000CH 2 3220H
during deceleration.
Lv at decel
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 in

13 Lvn 000DH 2 3220H
constant speed.
Lv at normal SPD
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 at

14 LvS 000EH 2 3220H
stop
Lv at stop
Fault
15 OrP 000FH Phase Loss Protection 2 3130H
Phase Lacked
Fault IGBT overheat

16 oH1 0010H IGBT temperature exceeds protection 3 4310H
IGBT over heat level.
Fault
18 tH1o 0012H IGBT over-heat protection error 3 FF00H
Thermo 1 open
Fault Overload. The AC motor drive detects

21 oL 0015H 1 2310H
excessive drive output current.
Inverter oL
Fault
22 EoL2
EoL1 0016H Electronics thermal relay 1 protection 1 2310H
Thermal relay 1
2
Fault
23 EoL2 0017H Electronics thermal relay 2 protection 1 2310H
Thermal relay 2
15-22
Setting CANopen
Fault CANopen
Fault
24 EoL2
oH3 0018H Motor PTC overheat 3 FF20H
Thermal
Motor over
relay
heat
2
When the output current exceeds the
Fault over-torque detection level (Pr. 06-07 or
26 EoL2
ot1 001AH 3 8311H
Pr. 06-10) and also exceeds Pr. 06-08 or
Thermal
Over torque
relay
1 2 Pr. 06-11, when Pr. 06-06 or Pr. 06-09 is
set as 1 or 3, it will display warning
Fault without abnormal record; when Pr. 06-06
27 EoL2
ot2 001BH or 06-09 is set as 2 or 4, it will display 3 8311H
Thermal
Over torque
relay
2 2 error, stop running and there will be an
abnormal record.
Fault
28 EoL2
uC 001CH Low current 1 8321H
Thermal
Under torque
relay12
Fault Internal EEPROM cannot be

31 EoL2
cF2 001FH 5 5530H
programmed.
Thermal relay
EEPROM read2Err
Fault
33 EoL2
cd1 0021H U-phase error 1 FF04H
Thermal
Ias sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
34 EoL2
cd2 0022H V-phase error 1 FF05H
Thermal
Ibs sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
35 EoL2
cd3 0023H W-phase error 1 FF06H
Thermal
Ics sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
36 EoL2
Hd0 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error 5 FF07H
Thermal
cc HW Error
relay 2
Fault
37 EoL2
Hd1 0025H oc hardware error 5 FF08H
Thermal
oc HW Error
relay 2
Fault
40 EoL2
AUE 0028H Auto tuning error 1 FF21H
Thermal
Auto tuning
relay
Err2
15-23

CANopen
Fault
41 EoL2
AFE 0029H PID loss (ACI) 7 FF22H
Thermal
PID Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
42 EoL2
PGF1 002AH PG feedback error 7 7301H
Thermal
PG Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
43 EoL2
PGF2 002BH PG feedback loss 7 7301H
Thermal
PG Fbk Loss
relay 2
Fault
44 EoL2
PGF3 002CH PG feedback stall 7 7301H
Thermal
PG Fbk Over
relaySPD
2
Fault
45 EoL2
PGF4 002DH PG slip error 7 7301H
Thermal
PG Fbk deviate
relay 2
Fault
48 EoL2
ACE 0030H ACI loss 1 FF25H
Thermal
ACI loss relay 2
External Fault. When the multi-function

Fault
49 EoL2
EF 0031H input terminal (EF) is active, the AC 5 9000H
Thermal relay
External Fault 2 motor drive will stop output.
Emergency stop. When the

Fault multi-function input terminal (EF1) is
50 EoL2
EF1 0032H 5 9000H
active, the AC motor drive will stop
Thermal relay
Emergency stop
2
output.
Fault External Base Block. When the

51 EoL2
bb 0033H multi-function input terminal (B.B) is 5 9000H
Thermal
Base block
relay 2 active, the AC motor drive will stop output.
Fault Keypad is locked after enter wrong

52 EoL2
Pcod 0034H 5 FF26H
password three times.
Thermal relay
Password Error
2
Fault
Modbus function code error (Illegal
54 EoL2
cE1 0036H 4 7500H
function code)
Thermal CMD
Modbus relay err
2
15-24
Setting CANopen
Fault CANopen
Fault Modbus data address is error [ Illegal

55 cE2 0037H 4 7500H
data address (00 H to 254 H) ]
Thermal ADDR
Modbus relay 2err
Fault
56 cE3 0038H Modbus data error (Illegal data value) 4 7500H
Thermal DATA
Modbus relay 2err
Fault Modbus communication error (Data is

57 cE4 0039H 4 7500H
written to read-only address)
Thermal slave
Modbus relay FLT
2
Fault
58 cE10 003AH Modbus transmission time-out 4 7500H
Thermal time
Modbus relayout
2
Fault
61 ydc 003DH Y-connection / ∆-connection switch error 2 3330H
Thermalconnect
Y-delta relay 2
Fault
62 dEb 003EH Energy regeneration when decelerating 2 FF27H
Thermal
Dec. Energy
relayback
2
When motor slip exceeds Pr. 07-29

Fault
63 oSL 003FH setting and exceeds Pr. 07-30 time 7 FF28H
Thermal
Over sliprelay
Error2 setting, it will show the fault.
Fault
72 STL1 0048H S1~DCM internal hardware detect error 5 FF30H
Thermal
STO Lossrelay
1 2
Fault
76 STo 004CH Safety torque off function active 5 FF31H
Thermal
STO relay 2
Fault
77 STL2 004DH S2~DCM internal hardware detect error. 5 FF32H
Thermal
STO Lossrelay
2 2
Fault S1~DCM & S2~DCM internal hardware

78 STL3 004EH 5 FF33H
detect error.
Thermal
STO Lossrelay
3 2
15-25

CANopen
Fault
79 Aoc 0050H U-phase short circuit 1 FF2BH
Thermal
U phase relay
oc 2
Fault
80 boc 0051H V-phase short circuit 1 FF2CH
Thermal
V phase relay
oc 2
Fault
81 coc 0050H W-phase short circuit 1 FF2DH
Thermal
W ph aserelay
oc 2
Fault
82 oPL1 0052H Output phase loss 1 (Phase U) 2 2331H
Thermal
U phas e relay
lacked2
Fault
83 oPL2 0053H Output phase loss 2 (Phase V) 2 2332H
Thermal
V ph ase lac
relay
ked2
Fault
84 oPL3 0054H Output phase loss 3 (Phase W) 2 2333H
Thermal
W phas e relay
lacked
2
Fault
87 oL3 0057H Over load protection at low frequency 0 8A00H
Thermal relay
Derating Error 2
Fault
89 RoPd 0059H Initial rotor position detection error 0 8A00H
Thermal
Rotor Pro.
relay
Error
2
Fault
101 CGdE 0065H CANopen guarding error 4 8130H
Thermal relay
Guarding T-out2
Fault
102 CHbE 0066H CANopen heartbeat error 4 8130H
Thermal relay
Heartbeat T-out
2
Fault
104 CbFE 0068H CANopen bus off error 4 8140H
Thermalbus
CAN/S relay
off 2
15-26
Setting CANopen
Fault CANopen
Fault
105 CIdE 0069H CANopen index error 4 8100H
Thermal relay 2
Fault
106 CAdE 006AH CANopen station address error 4 8100H
Thermal relay 2
Fault
107 C FrE 006BH CANopen memory error 4 8100H
Thermal relay 2
Fault
Fa ult
121 CP20 007AH Internal communication error 7 FF36H
Fault
Fa ult
123 CP22 007CH Internal communication error 7 FF38H
Fault
Fa ult
124 CP30 007DH Internal communication error 7 FF39H
Fault
Fa ult
126 CP32 0080H Internal communication error 7 FF3BH
Fault
Fa ult
127 CP33 0081H Software version error 7 FF3CH
Fault
Fa ult
128 o t3 0082H Over torque fault 3 1 2310H
Fault
Fa ult
129 o t4 0083H Over torque fault 4 1 2310H
O ver tor que 4
Fault
Fa ult
15-27

CANopen
Fault
Fa ult
Fault
Fa ult
140 Hd6 008EH GFF detected when power on 1 2240H
GFF HW error
Fault
Fa ult
141 BG FF 0090H GFF occurs before run 1 2240H
Fault
Fa ult
142 AUE1 0091H Auto tune error 1 (In DC test stage) 1 FF3DH
Fault
Fa ult Auto tune error 2 (High frequency test
143 AUE2 0092H 1 FF3EH
stage)
Fault
Fa ult
144 AUE3 0093H Auto tune error 3 (Rotary test stage) 1 FF3FH
15-28
15-6 CANopen LED Function

There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status Condition CANopen State
OFF Keep lighting off Initial
Blinking Pre-Operation
ON
200 200 1000
Single flash 單次閃爍 ms ms ms Stopped
OFF
ON Keep lighting on Operation
ERR LED:
LED status Condition/ State
OFF No Error
One Message fail
Single ON
200 1000
flash 單次閃爍 ms ms
OFF
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail

Double ON
200 200 200 1000
flash 雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms
OFF
SYNC fail
Triple flash ON
200 200 200 200 200 1000
雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms ms ms
OFF
ON Bus off
15-29
15-30
Chapter 16 PLC Function ApplicationsMS300
Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications
16-1 PLC Summary

16-2 Notes before PLC use
16-3 Turn on
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams
16-5 Various PLC device functions
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window
16-7 Error display and handling
16-8 Explanation of PLC speed mode control
16-9 Count function using pulse input (MS300: MI7 33KHz)
16-1
16-1 PLC Summary

16-1-1 Introduction
The commands provided by the MS300's built-in PLC functions, including the ladder diagram editing
tool WPLSoft, as well as the usage of basic commands and applications commands, chiefly retain
the operating methods of Delta's PLC DVP series.
16-1-2 WPLSoft ladder diagram editing tool
WPLSoft is Delta's program editing software for the DVP and MS300 programmable controllers in the
Windows operating system environment. Apart from general PLC program design general Windows
editing functions (such as cut, paste, copy, multiple windows, etc.), WPLSoft also provides many
Chinese/English annotation editing and other convenience functions (such as registry editing,
settings, file reading, saving, and contact graphic monitoring and settings, etc.).
The following basic requirements that need to install WPLSoft editing software:
Item System requirements

Operating system Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU At least Pentium 90
Memory At least 16MB (we recommend at least 32MB)
Hard drive capacity: at least 100MB free space
Hard drive
One optical drive (for use in installing this software)
Resolution: 640×480, at least 16 colors; it is recommended that the screen
Display
area be set at 800×600 pixels
Mouse Ordinary mouse or Windows-compatible device
Printer Printer with a Windows drive program
RS-485 port Must have at least an RS-485 port to link to the PLC
16-2
16-2 Notes before PLC use

1. The MS300 provides 2 communications serial ports that can be used to download PLC
programs (see figure below).
2. Channel 1 communications format is the same as channel 2.
3. Channel 2 has a preset communications format of 7,N, 2, 9600, ASCII can be changed in Pr.
09-01 (transmission speed) and Pr. 09-04 (communication protocol).
4. The PLC preset is node 2; the PLC node can be changed in Pr. 09-35, but this address may not
be the same as the drive's address setting of Pr. 09-00.
USB Channe l 1
SG +
SG -
SG ND Channe l 2
RS-485
MS3 00
8 1 P in 1: Reserved
P in 2: Reserved
P in 3: CAN _ GND
P in 4: S G-
P in 5: S G+
RS-485 P in 6: G ND Reserved
P in 7: CAN _ GND
5. The client can simultaneously access data from the drive and internal PLC, which is performed
through identification of the node. For instance, if the drive node is 1 and the internal PLC node
is 2, then the client command will be
 01 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data
in drive Pr. 04-00
 02 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data
in internal PLC X0
6. The PLC program will be disabled when uploading/downloading programs.
7. Please note when using WPR commands to write in parameters, values may be modified up to
a maximum of 106 times, otherwise a memory write error will occur. The calculation of
modifications is based on whether the entered value has been changed. If the entered value is
left unchanged, the modifications will not increase afterwards. But if the entered value is
different from before, the number of modifications will increase by one.
16-3
8. When Pr. 00-04 is set as 28, the displayed value will be the value of PLC register D1043 (see
figure below):
Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 (optional)
Can display 0~65535
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
C _____
9. In the PLC Run and PLC Stop mode, the content 9 and 10 of Pr. 00-02 cannot be set and cannot
be reset to the default value.
10. The PLC can be reset to the default value when Pr. 00-02 is set as 6.
11. The corresponding MI function will be disabled when the PLC writes to input contact X.
12. When the PLC controls drive operation, control commands will be entirely controlled by the PLC
and will not be affected by the setting of Pr. 00-21.
13. When the PLC controls drive frequency commands (FREQ commands), frequency commands
will be entirely controlled by the PLC, and will not be affected by the setting of Pr. 00-20 or the
Hand ON/OFF configuration.
14. When the PLC controls drive operation, if the keypad Stop setting is valid, this will trigger
an FStP error and cause stoppage.
16-4
16-3 Turn on
16-3-1 Connect to PC
Start operation of PLC functions in accordance with the following four steps
After pressing the Menu key and selecting 4: PLC on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad (optional), press
the Enter key (see figure below).
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
1. Wiring: Connect the drive's RJ-45 communications interface to a PC via the RS485
2. PLC function usage

PLC functions are as shown in the figure on the left; select
PLC
item 2 and implement PLC functions.
1.Disable
1: No function (Disable)
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop 2: Enable PLC (PLC Run)
3: Stop PLC functions (PLC Stop)
Digital keypad (KPMS-LE01)
PLC 0: Do not implement PLC functions

PLC 1: Initiate PLC Run
PLC 2: Initiate PLC Stop
16-5
 When the external multifunctional input terminals (MI1 to MI7) are in PLC Mode select bit0
(51) or PLC Mode select bit1 (52), and the terminal contact is closed or open, it will
compulsorily switch to the PLC mode, and keypad switching will be ineffective.
Corresponding actions are as follows:
PLC mode
PLC Mode select bit1 (52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Using KPC-CC01 MS300
Disable PLC 0 OFF OFF
PLC Run PLC 1 OFF ON
PLC Stop PLC 2 ON OFF
Maintain previous Maintain previous
ON ON
state state
Use of MS300 digital keypad to implement PLC functions

 When the PLC screen switches to the PLC1 screen, this will trigger one PLC action,
and the PLC program start/stop can be controlled by communications via the WPL.
 When the PLC screen switches to the PLC2 screen, this will trigger one PLC stop, and
the PLC program start/stop can be controlled by communications via the WPL.
 The external terminal control method is the same as shown in the table above.
NOTE
 When input/output terminals (MI1 to MI7) are included in the PLC program, these input/output
terminals will only be used by the PLC. As an example, when the PLC program controls Y0 during
PLC operation (PLC1 or PLC2), the corresponding output terminal relay (RA/RB/RC) will operate in
accordance with the program. At this time, the multifunctional input/output terminal setting will be
ineffective. Because these terminal functions are already being used by the PLC, the DI / DO / AO in
use by the PLC can be determined by looking at Pr. 02-52, 02-53, and 03-30.
 When the PLC's procedures use special register D1040, the corresponding AO contact AFM1 will be
occupied,
 Pr. 03-30 monitors the state of action of the PLC function analog output terminal; Bit0 corresponds to
the AFM1 action state.
16-6
16-3-2 I/O device explanation

Input devices:
Serial
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
No.
1 MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7
Output devices:
Serial
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
No.
1 RY MO1 MO2
16-3-3 Installation WPLSoft
See Delta's website for WPLSoft editing software:

http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=3&cid=1&tpid=3
16-3-4 Program writing
After completing installation, the WPLSoft program will be installed in the designated subfolder
"C:\Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\WPLSoft x.xx." The editing software can now be run
by clicking on the WPL icon using the mouse.
16-7
The WPL editing window will appear after 3 seconds (see figure below). When running WPLSoft for
the first time, before "New file" has been used, only the "File (F)," "Communications (C)," View (V),"
"Options (O)," and "Help (H)" columns will appear on the function toolbar.
After running WPLSoft for the second time, the last file edited will open and be displayed in the
editing window. The following figure provides an explanation of the WPLSoft editing software
window:
Click on the icon on the toolbar in the upper left part of the screen: opens new file (Ctrl+N)
16-8
You can also use "File (F)"=> New file (N) (Ctrl+N)
The "Device settings" window will appear after clicking. You can now enter the project title and
filename, and select the device and communication settings to be used
Communications settings: Perform settings in accordance with the desired communications method
502
16-9
Press Confirm after completing settings and begin program editing. There are two program editing
methods; you can choose whether to perform editing in the command mode or the ladder diagram
mode.
In ladder diagram mode, you can perform program editing using the buttons on the function icon row
16-10
Basic Operation
Example: Input the ladder diagram in the following figure
Mouse operation and keyboard function key (F1 to F12) operation

1. The following screen will appear after a new file has been established:
2. Use the mouse to click on the always-open switch icon or press the function key F1:
3. After the name of the input device and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name
(such as "M"), device number (such as "10"), and input comments (such as "auxiliary contact")
can be selected; press the Confirm button when finished.
16-11
4. Click on the output coil icon or press function key F7. After the name of the input device and
the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "Y"), device number (such as
"0"), and input comments (such as "output coil") can be selected; press the Confirm button when
finished.
5. Click on application command icon or press function key F6. Click on "All application
commands" in the function classification field, and click on the End command in the application
command pull-down menu, or use the keyboard to key in "END" in that field, and press the
confirm button.
16-12
6. Click on the icon, which will compile the edited ladder diagram as a command program.
After compiling, the number of steps will appear on the left side of the busbar.
16-3-5 Program download
After inputting a program using WPLSoft, select compile . After completing compilation, select
the to download a program. WPLSoft will perform program download with the online PLC in the
communications format specified in communications settings.
16-3-6 Program monitoring
While confirming that the PLC is in the Run mode, after downloading a program, click on in the
communications menu and select start ladder diagram control (see figure below)
16-13
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams

16-4-1 Schematic diagram of PLC ladder diagram program scanning
Output results are

calculated on the basis of
the ladder diagram
configuration Repeated
(internal devices will have implementation
real-time output
before results are sent to
an external output point)
16-4-2 Introduction to ladder diagrams
Ladder diagrams comprise a graphic language widely applied in automatic control, and employs
common electrical control circuit symbols. After a ladder diagram editor has been used to create a
ladder pattern, PLC program designed is completed. The use of a graphic format to control
processes is very intuitive, and is readily accepted by personnel who are familiar with electrical
control circuit technology. Many of the basic symbols and actions in a ladder diagram comprise
commonly-seen electrical devices in conventional automatic control power distribution panels, such
as buttons, switches, relays, timers, and counters.
Internal PLC devices: The types and quantities of internal PLC devices vary in different brands of
products. Although these internal devices use the same names as conventional electrical control
circuit elements such as relays, coils, and contacts, a PLC does not actually contain these physical
devices, and they instead correspond to basic elements in the PLC's internal memory (bits). For
instance, if a bit is 1, this may indicate that a coil is electrified, and if that bit is 0, it will indicate that
the coil is not electrified. An NO contact (Normal Open, or contact a) can be used to directly read the
value of the corresponding bit, and an NC contact (Normal Close, or contact b) can be used to obtain
the inverse of the bit's value. Multiple relays occupy multiple bits, and 8 bits comprise one byte; two
bytes comprise one word, and two words comprise a double word. When multiple relays are
processing at the same time (such as addition/subtraction or displacement, etc.), a byte, word, or
double word can be used. Furthermore, a PLC contains two types of internal devices: a timer and a
counter. It not only has a coil, but can count time and numerical values. Because of this, when it is
necessary to process some numerical values, these values are usually in the form of bytes, words, or
double words.
16-14
The various internal devices in a PLC all account for a certain quantity of storage units in the
PLC's storage area. When these devices are used, the content of the corresponding storage area is
red in the form of bits, bytes, or words.
Introduction to the basic internal devices in a PLC
Device
Description of Function
type
An input relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external input point (which serves as a terminal connecting with an
external input switch and receiving external input signals). It is driven by external input
signals, to which it assigns values of 0 or 1. A program design method cannot change the
input relay status, and therefore cannot rewrite the corresponding basic units of an input
Input
relay, and WPLSoft cannot be used to perform compulsory On/Off actions. A relay's
Relay
contacts (contacts a and b) can be used an unlimited number of times. An input relay with
no input signal must be left idle and cannot be used for some other purpose.
 Device indicated as: X0, X1, X7, X10, X11, etc. This device is expressed with the
symbol "X," and a device's order is indicated with an octal number. Input point
numbers are indicated in the main computer and in expansion devices.
An output relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external output point (which connects with an external load). It may be
driven by an input relay contact, a contact on another internal device, or its own contacts. It
uses one NO contact to connect with external loads or other contacts, and, like input
Output
contacts, can use the contact an unlimited number of times. An output relay with no input
Relay
signal will be idle, but may be used an internal relay if needed.
 Device indicated as: Y0, Y1, Y7, Y10, Y11, etc. This device is expressed with the
symbol "Y," and a device's order is indicated with an octal number. Output point
numbers are indicated in the main computer and in expansion devices.
Internal relays have no direct connection with the outside. These relays are auxiliary relays
inside a PLC. Their function is the same as that of an auxiliary (central) relay in an
electrical control circuit: Each auxiliary relay corresponding to a basic unit of internal
storage; they can be driven by input relay contacts, output relay contacts, and the contacts
Internal
of other internal devices. An internal auxiliary relay's contact can also be used an unlimited
Relay
number of times. Internal relays have no outputs to outside, and must output via an output
point.
 Device indicated as: M0, M1 to M799, etc. This device is expressed as the symbol
"M," expressed, and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A counter is used to perform counting operations. A count setting value (such as the
number of pulses to be counted) must be assigned when a counter is used. A counter
contains a coil, contact, and a counting storage device. When the coil goes from Off to
Counter On, this indicates that the counter has an input pulse, and one is added to its count. There
are 16 bits that can be employed by the user.
 Device indicated as: C0, C1 to C79, etc. This device is expressed as the symbol "C,"
expressed, and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A timer is used to complete control of timing. The timer contains a coil, contact, and a time
value register. When the coil is electrified, if the preset time is reached, the contact will be
actuated (contact a will close, contact b will open), and the timer's fixed value be given by
the set value. Timer has a regulated clock cycle (timing units: 100 ms). As soon as power
Timer
to the coil is cut off, the contact will no longer be actuated (contact a will open, contact b
will close), and the original timing value will return to zero.
 Device indicated as: T0, T1 to T159, etc. The device is expressed as the symbol "T,"
and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
When a PLC is used to perform various types of sequence control and set time value and
count value control, it most commonly perform data processing and numerical operations,
and data registers are used exclusively for storage of data and various parameters. Each
Data
data register contains 16 bits of binary data, which means that it can store one word. Two
register
data registers with adjacent numbers can be used to process double words.
 Device indicated as: D0, D1 to D399, etc. The device is expressed as the symbol "D,"
and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
16-15
Ladder diagram images and their explanation
Ladder diagram
Explanation of commands Command Using Device
structures
NO switch, contact a LD X、Y、M、T、C
NC switch, contact b LDI X、Y、M、T、C
Series NO AND X、Y、M、T、C
Series NC ANI X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel NO OR X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel NC ORI X、Y、M、T、C
Positive edge-triggered
LDP X、Y、M、T、C
switch
Negative edge-triggered
LDF X、Y、M、T、C
switch
ANDP X、Y、M、T、C
series
ANDF X、Y、M、T、C
series
ORP X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
ORF X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
Block series ANB N/A
Block parallel ORB N/A
MPS
Multiple outputs MRD N/A
MPP
Coil driven output
OUT Y、M
commands
Some basic
Some basic commands, commands
applications commands Applications
commands
Inverted logic INV N/A
16-16
16-4-3 Overview of PLC ladder diagram editing

The program editing method begins from the left busbar and proceeds to the right busbar (the right
busbar is omitted when editing using WPLSoft). Continue to the next row after completing each row;
there is a maximum of 11 contacts on each row. If this is not sufficient, a continuous line will be will be
generated to indicate the continued connection and more devices can be added. A continuous series
of numbers will be generated automatically and identical input points can be used repeatedly. See
figure below:
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y0
Row Number
The ladder diagram programming method involves scanning from the upper left corner to the lower
right corner. The coils and applications command computing box are handled in the output, and the
ladder diagram is placed on the farthest right. Taking the figure below as an example, we can
gradually analyze the procedural sequence of the ladder diagram. The number in the upper right
corner gives the sequential order.
Explanation of
command sequence
1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1 X0 X1 Y1 X4
4 LD X3
Y1
AND M1
ORB M0 T0 M3
5 LD Y1 TMR T0 K10
AND X4
X3 M1
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
Explanation of basic structure of ladder diagrams
LD (LDI) command: An LD or LDI command is given at the start of a block.
LD command LD command
AND Block OR Block

LDP and LDF have this command structure, but there are differences in their action state. LDP, LDF
only act at the rising or falling edge of a conducting contact. (See figure below):
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
16-17
AND (ANI) command: A series configuration in which a single device is connected with one device
or a block.
AND command AND command
ANDP, ANDF also have structures like this, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
OR (ORI) command: A single device is connected with one device or a block.
OR command OR command OR command
ORP, ORF also have identical structures, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
ANB command: A configuration in which one block is in series with one device or block.
ANB command
ORB command: A configuration in which one block is in parallel with one device or block.
ORB command
In the case of ANB and ORB operations, if a number of blocks are connected, they should be
combined to form a block or network from the top down or from left to right.
MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Branching point memory for multiple outputs, enabling multiple,
different outputs. The MPS command begins at a branching point, where the so-called branching
point refers to the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines. We have to rely on the contact status
along a single vertical line to determine whether the next contact can give a memory command.
While each contact is basically able to give memory commands, in view of convenience and the
PLC's capacity restrictions, this can be omitted from some places when converting a ladder diagram.
The structure of the ladder diagram can be used to judge what kinds of contact memory commands
are used.
16-18
MPS can be distinguished by use of the "┬" symbol; this command can be used consecutively for up
to 8 times. The MRD command is read from branching point memory; because logic states along any
one vertical line must be the same, in order to continue analysis of other ladder diagrams, the original
contact status must be read.
MRD can be distinguished by use of the "├" symbol. The MPP command is read from the starting
state of the uppermost branching point, and it is read from the stack (pop); because it is the final
command along a vertical line, it indicates that the state of the vertical line can be concluded.
MPP can be distinguished by use of the "└" symbol. Although there should basically be no errors
when using the foregoing analytical approach, the compiling program may sometimes omit identical
state output, as shown in the following figure:
MPS
( )
( )
( )
( )
MRD
( )
MPP ( )
( )
16-4-4 Commonly-used basic program design examples
Start, stop, and protection

Some applications may require a brief close or brief break using the buttons to start and stop
equipment. A protective circuit must therefore be designed to maintain continued operation in these
situations; this protective circuit may employ one of the following methods:
Example 1: Priority stop protective circuit
When the start NO contact X1=On, and the stop NC contact X2=Off, Y1=On; if X2=On at
this time, coil Y1 will no longer be electrified, and this is therefore referred to as priority
stop.
Y1 X2
Y1
STOP
X1
START
Example 2: Priority start protective circuit
When start NO contact X1=On, and the stop NC contact X2＝Off, Y1=On, and coil Y1 will
be electrified and protected. At this time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will still protect the contact and
continue to be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
X1 X2
Y1
START STOP
Y1
16-19
Example 3: Setting (SET) and reset (RST) command protective circuit

The following figure shows a protective circuit composed of RST and SET commands.
Priority stop occurs when the RST command is placed after the SET command. Because
the PLC executes programs from the top down, at the end of the program, the state of Y1
will indicate whether coil Y1 is electrified. When X1 and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will lose
power, and this is therefore priority stop.
Priority start occurs when the SET command is placed after the RST command. When X1
and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
Top priority of stop

X1
SET Y1
X2
RST Y1
Top priority of start

X2
RST Y1
X1
SET Y1
Commonly-used control circuits

Example 4: Conditional control
X1, X3 are respectively start/stop Y1, and X2, X4 are respectively start/stop Y2; all have
protective circuits. Because Y1's NO contact is in series with Y2's circuit, it becomes an
AND condition for the actuation of Y2. The action of Y1 is therefore a condition for the
action of Y2, and Y1 must be actuated before Y2 can be actuated.
X1 X3
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
16-20
Example 5: Interlocking control

The figure below shows an interlocking control circuit. Depending on which of the start
contacts X1, X2 is valid first, the corresponding output Y1 or Y2 will be actuated, and
when one is actuated, the other will not be actuated. This implies that Y1 and Y2 cannot
be actuated at the same time (interlocking effect). Even if both X1 and X2 are valid at the
same time, because the ladder diagram program is scanned from the top down, it is
impossible for Y1 and Y2 to be actuated at same time. This ladder diagram assigns
priority only to Y1.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Example 6: Sequence control

If the NC contact of Y2 in the interlocking control configuration of example 5 is put in
series with the Y1 circuit, so that it is an AND condition for actuation of Y1 (see figure
below), not only is Y1 a condition for the actuation of Y2 in this circuit, the actuation of Y2
will also stop the actuation of Y1. This configuration confirms the actuation order of Y1
and Y2.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1
Y1
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating circuit

Oscillating circuit with a period of ∆T+∆T
The figure below shows a very simple ladder diagram. When starting to scan the Y1 NC
contact, because the Y1 coil has lost power, the Y1 NC contact will be closed. When the
Y1 coil is then scanned, it will be electrified, and the output will be 1. When the Y1 NC
contact is scanned in the scanning cycle, because Y1 coil is electrified, the Y1 NC
contact will be open, the Y1 coil will then lose power, and the output will be 0. Following
repeated scanning, the output of Y1 coil will have an oscillating waveform with a period
of ∆T(On)+∆T(Off).
Y1
Y1 Y1
T T
16-21
Oscillating circuit with a period of nT+∆T

The program of the ladder diagram shown below uses timer T0 to control coil Y1's electrified
time. After Y1 is electrified, it causes timer T0 to close during the next scanning cycle, which
will cause the output from Y1 to have the oscillating waveform shown in the figure below.
Here n is the timer's decimal setting value, and T is the clock cycle of the timer.
X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT T
Example 8: Flashing circuit

The following figure shows an oscillating circuit of a type commonly used to cause an
indicator light to flash or a buzzers to buzz. It uses two timers to control the On and Off
time of Y1 coil. Here n1, n2 are the timing set values of T1 and T2, and T is the clock
cycle of the timer.
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0 n2*T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1 n1*T
Y1
Example 9: Triggering circuit

In the figure below, a command consisting of the differential of the rising edge of X0
causes coil M0 to generate a single pulse for ∆T (length of one scanning cycle), and coil
Y1 is electrified during this scanning cycle. Coil M0 loses power during the next scanning
cycle, and NC contact M0 and NC contact Y1 are both closed. This causes coil Y1 to stay
in an electrified state until there is another rising edge in input X0, which again causes the
electrification of coil M0 and the start of another scanning cycle, while also causing coil
Y1 to lose power, etc. The sequence of these actions can be seen in the figure below.
This type of circuit is commonly used to enable one input to perform two actions in
alternation. It can be seen from the time sequence in the figure below that when input X0
is a square wave signal with a period of T, the output of coil Y1 will be a square wave
signal with a period of 2T.
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1
16-22
Example 10: Delay circuit

When input X0 is On, because the corresponding NC contact will be Off, the timer T10
will be in no power status, and output coil Y1 will be electrified. T10 will receive power
and begin timing only after input X0 is Off, and output coil Y1 will be delayed for 100 sec.
(K1000*0.1 sec. =100 sec.) before losing power; please refer to the sequence of actions
in the figure below.
Example 11: The open/close delay circuit is composed of two timers; output Y4 will have a delay
whether input X0 is On or Off.
Example 12: Extended timing circuit

In the circuit in the figure on the left, the total delay time from the moment input X0
closes to the time output Y1 is electrified is (n1+n2)*T, where T is the clock cycle.
Timers: T11, T12; clock cycle: T.
X0
TMR T11 Kn1 X0
T11 n1*T
TMR T12 Kn2 T11
T12 n2*T
Y1
T12
Y1
(n1+n2)*T
16-23
16-5 Various PLC device functions

Item Specifications Notes
Algorithmic control Program stored internally, alternating back-and-forth
method scanning method
When it starts again after ending (after execution to
Input/output
the END command), the input/output has an immediate
control method
refresh command
Algorithmic Applications command (1-several
Basic commands (several us);
processing speed tens of us)
Programming
Command + ladder diagram
language
Program capacity 2000 steps
This number of contacts
Input/output constitutes MS300 input/output
Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4
terminal contacts; other devices have
different correspondences
Type Device Item Range Function

X0~X17, 16 points, octal
Corresponds to external
X External input relay Total
number input point
32
Y0~Y17, 16 points, octal
Corresponds to external
Y External output relay points
number output point
General Use M0~M799, 800 points
Total
Auxiliary Contact can switch On/Off
M Special 1080
M1000~M1279, 280
Relay within the program
Relay bit form
purpose points points

Timers referred to by the
Total TMR command; contact of
T Timer 100ms timer T0~T79, 80 points 80 the T with the same
points number will go On when
the time is reached
Counter referred to by the
Total CNT command; contact of
16-bit counter,
C Counter C0~C39, 40 points 40 the C with the same
general use
points number will go On when
the count is reached
The contact will be On
T Current timer value T0~T79, 80 points
when the time is reached
Register word data
The counter contact will

C Current counter value C0~C39, 16-bit counter 40 points come On when the count is
reached
Used to
maintain D0~D9, 10 points
Total
Data power Off Used as data storage
D 420
Register D10~D199, 190 points memory area
Special points
D1000~D1219, 220
purpose
points
Single-byte Setting Range: K-32,768 ~ K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte Setting Range: K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte Setting Range:H0000 ~ HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte Setting Range: H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF
Serial communications port (program
RS-485/keypad port
write/read)
Input/output Built-in three analog inputs and two analog outputs
High-speed counting Built-in a (MI7) 32-bit high-speed counter
Optional
Function expansion module --
Accessories
Communication Expansion Optional
EMC-COP01,(CANopen)
Module Accessories
16-24
16-5-1 Introduction to device functions
Input/output contact functions
Input contact X functions: Input contact X is connected with an input device, and reads input signals
entering the PLC. The number of times that contact A or B of input contact X is used in the program is
not subject to restrictions. The On/Off state of input contact X will change as the input device
switches On and Off; a peripheral device (WPLSoft) cannot be used to force contact X On or Off.
Output contact Y functions
The job of output contact Y is to send an On/Off signal to drive the load connected with output contact
Y. Output contacts consist of two types: relays and transistors. While number of times that contact a
or b of each output contact Y is used in the program is not subject to restrictions, it is recommended
that the number of output coil Y be used only once in a program, otherwise the right to determine the
output state when the PLC performs program scanning will be assigned to the program's final output
Y circuit.
Numerical value, constant [K] / [H]

Single-byte K-32,768 ~ K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte H0000 ~ HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF
The PLC can use five types of numerical values to implement calculations based on its control tasks;
the following is an explanation of the missions and functions of different numerical values.
Binary Number, BIN
The PLC's numerical operations and memory employ binary numbers. Binary nibbles and relevant
terms are explained as follows:
Bit Bits are the fundamental units of binary values, and have a state of either 1 or 0
Comprised of a series of 4 bits (such as b3-b0); can be used to express a
Nibble
one-nibble decimal number 0-9 or hexadecimal number: 0-F.
Comprised of a series of two nibbles (i.e. 8 bits, b7-b0); can express a
Byte
hexadecimal number: 00-FF.
Comprised of a series of two bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15-b0); can express a
Word
hexadecimal number with four nibbles: 0000-FFFF.
Comprised of a series of two words (i.e. 32 bits, b31-b0); can express a
Double Word
hexadecimal number with eight nibbles: 00000000-FFFFFFFF
16-25
Relationship between bits, digits, nibbles, words, and double words in a binary system
(see figure below):
DW Double Word
W1 W0 Word
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte
NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble
Bit
Octal Number, OCT
The external input and output terminals of a DVP-PLC are numbered using octal numbers
Example: External input: X0~X7，X10~X17…(Device number table);
External output: Y0~Y7，Y10~Y17…(Device number table)
Decimal Number, DEC
Decimal numbers are used for the following purposes in a PLC system:
 The setting values of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
 The numbers of devices including M, T, C, or D, such as M10 or T30. (device number)
 Used as a operand in an application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
Binary Code Decimal, BCD
Uses one nibble or 4 bits to express the data in a decimal number; a series of 16 bits can therefore
express a decimal number with 4 nibbles. Chiefly used to read the input value of a fingerwheel
numerical switch input or output a numerical value to a seven-segment display drive.
Hexadecimal Number, HEX
Applications of hexadecimal numbers in a PLC system: Used as operands in application commands,

such as MOV H1A2B D0. (H constant)
Constant K
Decimal numbers are usually prefixed with a "K" in a PLC system, such as K100. This indicates that it
is a decimal number with a numerical value of 100.
Exceptions: K can be combined with bit device X, Y, M, or S to produce data in the form of a nibble,
byte, word, or double word, such as in the case of K2Y10 or K4M100. Here K1
represents a 4-bit combination, and K2-K4 variously represent 8-, 12-, and 16-bit
combinations.
Constant H
Hexadecimal numbers are usually prefixed with the letter "H" in a PLC system, such as in the case of
H100, which indicates a hexadecimal number with a numerical value of 100.
16-26
Functions of auxiliary relays

Like an output relay Y, an auxiliary relay M has an output coil and contacts A and B, and the number
of times they can be used in a program is unrestricted. Users can use an auxiliary relay M to
configure the control circuit, but cannot use it to directly drive an external load. Auxiliary relays have
the following two types of characteristics:
Ordinary auxiliary relays: Ordinary auxiliary relays will all revert to the Off state if a power outage
occurs while the PLC is running, and will remain in the Off state if power is
again turned down.
Special purpose auxiliary relays: Each special purpose auxiliary relay has its own specific use. Do not
use any undefined special purpose auxiliary relays.
Timer functions
Timers take 100 ms as their timing units. When the timing method is an upper time limit, when the
current timer value = set value, power will be sent to the output coil. Timer setting values consist of
decimal K values, and the data register D can also serve as a setting value.
Actual timer setting time = timing units * set value
Counter features
Item 16-bit counter
Type General Type
CT Direction: Score:
Setting 0~32,767
Designation of set value Constant K or data register D
Change in current value When the count reaches the set value, there is no longer a count
Output contact When the count reaches the set value, the contact comes On and stays On
The current value reverts to 0 when an RST command is executed, and the
Reset
contact reverts to Off
Contact actuation All are actuated after the end of scanning
Counter functions
When a counter's counting pulse input signal goes Off→On, if the counter's current value is equal to
the set value, the output coil will come On. The setting value will be a decimal K values, and the data
register D can also serve as a setting value.
16-bit counter:
 16-bit counter setting range: K0-K32,767. (when K0 and K1 are identical, the output contact will
immediately be On during the first count.)
 The current counter value will be cleared from an ordinary counter when power is shut off to the
PLC.
 If the MOV command or WPLSoft is used to transmit a value greater than the set value to the
C0 current value register, when the next X1 goes from Off→On, the C0 counter contact will
change to On, and the current value will change to the set value.
 A counter's setting value may be directly set using a constant K or indirectly set using the value
in register D (not including special data registers D1000- D1199 or D2000 ~ D2799).
 If the set value employs a constant K, it may only be a positive number; the set value may be
either a positive or negative number if the value in data register D is used. The current counter
value will change from 32,767 to -32,768 as the count continues to accumulate.
16-27
Example
LD X0
X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5
CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0 Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X0=On and the RST command is X0
executed, the current value of C0 will

X1
revert to 0, and the output contact will
revert to Off. 5
4
settings
2. When X1 changes from Off→On, the C0 3
present 2
current value of the counter will execute value 1
0 0
an increase (add one).
3. When the count of counter C0 reaches the Contacts Y0, C0
set value K5, the contact C0 will come On,

and the current value of C0= set value
=K5. Afterwards, signal C0 triggered by X1
cannot be received, and the current value
of C0 will remain K5.
16-28
16-5-2 Introduction to special relay functions (special M)
R/W items: RO: read only function; RW: read and write function
Special
Description of Function R/W *
M
M1000 Operates monitor NO contact (contact a). NO while RUN, contact a. This contact
RO
is On while in the RUN state.
M1001 Operates monitor NC contact (contact b). NC while RUN, contact b. This contact is
RO
Off while in the RUN state.
M1002 Initiates a forward (the instant RUN is On) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a. Produces
RO
a forward pulse the moment RUN begins; its width = scan cycle
M1003 Initiates a reverse (the instant RUN is Off) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a. Produces
RO
a reverse pulse the moment RUN ends; the pulse width = scan cycle
M1004 Reserved RO
M1005 Drive malfunction instructions RO
M1006 Drive has no output RO
M1007 Drive direction FWD(0)/REV(1) RO
M1008
~ -- --
M1010
M1011 10 ms clock pulse ，5ms On/5ms Off RO
M1012 100 ms clock pulse ，50ms On / 50ms Off RO
M1013 1 sec. clock pulse ，0.5s On / 0.5s Off RO
M1014 1 min. clock pulse ，30s On / 30s Off RO
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1016 Parameter read/write error RO
M1017 Parameter write successful RO
M1018 -- --
M1019 -- --
M1020 Zero flag RO
M1021 Borrow flag RO
M1022 Carry flag RO
M1023 Divisor is 0 RO
M1024 -- --
Drive frequency = set frequency (ON)
M1025 RW
Drive frequency =0 (OFF)
M1026 Drive operating direction FWD(OFF)/REV(ON) RW
M1027 Drive Reset RW
M1028 -- --
M1029 -- --
M1030 -- --
M1031 -- --
M1032 -- --
M1033 -- --
M1034 -- --
M1035 -- --
M1036 -- --
M1037 -- --
M1038 MI7 count begins RW
M1039 Reset MI7 count value RW
M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) RW
M1041 -- --
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1043 -- --
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
16-29
Special
M
M1045 --
~ --
M1047
M1048 -- --
M1049 -- --
M1050 -- --
M1051 -- --
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
M1053 -- --
M1054 -- --
M1055 -- --
M1056 Hardware already has power (Servo On Ready) RO
M1057 -- --
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
16-5-3 Introduction to special register functions (special D)
Special
D
D1000 -- --
D1001 Device system program version RO
D1002 Program capacity RO
D1003 Total program memory content RO
D1004
~ -- --
D1009
D1010 Current scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1011 Minimum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1012 Maximum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1013
~ -- --
D1017
D1018 Current integral value RO
D1019 Compulsory setting of PID I integral RW
D1020 Output frequency (0.000~600.00Hz) RO
D1021 Output current (####.#A) RO
D1022 -- --
Communication expansion card number
0：No expansion card
1：DeviceNet Slave
D1023 2：Profibus-DP Slave RO
3：CANopen Slave
4：Modbus-TCP Slave
5：EtherNet/IP Slave
D1024
~ -- --
D1026
D1027 PID calculation frequency command (frequency command after PID calculation) RO
D1028 AVI value (0.00~100.00%) RO
D1029 ACI value (0.0~100.00%) RO
D1030 -- --
D1031
~ -- --
D1034
16-30
Special
D
D1035 VR value (0.0~100.00%) RO
D1036 Servo error bit RO
D1037 Drive output frequency RO
D1038 DC BUS voltage RO
D1039 Output voltage RO
D1040 Analog output value AFM1(-100.00~100.00%) RW
D1041
~ -- --
D1042
Can be user-defined (will be displayed on panel when Pr. 00-04 is set as 28; RW
D1043
display method is C xxx)
D1044 -- -
D1045 -- --
D1046
~ -- --
D1049
Actual Operation Mode
0：Speed
D1050 1：Position RO
2：Torque
3：Homing Origin
D1051 -- --
D1052 -- --
D1053 -- --
D1054 MI7 current calculated count value (L Word) RO
D1055 MI7 current calculated count value (H Word) RO
D1056 Rotational speed corresponding to MI7 RO
D1057 MI7's rotational speed ratio RW
D1058 MI7 refresh rate (ms) corresponding to rotational speed RW
D1059 Number of nibbles of rotational speed corresponding to MI7 (0-3) RW
Operation Mode setting
D1060 RW
0: Speed
D1061 485 COM1 communications time out time (ms) RW
D1062 Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) RW
D1063 -- --
D1064 -- --
D1065 -- --
D1066 -- --
D1067 -- --
D1068 -- --
D1069 -- --
D1100 Target frequency RO
D1101 Target frequency (must be operating) RO
D1102 Reference frequency RO
D1103 -- --
D1104 -- --
D1105 -- --
D1106 -- --
D1107 π(Pi) Low word RO
D1108 π(Pi) High word RO
D1109 Random number RO
16-31
16-5-4 PLC Communication address

Device Range Type Address (Hex)
X 00~17 (Octal) bit 0400~040FF
Y 00~17 (Octal) bit 0500~050F
T 00~79 bit/word 0600~064F
M 000~799 bit 0800~0B1F
M 1000~1279 bit 0BE8~0CFF
C 0~39 bit/word 0E00~0E27
D 00~199 word 1000~10C7
D 1000~ 1219 word 13E8~ 14C3
Command code that can be used

Function Code Description of Function Function target
H1 Coil status read Y,M,T,C
H2 Input status read X,Y,M,T,C
H3 Read single unit of data T,C,D
H5 Compulsory single coil status change Y,M,T,C
H6 Write single unit of data T,C,D
HF Compulsory multiple coil status change Y,M,T,C
H10 Write multiple units of data T,C,D
NOTE
When PLC functions have been activated, the MS300 can match PLC and drive parameters; this method employs different
addresses, drives (default station number is 1, PLC sets station number as 2)
16-32
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window

16-6-1 Overview of basic commands
 Ordinary commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LD Load contact A X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
LDI Load contact B X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
AND Connect contact A in series X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ANI Connect contact B in series X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
OR Connect contact A in parallel X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ORI Connect contact B in parallel X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ANB Series circuit block N/A 0.3
ORB Parallel circuit block N/A 0.3
MPS Save to stack N/A 0.3
MRD Stack read (pointer does not change) N/A 0.3
MPP Read stack N/A 0.3
 Output command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
OUT Drive coil Y、M 1
SET Action continues (ON) Y、M 1
RST Clear contact or register Y、M、T、C、D 1.2
 Timer, counter
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D commands 1.1
CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D (16-bit) 0.5
 Main control command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
MC Common series contact connection N0~N7 0.4
MCR Common series contact release N0~N7 0.4
 Contact rising edge/falling edge detection command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LDP Start of forward edge detection action X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
 Upper/lower differential output commands

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
PLS Upper differential output Y、M 1.2
PLF Lower differential output Y、M 1.2
16-33
 Stop command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
END Program conclusion N/A 0.2
 Other commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
NOP No action N/A 0.2
INV Inverse of operation results N/A 0.2
P Index P 0.3
16-34
16-6-2 Detailed explanation of basic commands
Command Function
LD Load contact A
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The LD command is used for contact A starting at the left busbar or contact A starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Description:
X0 X1
Y1 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
Create series
AND X1 connection to contact A
of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Function
LDI Load contact B
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The LDI command is used for contact B starting at the left busbar or contact B starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
X0 X1
Y1 LDI X0 Load Contact B of X0
Create series
of X1
Command Function
AND Connect contact A in series
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The AND command is used to create a series connection to contact A; first reads
current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before
contact in order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X1 X0 LDI X1 Load Contact B of X1
Y1 Create series
of X0
16-35
Command Function
ANI Connect contact B in series
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ANI command is used to create a series connection to contact B; its function is to
first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results
before contact in order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X1 X0
Create series
ANI X0 connection to contact B
of X0
Command Function
OR Connect contact A in parallel
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The OR command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact a; its function is
to first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation
results before contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X0
X1 Create series
OR X1 connection to contact A
of X1
Command Function
ORI Connect contact B in parallel
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ORI command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact B; its function
is to first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation
results before contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X0
X1 Create series
ORI X1 connection to contact B
of X1
16-36
Command Function
ANB Series circuit block
Operand N/A
ANB performs an "AND" operation on the previously saved logic results and the
current cumulative register content.
X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
ANB
Y1 Establish parallel
ORI X2 connection to contact B
X2 X3 of X2
LDI X1 Load Contact B of X1
Block A Block B Establish parallel
OR X3 connection to contact A
of X3
ANB Series circuit block
Command Function
ORB Parallel circuit block
Operand N/A
ORB performs an "OR" operation on the previously saved logic results and the current
cumulative register content.
X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
ANI X1 connection to contact B
X2 X3 of X1
ORB
LDI X2 Load Contact B of X2
Block B Establish parallel
of X3
ORB Parallel circuit block
Command Function
MPS Save to stack
Operand N/A
Save current content of cumulative register to the stack. (Add one to stack pointer)
Command Function
MRD Read stack (pointer does not change)
Operand N/A
Reads stack content and saves to cumulative register. (Stack pointer does not
change)
16-37
Command Function
MPP Read stack
Operand N/A
Retrieves result of previously-save logical operation from the stack, and saves to
cumulative register. (Subtract one from stack pointer)
MPS LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
X0 X1 MPS Save to stack
Y1 Create series connection
AND X1
to contact A of X1
X2
MRD M0 Read stack (pointer does
MRD
not change)
Y2 Create series connection
AND X2
MPP to contact A of X2
END OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
MPP Read stack
END Program conclusion
Command Function
OUT Drive coil
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－   －－－
Outputs result of logical operation before OUT command to the designated element.
Coil contact action:
Out command
Result: Access Point:
Coil
Contact A (NO) Contact B (NC)
FALSE Off Not conducting Conducting
TRUE On Conducting Not conducting

X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact B of X0
of X1
Command Function
SET Action continues (ON)
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－   －－－
When the SET command is driven, the designated element will be set as On, and will
be maintained in an On state, regardless of whether the SET command is still driven.
The RST command can be used to set the element as Off.
X0 Y0 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
SET Y1 Establish parallel
AN Y0 connection to contact B
of Y0
SET Y1 Action continues (ON)
16-38
Command Function
RST Clear contact or register
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－     
When the RST command is driven, the action of the designated element will be as
follows:
Element Mode
Y, M Both coil and contact will be set as Off.
The current timing or count value will be set as 0, and both the coil
T, C
and contact ill be set as Off.
D The content value will be set as 0.
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
X0 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
RST Y5 Clear contact or
RST Y5
register
Command Function
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0~T159，K0~K32,767
Operand
T-D T0~T159，D0~D399
When the TMR command is executed, the designated timer coil will be electrified, and
the timer will begin timing. The contact's action will be as follows when the timing
value reaches the designated set value (timing value >= set value):
NO (Normally Open) contact Closed
NC (Normally Close) contact Open
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
TMR T5 K1000 T5 timer
TMR T5 K1000
Set value as K1000
Command Function
CNT 16-bit counter
C-K C0~C79，K0~K32,767
Operand
C-D C0~C79，D0~D399
When the CNT command is executed from Off→On, this indicates that the designated
counter coil goes from no power → electrified, and 1 will be added to the counter's
count value; when the count reaches the designated value (count value = set value),
the contact will have the following action:
NO (Normally Open) contact Closed
NC (Normally Close) contact Open
After the count value has been reached, the contact and count value will both remain
unchanged even if there is continued count pulse input. Please use the RST
command if you wish to restart or clear the count.
CNT C2 K100 C2counter
CNT C2 K100
Set value as K100
16-39
Command Function
MC/MCR Connect/release a common series contact
Operand N0~N7
MC is the main control initiation command, and any commands between MC and
MCR will be executed normally. When the MC command is Off, any commands
between MC and MCR will act as follows:
Determination of commands Description
The timing value will revert to 0, the coil will lose
Ordinary timer
power, and the contact will not operate
The coil will lose power, and the count value and
Counter
contact will stay in their current state
Coil driven by OUT command None receive power
Elements driven by SET, RST
Will remain in their current state
commands
Applications commands None are actuated
MCR is the main control stop command, and is placed at the end of the main control
program. There may not be any contact commands before the MCR command.
The MC-MCR main control program commands support a nested program structure
with a maximum only 8 levels; use in the order N0-N7, please refer to the following
program:
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0
MC N0 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
Connection of N0 common series
X1 MC N0
contact
Y0
LD X1 Load Contact A of X1
X2 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
MC N1
:
Y1
MC N1
contact
MCR N1 LD X3 Load Contact A of X3
MCR N0 :
X10 MCR N1 Release N1 common series contact
MC N0 :
X11 MCR N0 Release N0 common series contact
Y10 :
MCR N0 MC N0
contact
:
MCR N0 Release N0 common series contact
16-40
Command Function
LDP Start of forward edge detection action
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The LDP command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is
to save current content, while also saving the detected state of the rising edge of the
contact to the cumulative register.
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0 X1
Y1 Start of X0 forward edge detection
LDP X0
action
Create series connection to
AND X1
contact A of X1
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope
of usage of each operand.
A rising edge contact will be TRUE after power is turned on if the rising edge contact is
On before power is turned on to the PLC.
Command Function
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The LDF command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is
to save current content while also saving the detected state of the falling edge of the
contact to the cumulative register.
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
X0 X1 Start of X0 reverse
LDF X0
Y1 edge detection action
Create series
of X1
Command Function
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ANDP command used for a contact rising edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Forward edge
ANDP X1 detection series
connection
16-41
Command Function
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ANDF command is used for a contact falling edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Reverse edge
ANDF X1 detection series
connection
Command Function
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ORP command is used for a contact rising edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 X1 Forward edge
ORP X1 detection parallel
connection
Command Function
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
     －
The ORF command is used for contact falling edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 Reverse edge
X1
ORF X1 detection parallel
connection
16-42
Command Function
PLS Upper differential output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－   －－－
Upper differential output commands. When X0=Off→On (positive edge-triggered), the
PLS command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with a pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLS M0 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
M0 M0 Upper differential
PLS M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact A of M0
X0 Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Command Function
PLF Lower differential output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－   －－－
Lower differential output command. When X0= On→Off (negative edge-triggered), the
PLF command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLF M0 LD X0 Load Contact A of X0
M0 M0 Lower differential
PLF M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact A of M0
X0 Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Command Function
END Program conclusion
Operand N/A
An END command must be added to the end of a ladder diagram program or
command program. The PLC will scan from address 0 to the END command, and will
return to address 0 and begins scanning again after execution.
16-43
Command Function
NOP No action
Operand N/A
The command NOP does not perform any operation in the program. Because
execution of this command will retain the original logical operation results, it can be
used in the following situation: the NOP command can be used instead of a command
that is deleted without changing the program length.
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is LD X0 Load Contact B of X0
displayed.
NOP No action
X0
NOP Y1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Function
INV Inverse of operation results
Operand N/A
Saves the result of the logic inversion operation prior to the INV command in the
cumulative register.
X0
Inverse of operation
INV
results
Command Function
P Index
Operand P0~P255
Pointer P is used to subprogram call command API 01 CALL. Use does not require
starting from zero, but the number cannot be used repeatedly, otherwise an
unpredictable error will occur.
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
CALL P10 CALL P10 Call command CALL to
P10
X1
P10 Y1 ：
P10 Pointer P10
16-44
16-6-3 Overview of application commands
Command code P STEPS

Classification API Function
16 bit 32 bit command 16bit 32bit
01 CALL -  Call subprogram 3 -
Circuit control 2 SRET - - Conclusion of subprogram 1 -
06 FEND - - Conclusion a main program 1 -
10 CMP DCMP  Compares set output 7 13
Send 11 ZCP DZCP  Range comparison 9 17
comparison 12 MOV DMOV  Data movement 5 9
15 BMOV –  Send all 7 –
20 ADD DADD  BIN addition 7 13
21 SUB DSUB  BIN subtraction 7 13
Four logical 22 MUL DMUL  BIN multiplication 7 13
operations 23 DIV DDIV  BIN division 7 13
24 INC DINC  BIN add one 3 5
25 DEC DDEC  BIN subtract one 3 5
Rotational 30 ROR DROR  Right rotation 5 –
displacement 31 ROL DROL  Left rotation 5 –
40 ZRST –  Clear range 5 -
Data Process BIN whole number → binary
49 – DFLT  floating point number - 9
transformation
communication 150 MODRW –  MODBUS read/write 7 –
Comparison of binary floating

110 – DECMP  – 13
point numbers
Comparison of binary floating
111 – DEZCP  – 17
point number range
116 – DRAD  Angle → Diameter – 9
117 – DDEG  Diameter → angle – 9
Binary floating point number
120 – DEADD  – 13
addition
121 – DESUB  – 13
subtraction
122 – DEMUL  – 13
multiplication
123 – DEDIV  – 13
Floating point operation
division
124 – DEXP  – 9
obtain exponent
125 – DLN  – 9
obtain logarithm
127 – DESQR  – 9
find square root
Binary floating point number →
129 – DINT  BIN whole number – 9
transformation
130 – DSIN  – 9
SIN operation
131 – DCOS  – 9
COS operation
132 – DTAN  – 9
TAN operation
133 – DASIN  – 9
ASIN operation
134 – DACOS  – 9
ACOS operation
135 – DATAN  – 9
ATAN operation
16-45

136 – DSINH  – 9
SINH operation
operation
Floating Binary floating point number

point
137 – DCOSH  – 9
COSH operation
138 – DTANH  – 9
TANH operation
160 TCMP –  Compare calendar data 11 –
161 TZCP –  Compare calendar data range 9 –
Calendar 162 TADD –  Calendar data addition 7 –
163 TSUB –  Calendar data subtraction 7 –
166 TRD –  Calendar data read 3 –
170 GRY DGRY  BIN→GRY code transformation 5 9
GRAY code GRY code →BIN
171 GBIN DGBIN  5 9
transformation
Contact form logical operation
215 LD& DLD& - 5 9
LD#
216 LD| DLD| - 5 9
LD#

217 LD^ DLD^ - 5 9
LD#
218 AND& DAND& - 5 9
AND#
219 ANDl DANDl - 5 9
AND#
220 AND^ DAND^ - 5 9
AND#
221 OR& DOR& - 5 9
OR#
222 OR| DOR| - 5 9
OR#
223 OR^ DOR^ - 5 9
OR#
224 LD＝ DLD＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
225 LD＞ DLD＞ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
226 LD＜ DLD＜ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
Contact form compare command
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9

230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ - Contact form compare LD* 5 9
232 AND＝ DAND＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
233 AND＞ DAND＞ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
234 AND＜ DAND＜ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ - Contact form compare AND* 5 9
240 OR＝ DOR＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
241 OR＞ DOR＞ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
242 OR＜ DOR＜ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ - Contact form compare OR* 5 9
16-46

Floating point number contact
point contact 275 - FLD＝ - - 9
Floating form compare LD*
form
276 - FLD＞ - - 9
form compare LD*
277 - FLD＜ - - 9
form compare LD*
278 - FLD＜＞ - - 9
form compare LD*
279 - FLD＜＝ - - 9
form compare LD*
280 - FLD＞＝ - - 9
form compare LD*
281 - FAND＝ - - 9
form compare AND*
282 - FAND＞ - - 9
form compare AND*
283 - FAND＜ - - 9
form compare AND*
Compare command

284 - FAND＜＞ - - 9
form compare AND*
285 - FAND＜＝ - - 9
form compare AND*
286 - FAND＞＝ - - 9
form compare AND*
287 - FOR＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
288 - FOR＞ - - 9
form compare OR*
289 - FOR＜ - - 9
form compare OR*
290 - FOR＜＞ - - 9
form compare OR*
291 - FOR＜＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
292 - FOR＞＝ - - 9
form compare OR*
139 RPR –  Read servo parameter 5 –
140 WPR –  Write servo parameter 5 –
141 FPID –  Drive PID control mode 9 –
Drive special command
142 FREQ –  Drive torque control mode 7 –

262 – DPOS  Set target - 5
263 TORQ –  Set target torque 5 -
 Read CANopen slave station
261 CANRX – 9 -
data
 Write CANopen slave station
264 CANTX – 9 -
data
 Refresh special
265 CANFLS – 3 -
D corresponding to CANopen
320 ICOMR DICOMR  Internal communications read 9 17
321 ICOMW DICOMW  Internal communications write 9 17
16-47
16-6-4 Detailed explanation of applications commands
API
CALL S Call subprogram
01 P
Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP)
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CALL Continuous CALLP Pulse
execution type execution type
Notes on operand usage: 32-bit command

The S operand can designate P －－－－
MS300 series device: The S operand can designate P0-P63
Flag signal: none
 S: Call subprogram pointer.

 Write the subprogram after the FEND command.
 The subprogram must end after the SRET command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
API
SRET － Conclusion of subprogram
02 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 A contact-driven command is not needed. Automatically returns next

command after CALL command
 Indicates end of subprogram. After end of subprogram, SRET returns to main
program, and executes next command after the original call subprogram CALL
command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
16-48
API
FEND － Conclusion a main program
06
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 This command indicates the end of the main program. It is the same as
the END command when the PLC executes this command.
 The CALL command program must be written after the FEND command,
and the SRET command added to the end of the subprogram.
 When using the FEND command, an END command is also needed.
However, the END command must be placed at the end, after the main
program and subprogram.
16-49
API
CMP S1 S2 D Compares set output
10 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CMP Continuous CMPP Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command (13 STEP)
D ＊＊ DCMP Continuous DCMPP Pulse
Notes on operand usage:
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
 S1 : Compare value 1. S2 : Compare value 2. D : Results of comparison.
 Compares the size of the content of operand S1 and S2 ; the results of
comparison are expressed in D .

 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is Y0, it automatically occupies Y0, Y1 and Y2.
 When X10=On, the CMP command executes, and Y0, Y1 or Y2 will be On. When
X10=Off, the CMP command will not execute, and the state of Y0, Y1 and Y2 will
remain in the state prior to X10=Off.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of Y0-Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.

X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-50
API
ZCP S1 S2 S D Range comparison
11 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZCP Continuous ZCPP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ DZCP Continuous DZCPP Pulse
D ＊＊ execution type execution type
The content value of operand S1 is less than the content value of Flag signal: none
S2 operand
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
 S1 : Lower limit of range comparison. S2 : Upper limit of range comparison.

S : Comparative value. D : Results of comparison.
 When the comparative value S is compared with the lower limit S1 and
upper limitS2 , the results of comparison are expressed in D .
 When lower limit S1 > upper limit S2 , the command will use the lower limit
S1 to perform comparison with the upper and lower limit.
 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is M0, it automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.
 When X0=On, the ZCP command executes, and M0, M1 or M2 will be On. When
X0=Off, the ZCP command will not execute, and the state of M0, M1 or M2 will
remain in the state prior to X0=Off.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of M0-M2.
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 =
< C10 =
< K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.
X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-51
API
MOV S D Data movement
12 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV Continuous MOVP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none
DMOV Continuous DMOVP Pulse
Flag signal:
 S : Data source. D : Destination of data movement.
 When this command is executed, the content of S content will be directly

moved to D . When the command is not executed, the content of D will not
change.
 When X0=Off, the content of D10 will not change; if X0=On, the value K10 will be
sent to data register D10.
 When X1=Off, the content of D10 will not change; if X1=On, the current value of
T0 will be sent to data register D10.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
16-52
API
BMOV S D n Send all
15 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BMOV Continuous BMOVP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D ＊＊＊＊＊
n ＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command
Notes on operand usage: －－－－
n operand scope n ＝ 1 to 512
Flag signal: none
 S : Initiate source device. D : Initiate destination device. n : Send block

length.
 The content of n registers starting from the initial number of the device designated
by S will be sent to the n registers starting from the initial number of the
device designated by n ; if the number of points referred to by n exceeds the
range used by that device, only points within the valid range will be sent.
 When X10=On, the content of registers D0-D3 will be sent to the four registers
D20 to D23.
 If the designated bit devices KnX, KnY, and KnM are sent, S and D must
have the same number of nibbles, which implies that n must be identical.
 In order to prevent overlap between the transmission addresses of two operands,

which would cause confusion, make sure that the addresses designated by the
two operands have different sizes, as shown below:
When S > D , send in the order → →.
X10
D20 1 D19
BMOV D20 D19 K3 2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
When S < D , send in the order → →.
X11
D10 3 D11
BMOV D10 D11 K3 2
D11 D12
1
D12 D13
16-53
API
ADD S1 S2 D BIN addition
20 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD Continuous ADDP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DADD Continuous DADDP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Augend. S2 : Addend. D : Sum.
 Using two data sources: The result of adding S1 and S2 using the BIN
method will be stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic addition operations. (for instance:
3+(-9)=-6)
 Flag changes connected with the addition.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be On.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
On.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
On.
 16-bit BIN addition: When X0=On, the result of the content of addend D0 plus the
content of augend D10 will exist in the content of D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
 Relationship between flag actions and negative/positive numbers:

16 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 1 32,767 0 1 2
The highest bit The highest bit

Borrow flag of the data of the data Carry flag
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)
32 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648 -1, 0 1 2,147,483,647 0 1 2
The highest bit The highest bit

Borrow flag Carry flag
of the data of the data
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)
16-54
API
SUB S1 S2 D BIN subtraction
21 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUB Continuous SUBP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none DSUB DSUBP
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Minuend. S2 : Subtrahend. D : Difference.
 Using two data sources: The result of subtraction of S1 and S2 using the
BIN method is stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic subtraction operations.
 Flag changes connected with subtraction.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be On.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
On.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
On.
 16-bit BIN subtraction: When X0=On, the content of D10 is subtracted from the
content of D0, and the difference is stored in D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
16-55
API
MUL S1 S2 D BIN multiplication
22 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MUL Continuous MULP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DMUL Continuous DMULP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Multiplicand. S2 : Multiplier. D : Product.
 Using two data sources: When S1 and S2 are multiplied using the BIN
method, the product is stored in D .
16-bit BIN multiplication operation:
S1 S2 D +1 D
b15..........b0 b15..........b0 b31..........b16b15..............b0

X =
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.
Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D is a bit device, K1-K4 can be designated as a hexadecimal number,

which will occupy 2 consecutive units.
 When 16-bit DO is multiplied by 16-bit D10, the result will be a 32-bit product; the
upper 16 bits will be stored in D21, and the lower 16 bits will be stored in D20.
Whether the bit at the farthest left is Off or On will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0
16-56
API
DIV S1 S2 D BIN division
23 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DIV Continuous DIVP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DDIV Continuous DDIVP Pulse
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Dividend. S2 : Divisor. D : Quotient and remainder.
 Using two data sources: The quotient and remainder will be stored in D when
S1 and S2 are subjected to division using the BIN method. The sign bit for
S1 , S2 and D must be kept in mind when performing a 16-bit operation.
16-bit BIN division:
Quotient Remainder
+1
/ =
If D is a bit device, K1-K4 can be designated 16 bits, which will occupy 2
consecutive units and yield the quotient and remainder.
 When X0=On, the quotient resulting from division of dividend D0 by divisor D10
will be placed in D20, and the remainder will be placed in D21. Whether the
highest bit is Off or On will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0
16-57
API
INC D BIN add one
24 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC Continuous INCP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
DINC Continuous DINCP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (INCP).
 During 16-bit operation, 32,767 +1 will change the value to -32,768. During 32 bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 +1 will change the value to -2,147,483,648.
 When X0=Off→On, 1 is automatically added to the content of D0.
X0
INCP D0
16-58
API
DEC D BIN subtract one
25 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DEC Continuous DECP Pulse
DDEC Continuous DDECP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (DECP).
 During 16-bit operation, -32,768 -1 will change the value to 32,767. During 32 bit
operation, -2,147,483,648 -1 will change the value to -2,147,483,647.
 When X0=Off→On, 1 is automatically subtracted from the content of D0.
X0
DECP D0
16-59
API
ROR D n Right rotation
30 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR Continuous RORP Pulse
n ＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DROR Continuous DRORP Pulse
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY execution type execution type
or KnM.
n operand n=K1-K16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated. n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotates the device designated by D to the right n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (RORP).
 When X0=Off→On, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a right rotation; the content of
the bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal
M1022.
X0
RORP D10 K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
* flag
16-60
API
ROL D n Left rotation
31 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROL Continuous ROLP Pulse
n ＊＊
DROL Continuous DROLP Pulse
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY
or KnM.
n operand n=1 to 16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated. n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotates the device designated by D to the left n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (ROLP).
 When X0=Off→On, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a left rotation; the content of the
bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal M1022.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag
16-61
API
ZRST D1 D2 Clear range
40 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZRST Continuous ZRSTP Pulse
D1 ＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D2 ＊＊＊＊＊
Number of operand D1 operand ≤ number of operand D2 －－－－
Operands D1, D2 must designate the same type of device
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none
series for the scope of device usage
 D1: Clear range's initial device. D2: Clear range's final device.
 When the number of operand D1 > number of operand D2, only the operand
designated by D2 will be cleared.
 When X0 is On, auxiliary relays M300 - M399 will be cleared and changed to Off.
 When X1 is On, 16-bit counters C0 - C127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears
and changes contact and coil to Off).
 When X10 is On, timer T0 - T127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears and
changes contact and coil to Off).
 When X3 is On, the data in data registers D0 - D100 will be cleared and set as 0.
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
 Devices can independently use the clear command (RST), such as bit device Y, M
and word device T, C, D.
X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
16-62
API BIN whole number → binary decimal

FLT
49 D P transformation
Bit device Word device 16-bit command
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D －－－－
S ＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9steps)
Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications DFLT Continuous DFLTP Pulse
table for each device in series for the scope of device usage execution type execution type
The operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S: Transformation source device. D: Device storing transformation results.

 Transforms BIN whole number into a binary decimal value.
 When X11 is On, converts the whole number of values corresponding to D0 and
D1 into floating point numbers, which are placed in D20 and D21.
16-63
API
ECMP Comparison of binary floating point numbers
110 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP)
D ＊＊＊ DECMP Continuous DECMPP Pulse
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none
 S1: Comparison of binary floating point numbers value 1. S2: Comparison of
binary floating point numbers value 2. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 When binary floating point number 1 is compared with comparative binary
floating point number 2, the result of comparison (>, =, <) will be expressed in D.
 If the source operand S1 or S2 designates a constant K or H, the command will
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the designated device is M10, it will automatically occupy M10-M12.
 When X0=On, the DECMP command executes, and one of M10-M12 will be On.
When X0=Off, the DECMP command will not execute, and M10-M12 will remain
in the X0=Off state.
 If results in the form of ≥, ≤, or ≠ are needed, they can be obtained by series and
parallel connection of M10-M12.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-64
API
EZCP Comparison of binary floating point number range
111 D P
Bit device Word device
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command
S1 ＊＊＊－－－－
S2 ＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊
DEZCP Continuous DEZCPP Pulse
D ＊＊ execution type execution type
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in
 S1: Lower limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S2: Upper
limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S: Comparison of
binary floating point numerical values. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 Comparison of binary floating point numerical value S with binary floating point
number lower limit value S1 and binary floating point number upper limit value S2;
the results of comparison are expressed in D.
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the lower limit binary floating point number S1 is greater than the upper
limit binary floating point number S2, a command will be issued to perform
comparison with the upper and lower limits using the binary floating point number
lower limit value S1.
 When the designated device is M0, it will automatically occupy M0- M2.
 When X0=On, the DEZCP command will be executed, and one of M0-M2 will be
On. When X0=Off, the EZCP command will not execute, and M0-M2 will continue
in the X0=Off state.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-65
API
RAD Angle → Diameter
116 D P
S ＊＊＊
D ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Notes on operand usage: DRAD Continuous DRADP 脈波執行型
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (angle). D: result of transformation (diameter).

 Uses the following formula to convert angles to radians.
 Diameter ＝Angle × (π/180)
 When X0=On, the angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1, D0)
will be converted to radians and stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting
of a binary floating point number.
X0
DRAD D0 D10
16-66
API
DEG Diameter → angle
117 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DDEG Continuous DDEGP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (diameter). D: results of transformation (angle).

 Uses the following formula to convert radians to an angle.
 Angle ＝Diameter × (180/π)
 When X0=On, angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1, D0) in
radians will be converted to an angle and stored in (D11, D10), with the content
consisting of a binary floating point number.
X0
DDEG D0 D10
RAD value
binary floating point
Angle value (RAD value × 180/ π )

16-67
API
EADD Adding binary floating point numbers
120 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEADD Continuous DEADDP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: addend. S2: augend. D: sum.
 When the content of the register designated by S2 is added to the content of the
register designated by S1, and the result is stored in the register designated by D.
Addition is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in addition.
 In the situation when S1 and S2 designate identical register numbers, if a
"continuous execution" command is employed, when conditional contact is On,
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DEADDP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0=On, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be added to a binary
floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD D0 D2 D10
 When X2 =On, a binary floating point number (D11, D10) will be added to K1234
(which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point number), and
the results stored in (D21, D20).
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20
16-68
API
ESUB Subtraction of binary floating point numbers
121 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DESUB Continuous DESUBP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: minuend. S2: subtrahend. D: difference.
 When the content of the register designated by S2 is subtracted from the content
of the register designated by S1, the difference will be stored in the register
designated by D; subtraction is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in subtraction.
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DESUBP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0=On, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted to a
binary floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB D0 D2 D10
 When X2 =On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
number), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESUB K1234 D0 D10
16-69
API
EMUL Multiplication of binary floating point numbers
122 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEMUL Continuous DEMULP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: multiplicand. S2: multiplier. D: product.
 When the content of the register designated by S1 is multiplied by the content of
the register designated by S2, the product will be stored in the register
designated by D; multiplication is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in
multiplication.
the register will perform multiplication once during each scan. Pulse execution
type commands (DEMULP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X1=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied by the
binary floating point number (D11, D10), and the product will be stored in the
register designated by (D21, D20).
X1
DEMUL D0 D10 D20
 When X2 =On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEMUL K1234 D0 D10
16-70
API
EDIV Division of binary floating point numbers
123 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEDIV Continuous DEDIVP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: dividend. S2: divisor. D: quotient and remainder.
 When the content of the register designated by S1 is divided by the content of the
register designated by S2, the quotient will be stored in the register designated
by D; division is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in division.
 When X1=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will
be divided by the binary floating point number (D11, D10),
and the quotient stored in the register designated by (D21,
D20).
X1
DEDIV D0 D10 D20
 When X2 =On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be divided by
K1,234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEDIV D0 K1234 D10
16-71
API
EXP Binary floating point number obtain exponent
124 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DEXP Continuous DEXPP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e =2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative

value. The designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This
operation is performed using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore
be converted to a floating point number.
 Content of operand D =e S ; e=2.71828, S is the designated source data
 When M0 is On, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating
point number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is On, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11,
D10); its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21,
D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DEXP D10 D20
16-72
API
LN Binary floating point number obtain logarithm
125 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DLN Continuous DLNP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e =2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative

value. The designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This
operation is performed using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore
be converted to a floating point number.
 Content of operand D =e S ; e=2.71828， S is the designated source data
 When M0 is On, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating
point number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is On, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11,
D10); its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21,
D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DLN D10 D20
16-73
API
ESQR Binary floating point number find square root
127 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DESQR Continuous DESQR Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type P execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: source device for which square root is desired D: result of finding square
root.
 When the square root is taken of the content of the register designated by
S, the result is temporarily stored in the register designated by D. Taking
square roots is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
 If the source operand S refers to a constant K or H, the command will
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in the
operation.
 When X0=On, the square root is taken of the binary floating point number (D1,
D0), and the result is stored in the register designated by (D11, D10).
X0
DESQR D0 D10
(D1, D0) (D11, D10)

Binary floating Binary floating
point point
 When X2 =On, the square root is taken of K1,234 (which has been automatically
converted to a binary floating-point number), and the results stored in (D11,
D10).
X2
DESQR K1234 D10
16-74
API Binary floating point number → BIN whole

INT
129 D P number transformation
S ＊
Notes on operand usage: DINT Continuous DINTP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the source device to be transformed. D: results of transformation.

 The content of the register designated by S is transformed from a binary
floating point number format into a BIN whole number, and is temporarily
stored in D. The BIN whole number floating point number will be discarded.
 The action of this command is the opposite of that of command API 49
(FLT).
 When X0=On, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) is transformed into a
BIN whole number, and the result is stored in (D10); the BIN whole number
floating point number will be discarded.
X0
DINT D0 D10
16-75
API
SIN Binary floating point number SIN operation
130 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DSIN Continuous DSINP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series execution type execution type
for the scope of device usage
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the SIN value result.

 S is the designated source in radians.
 The value in radians (RAD) is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 The SIN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
The following figure displays the relationship between the arc and SIN results:
R S: Radian
R: Result (SIN value)
1
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
 When X0=On, the SIN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
binary floating point number.
X0
DSIN D0 D10
16-76
API
COS Binary floating point number COS operation
131 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DCOS Continuous DCOSP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the COS value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is
decided by flag M1018.
 When M1018=Off, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD)
value is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 When M1018=On, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0°≤ angle <360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020=On.
 The COS obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
R S: Radian
R: Result (COS value)
1
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
 When X0=On, the COS value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
floating point number.
X0
DCOS D0 D10
RAD value ( x  180)

D1 D0
COS value
D1 D 10
16-77
API
TAN Binary floating point number TAN operation
132 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DTAN Continuous DTANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the TAN value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is decided by
flag M1018.
 When M1018=Off, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD) value
is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 When M1018=On, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0°≤ angle <360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020=On.
 The TAN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
 When X0=On, the TAN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DTAN D0 D10
RAD value (degree x 180)

D1 D0
TAN value
D 11 D 10
16-78
API
ASIN Binary floating point number ASIN operation
133 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DASIN Continuous DASINP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ASIN value result.
 ASIN value =sin-1
The figure below shows the relationship between input data and result:
R
S: Input (SIN value)

R: Result (ASIN value)
S
-1,0 0 1,0
-
2
 When X0=On, the ASIN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DASIN D0 D10
D1 D0 Binary floating point
ASIN value
D 11 D 10
16-79
API
ACOS Binary floating point number ACOS operation
134 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DACOS Continuous DACOS Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type P execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ACOS value result.
 ACOS value =cos-1
R
S: Input (COS value)

R: Result (ACOS value)
S
-1,0 0 1,0
 When X0=On, the ACOS value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DACOS D0 D10
ACOS value
D 11 D 10
16-80
API
ATAN Binary floating point number ATAN operation
135 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DATAN Continuous DATANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ATAN value result.
 ATAN value =tan-1
R
S: Input (TAN value)
R: Result (ATAN value)
S
0
-2
 When X0=On, the TAN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DATAN D0 D10
ATAN value
D 11 D 10
16-81
API
SINH Binary floating point number SINH operation
136 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DSINH Continuous DSINHP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the SINH value result.
 SINH value =(es-e-s)/2
 When X0=On, the SINH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DSINH D0 D10
D1 D0 binary floating point
SINH value
D 11 D 10
16-82
API
COSH Binary floating point number COSH operation
137 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DCOSH Continuous DCOSHP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the COSH value result.
 COSH value =(es+e-s)/2
 When X0=On, the COSH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DCOSH D0 D10
COSH value
D 11 D 10 binary floating point
16-83
API
TANH Binary floating point number TANH operation
138 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DTANH Continuous DTANHP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the TANH value result.
 tanh value =(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
 When X0=On, the TANH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
floating point number.
X0
DTANH D0 D10
D 11 TANH value
D 10
16-84
API
GRY BIN→GRAY code transformation
170 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C GRY
D Continuous GRYP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGRY Continuous DGRYP Pulse
series for the scope of device usage execution type execution type
 Flag signal: none

 S: source device. D: device storing GRAY code.
 Transforms the content value (BIN value) of the device designated by S to GRAY
code, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
16-bit command: 0~32,767
 32-bit command: 0~2,147,483,647
 When X0=On, the constant K6513 will be transformed to GRAY code and
stored in D0.
16-85
API
GBIN GRAY code →BIN transformation
171 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C DGBIN Continuous GBINP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGBIN Continuous DGBINP Pulse
series for the scope of device usage execution type execution type
 Flag signal: none

 S: source device used to store GRAY code. D: device used to store BIN value after
transformation.
 The GRAY code corresponding to the value of the device designated by S is
transformed into a BIN value, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 This command will transform the value of the absolute position encoder connected
with the PLC's input and (this encoder usually has an output value in the form of
GRAY code) into a BIN value, which is stored in the designated register.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
16-bit command: 0~32,767
 32-bit command: 0~2,147,483,647
 When X20=On, the GRAY code of the absolute position encoder connected
with input points X0 to X17 will be transformed into BIN value and stored in
D10.
X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
X17 K4X0 X0
GRAY CODE 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16-86
API
215~ LD# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation LD#
217 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD# Continuous －－
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DLD# Continuous －－
series for the range of device usage
Flag signal: none
 S1: data source device 1. S2: data source device 2.

 This command performs comparison of the content of S1 and S2; when the result
of comparison is not 0, this command will be activated, but this command will not
be activated when the result of comparison is 0.
 The LD#This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
16-bit 32-bit Conditions for
API No. Conditions for inactivation
commands commands activation
215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0

216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
　 &: logical AND operation.
　 |: logical OR operation.
　 ^: logical XOR operation.
 When the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical AND operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, Y10=On.
 When the content of D200 and D300 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, and X1=On, Y11=On and remains in that state.
LD & C0 C10 Y10
X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y11
16-87
API
218~ AND# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation AND#
220 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND# Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DAND# Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 The AND# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0

219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X0=On and the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and D10 and D0 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and the
result is not equal to 0, Y11=On and remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D200(D201) and 32-bit
register D100(D101) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0 or M3=On, M50=On.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3
16-88
API
221~ OR# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation OR#
223 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR# Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DOR# Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 The OR# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0

222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X1=On or the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y0=On.
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to On, or the content of 32-bit register D10
(D11) and 32-bit register D20 (D21) is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, or the content of the 32-bit counter C235 and the 32-bit
register D200 (D201) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0, M60=On.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
DOR ^ D25 D200
16-89
API
224~ LD※ S1 S2 Contact form compare LD*
230 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧
DLD※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 224 (LD=) as an
example, this command will be activated when the result of comparison is
"equal," and will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The LD* can be used while directly connected with the busbar
Conditions for Conditions for
API No. 16-bit commands 32-bit commands
activation inactivation
224 LD＝ DLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2

225 LD＞ DLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
226 LD＜ DLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When the content of C10 is equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When the content of D200 is greater than K-30, and X1=On, Y11=On and remains
in that state.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
DLD> K678493 C20 M50
M3
16-90
API
232~ AND※ S1 S2 Contact form compare AND*
238 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DAND※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 232 (AND=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The AND* command is a comparison command in series with a contact.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2

233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0=On and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11=On and
remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D0(D11)is less than 678,493,
or M3=On, M50=On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
16-91
API
240~ OR※ S1 S2 Contact form compare OR*
246 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DOR※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 240 (OR=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The OR* command is a compare command in parallel with a contact.
240 OR＝ DOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
241 OR＞ DOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
242 OR＜ DOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0=On and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10=On.
 When X1=Off and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11=On and
remains in that state.
 When X2 =On and the content of the 32-bit register D0(D11)is less than 678,493,
or M3=On, M50=On.
X1
Y0
OR>= K200 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR>= D100 K100000
16-92
API
275~ FLD※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare LD*
280

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FLD※ Continuous －－
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^
execution type
series for the scope of device usage Flag signal: none
 S1: data source device 1. S2: data source device 2.

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FLD=" as an example,
if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated; but it will not
be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FLD* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
instance: F1.2) to the S1, S2 operands, or store floating-point numbers in register
D for use in operations.
 This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
API No. 32-bit commands
275 FLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
276 FLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
277 FLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
278 FLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
279 FLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
280 FLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
　
 When the floating point number of register D200 (D201) is less than or equal
to F1.2, and X1 activated, contact Y21 will be activated and remain in that state.
X1
FLD<= D200 F1.2 SET Y21
16-93
API
281~ FAND※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare AND*
286

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FAND※ Continuous －－
execution type

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FAND=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FAND* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
281 FAND S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
282 FAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
283 FAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
284 FAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
285 FAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
286 FAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
　
 When X1=Off, and the floating point number in register D100 (D101) is not equal
to F1.2, Y21=On and remains in that state.
X1
FAND<> F1.2 D0 SET Y21
16-94
API
287~ FOR※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare OR*
292

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FOR※ Continuous －－
execution type

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FOR=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FOR* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
287 FOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
288 FOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
289 FOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
290 FOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
291 FOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
292 FOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
　
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to "On," or the floating point number in register
D100 (D101) is greater than or equal to F1.234, M60=On.
X2 M30
M60
FOR>= D100 F1.234
16-95
16-6-5 Detailed explanation of drive special applications commands
API
RPR S1 S2 Read servo parameter
139 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR Continuous RPRP Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊ execution type execution type
S2 ＊
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Parameter address of data to be read. S2 : Register where data to be

read is stored.
API
WPR S1 S2 Write servo parameter
140 P
X Y MK H KnX KnY KnM T C D WPR Continuous WPRP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Data to write to specified page. S2 : Parameter address of data to be

written.
 When the data in the M300 drive's parameter H01.00 is read and written to D0,
data from H01.01 will be read and written to D1.
 When M0=On, the content of D10 will be written to the M300 drive Pr. 04.00
(first speed of multiple speed levels).
 When the parameter has been written successfully, M1017=On.
 The M300's WPR command does not support writing to the 20XX address, but
the RPR command supports reading of 21XX, 22XX.
Recommendation Take care when using the WPR command. When writing parameters, because
most parameters are recorded as they are written, these parameters may only be
revised 109 times; a memory write error may occur if parameters are written more
than (MS)106 or (MH)109 times.
Calculation of the number of times written is based on whether the written value is
modified. For instance, writing the same value 100 times at the same time counts as
writing only once.
16-96
API
FPID S1 S2 S3 S4 Drive PID control mode
141 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID Continuous FPIDP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊＊
－－－－
S4 ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal: none
 S1 : PID reference target value input terminal select. S2 : PID function
proportional gain P. S3 : PID function integral time I. S4 : PID function

differential time D.
 The FPID command can directly control the drive's feedback control of PID Pr.
08-00 PID reference target value input terminal selection, 08-01 proposal gain P,
08-02 integral time I, and 08-03 differential time D.
 When M0=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 0 (no
PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 0, the PID function integral
time I is 1 (units: 0.01 sec.), and the PID function differential time D is 1 (units:
0.01 sec.).
 When M1=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 0 (no
PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the
PID function integral time I is 0, and the PID function differential time D is 0.
 When M2=On, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 1
(target frequency input is controlled from the digital keypad), the PID function
proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the PID function integral time I is 0, and the
PID function differential time D is 0.
 D1027: Frequency command after PID operation.
M0
FPID H0 H0 H1 H1
M1
FPID H0 H1 H0 H0
M2
FPID H1 H1 H0 H0
M1000
MOV D1027 D1
END
16-97
API
FREQ S1 S2 S3 Drive speed control mode
142 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ Continuous FREQP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊＊
－－－－
Flag signal: M1015
 S1 : Frequency command. S2 : Acceleration time. S3 : Deceleration time

 S2,S3: In acceleration/deceleration time settings, the number of decimal places is
determined by the definitions of Pr01-45.
Example
When 01-45=0: units of 0.01 sec.
The setting of 50 for S2 (acceleration time) in the ladder diagram below implies 0.5 sec,
and the S3 (deceleration time) setting of 60 implies 0.6 sec
 The FREQ command can control drive frequency commands, and acceleration and
deceleration time; it also uses special register control actions, such as:
M1025: Control drive RUN(On)/STOP(Off) (RUN requires Servo On (M1040 On) to be
effective)
M1026: Control drive operating direction FWD(Off)/REV(On)
M1040: Control Servo On/Servo Off.
M1042: Trigger quick stop (ON)/does not trigger quick stop (Off).
M1044: Pause (On)/release pause (Off)
M1052: Lock frequency (On)/release lock frequency (Off)
 M1025: Drive RUN(On)/STOP(Off), M1026: drive operating direction FWD(Off)/REV(On).

M1015: frequency reached.
 When M10=On, sets the drive frequency command K300(3.00Hz), with an
acceleration/deceleration time of 0.
When M11=On, sets the drive frequency command K3000 (30.00Hz), with an
acceleration time of 50 (0.5 sec.) and deceleration time of 60 (0.6 sec.). (When 01-45=0)
 When M11=Off, the drive frequency command will now change to 0
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10 M11
FREQP K300 K0 K0
M11 M10
FREQ K3000 K50 K60
END
 Pr. 09-33 are defined on the basis of whether reference commands have been
cleared before PLC operation
Bit 0 : Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target frequency has been
cleared is 0. (This will be written to the FREQ command when the PLC is
On)
16-98
Bit 1 : Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target torque has been
cleared is 0. (This will be written to the TORQ command when the PLC is
On)
Bit 2 : Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether speed limits in the torque mode
have been cleared is 0. (This will be written to the TORQ command when
the PLC is On)
Example: When using r to write a program,
M0
FREQ K2000 K1000 K1000
END
if we force M0 to be 1, the frequency command will be 20.00 Hz; but when M0 is set
as 0, there will be a different situation.
Case 1: When the 09-33 bit 0 is 0, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command will
remain at 20.00Hz.
Case 2: When the 09-33 bit 0 is 1, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command will
change to 0.00Hz
The reason for this is that when the 09-33 bit 0 is 1 prior to PLC scanning
procedures, the frequency will first revert to 0.
When the 09-33 bit 0 is 0, the frequency will not revert to 0.
16-99
16-7 Error display and handling

Code ID Descript Recommended handling approach
Check whether the program has an error
PLod 50 Data writing memory error
and download the program again
Data write memory error during Restart power and download the program
PLSv 51
program execution again
Try uploading again; if the error persists,
PLdA 52 Program transmission error
sent to the manufacturer for service
Command error while downloading Check whether the program has an error
PLFn 53
program and download the program again
Program exceeds memory capacity Restart power and download the program
PLor 54
or no program again
Command error during program Check whether the program has an error
PLFF 55
execution and download the program again
PLSn 56 Check code error
and download the program again
Program has no END stop Check whether the program has an error
PLEd 57
command and download the program again
MC command has been used Check whether the program has an error
PLCr 58
continuously more than nine times and download the program again
PLdF 59 Download program error
and download again
Check whether the program code has a
PLSF 60 PLC scan time excessively long
writing error and download again
*ID: Warning code
16-100
16-8 Explanation of PLC speed mode controls

Register table for speed mode:
Control special M
Special Description of Function Attributes
M
M1025 Drive frequency = set frequency (ON)/drive frequency =0 (OFF) RW
M1026 Drive operating direction FWD(OFF)/REV(ON) RW
M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) RW
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
Status special M

M
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1056 Servo On Ready RO
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
Control special D

D
D1060 Mode setting (speed mode is 0) RW
Status special D

D
D1037 Drive output frequency (0.00~600.00) RO
D1050 Actual operating mode (speed mode is 0) RO
Speed mode control commands:

FREQ(P) S1 S2 S3
Target speed The first acceleration time setting The first deceleration time setting
Example of speed mode control:
Before performing speed control, if the FOC (magnetic field orientation) control method is used,
setting of electromechanical parameters must first be completed.
1. Setting D1060 = 0 will shift the drive to the speed mode (default).
2. Use the FREQ command to control frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time.
3. Set M1040 = 1, the drive will now be excited, but the frequency will be 0.
4. Set M1025 = 1, the drive frequency command will now jump to the frequency designated
by FREQ, and acceleration/deceleration will be controlled on the basis of the acceleration
time and deceleration time specified by FREQ.
5. M1052 can be used to lock the current operating frequency.
16-101
6. M1044 can be used to temporarily pause operation, and the deceleration method will comply
with deceleration settings.
7. M1042 can be used to perform quick stop, and deceleration will be as quick as possible
without giving rise to an error. (There may still be a jump error if the load is too large.)
8. Control user rights: M1040(Servo ON) > M1042(Quick Stop) >M1044(Halt) >M1052(LOCK)
16-102
16-9 Count function using pulse input

16-9-1 High-speed count function
The MS300's MI7 supports one-way pulse counting, and the maximum speed is 33K. The starting
method is very simple, and only requires setting M1038 to begin counting. The 32 bit count value is
stored on D1054 and D1055 in non-numerical form. M1039 can reset the count value to 0.
Current count value

of MI8(H word)
※ When the PLC program defines MI7 for use as a high-speed counter, and also for use in PLC
procedures, it must be written to M1038 or M1039, and the original MI8 functions will be disabled.
16-9-2 Frequency calculation function
Apart from high-speed counting, the MS300's MI7 can also convert a received pulse to frequency.
The following figure shows that there is no conflict between frequency conversion and count
calculations, which can be performed simultaneously.
PLC speed calculation formula

D1057 Speed
D1058 Interval between calculations
D1059 Decimal places
Assuming that there are 5 input pulses each second, (see figure below) we set D1058=1000ms=1.0
sec. as the calculation interval. This enables five pulses to be sent to the drive each second.
Assuming that each 5 pulses correspond to 1Hz, we set D1057=5.

Assuming that we wish to display numbers to two decimal places, we set D1059=2, which is also
1.00Hz. The numerical value displayed at D1056 is 100. For simplicity, the D1059 conversion formula
can be expressed as in the following table:
16-103
[This page intentionally left blank]
16-104
Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off FunctionMS300
Chapter 17 Safe Torque Off Function
17-1 Basic Function Description
17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description
17-3 Wiring Diagram
17-4 Failure Rate of the Drive Safety Function
17-5 Reset the Parameter Settings
17-6 Timing Diagram Description
17-7 Error Code and Troubleshooting Instructions
17-8 Test and Fault Confirmation
17-1
17-1 Basic Function Description
MS300 series provides a Safe Torque Off (STO, Safe Torque Off) function. Through the
dual-channel S1 and S2 signal input to turn off IGBT switching, thereby preventing the
generation of motor torque in order to achieve safe stop. Please refer to Figure 1 for the circuit
diagram of Safe Torque Off function.
MS300 Safe Torque Off function meets the following international specifications:
ISO 13849-1: 2015 Category 3 PL d
IEC 61508 SIL2
EN 62061 SIL CL 2
EN 60204-1 Category 0
AC power
+24VDC STO Functional Block Of Subsystem 3
R4
R3
+3.3V 4 3
S1 A
C D E IGBT Power Section
Line
DCM 1 SU
GU SU1 Driver
GV SV1 SV
R1 2
GW SW1 SW
Emergency MCU GX Line SX
Gate
Stop button +3.3V
GY
GZ
Driver SY
SZ Driver Motor
S2 B
Safety PLC DCM 2
R2 Reset
IC +3.3V
FDBK
MO2 +3.3V
MCM Channel A (safety)

G +3.3V
Channel B (safety)
RC Diagnostic path
F Non-safety path
RA
Figure 1: The circuit diagram of Safe Torque Off function
17-2
17-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description

As mentioned earlier STO (Safe torque off) related terminal functions are described in Table 1 below.
Terminals Terminal Function Specifications
When the STO function is

not used, the STO function Output voltage range: +24V ± 10 %
+24V
can be disabled by shorting Output voltage capacity: 100 mA
S1 and S2 with + 24V
S1~DCM / S2~DCM
Signal input of STO function
S1 Rated input voltage: +24 VDC ± 10 %; Max. input voltage: +30
channel 1
VDC ± 10 %
Rated input current: 6.67 mA ± 10 %
Signal input of STO function STO activation mode

S2
channel 2 Input voltage level: 0 VDC < S1~DCM and S2~DCM < 5 VDC
STO response time: ≤ 20 ms (time required for S1/S2 operate
till the drive stop outputting)
Reference ground of S1
DCM STO cut-off mode
and S2 signal
Input voltage level: 11 VDC < S1~DCM and S2~DCM < 30 VDC
Table 1: Terminal function description
Action logic and keypad display after S1/S2 signal input are described in Table 2 below.
Signal Status
S1~DCM ON ON OFF OFF

S2~DCM ON OFF ON OFF
STL2 mode STL1 mode STO mode
Drive output Ready to output
(Torque output off) (Torque output off) (Torque output off)
Error displayed on
No error displayed STL2 STL1 STO
keypad
Table 2: Description of action logic and keypad display
 STO means channel 1 and 2 operate simultaneously and enter Safe Torque Off.
 STL1 means channel 1 operates.
 STL3 means there is error detected in the internal circuit of channel 1 or channel 2.
 S1~DCM / S2~DCM ON: means S1~ DCM / S2~DCM inputs a power supply > 11 VDC.
 S1~ DCM / S2~DCM OFF: means S1~ DCM / S2~DCM inputs a power supply < 5 VDC.
17-3
17-3 Wiring Diagram

17-3-1. Internal circuit diagram of safe control loop is shown in Figure2.
17-3-2. Terminals of the safe control loop + 24V-S1-S2 are short-circuited together with jumper
wire at the factory, as shown in Figure 2.
17-3-3. The safe control loop wiring diagram is as follows:
1. Remove the jumper wire of +24V-S1-S2.
2. The wiring as shown in Figure 3 below. Normally, the switch ESTOP contact must be
closed, thereby the drive can output without error displayed.
3. In STO mode, the switch ESTOP is turned on. The drive stops outputting and keypad
displays STO.
Figure 2
MO2 (Factory setting: 66)

MCM
*1
Figure 3
NOTE
*1 is factory jumper wire of +24V-S1-S2. To use the Safety function, please remove this jumper wire.
Conversely, if the Safety function is disabled, then +24V-S1-S2 should be short-circuit with jumper
wire.
17-4
17-4 Failure Rate of the Drive Safety Function

Please refer to Table 3 below for relevant safe parameters of safe loop:
Item Definition Standard Performance
S1-DCM = 88.35 %
SFF Safe failure fraction IEC61508
S2-DCM = 88.2 %
HFT (Type A
Hardware fault tolerance IEC61508 1
subsystem)
IEC61508 SIL 2
SIL Safety integrity level
IEC62061 SILCL 2
Average frequency of
PFH IEC61508 1.36 x 10-9
dangerous failure [h-1]
Probability of dangerous failure
PFDav IEC61508 5.99 x 10-6
on demand
PTI Proof test interval IEC61508 1 year
Category Category ISO13849-1 Category 3
PL Performance level ISO13849-1 d
MTTFd Mean time to dangerous failure ISO13849-1 High
DC Diagnostic coverage ISO13849-1 Low
Table 3: Relevant safe parameters of safe loop
17-5 Reset the Parameter Settings

Pr. 06-44 can be used to set the reset method when an STO alarm occurs.
 STO Latch Selection
Factory setting: 0
Settings 0: STO Alarm Latch
1: STO Alarm no Latch
 Pr. 06-44 = 0 STO Alarm Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, a Reset command is
needed to clear STO Alarm.
 Pr. 06-44 = 1 STO Alarm no Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, the STO Alarm will
be cleared automatically.
 All of STL1~STL3 error are “Alarm latch” mode (in STL1~STL3 mode, the Pr. 06-44 function is
not effective).
17-5
17-6 Timing Diagram Description

The following timing diagram shows the status of relevant signals under different conditions:
17-6-1 Normal operation status

As shown in Figure 4: When S1~DCM and S2~DCM is ON (STO function is not required), the
drive will execute “Operating” or “Output Stop” according to RUN command.
RUN command STOP

RUN
S1~DCM
input status ON
ON (no function
(STO S TO f unct ion required,
is not n eed , Pr.Pr.
0 6-44=0 )
06-44=0)
S2~DCM ON
ON (no function
(STO S TO f unct ion required,
is not n eed , Pr.Pr.
0 6-44=0 )
06-44=0)
input status
Drive out put Operat ing Output stop
Figure 4
17-6-2-1 STO, Pr. 06-44=0, Pr. 02-35=0 (Selection of external control operation after
reset / power on, 0=not valid)
As shown in Figure 5: When both of S1~DCM and S2~DCM are OFF during operation
(STO function is required), the drive will stop outputting when enter safe mode regardless
of Run command is ON or OFF status.
RUN co mmand STOP

RUN RUN
S1~DCM ON O FF ON
input status
S2~DCM ON O FF ON
input status
Drive out put Operat in g Output stop
Figure 5
17-6
17-6-2-2 STO, Pr. 06-44=0, Pr. 02-35=1 (Selection of external control operation after
reset / power on, 1= the drive will execute RUN if command exists after reset)
As shown in Figure 6, the action is the same as in Figure 5. However, because Pr. 02-35=1,
if RUN command still exists after reset, the drive will execute run command again
immediately.
RUN co mman d RUN
S1~DCM ON O FF ON
input status
S2~DCM ON O FF ON
input status
Dri ve o utput Op erati ng Output stop O per ati ng
Res et Res et
Figure 6
17-6-3 STO, Pr. 06-44=1
As shown in Figure 7: When both of S1~DCM and S2~DCM are OFF during operation (STO
function is required), the drive will stop outputting. When the S1 / S2 status is restored (ON),
the STO automatic alarm is automatically cleared. The drive can output when RUN command
is released again.
RUN co mmand RUN S TO P RUN
S1~DCM ON OFF ON
input status
S2~DCM ON OF F ON
input status
Dri ve output Operati ng Ou tput sto p O perati ng
Figure 7
17-7
17-6-4 STL1, Pr. 06-44=0 or 1
As shown in Figure 8: When S1~DCM is OFF during operation (STO function is required) and
S2~DCM is ON (STO function is not required), the drive will stop outputting and keypad will
show STL1 error. However, STL1 error cannot be reset even if the S1 status is restored (ON)
regardless of the parameter setting. Turn the power on after power off to reset, thereby the
drive can restore to normal standby state.
RU N co mmand ST OP
RUN RUN
S1~DCM ON OFF ON
input status
S2~DCM ON
input status
Dri ve out put Oper ating Ou tput s to p
Figure 8
17-6-5 STL2, Pr. 06-44=0 or 1
As shown in Figure 9: When S1~DCM is ON during operation (STO function is not required)
and S2~DCM is OFF (STO function is required), the drive will stop outputting and keypad
will show STL2 error. However, STL2 error cannot be reset even if the S2 status is restored
(ON) regardless of the parameter setting. Turn the power on after power off to reset, thereby
the drive can restore to normal standby state.
RUN co mmand RUN S TO P RUN
S1~DCM
ON
input status
S2~DCM ON O FF ON
input status
Dr iv e output Operati ng O utp ut s t op
Figure 9
17-8
17-7 Error Code and Troubleshooting Instructions
17-7-1 Error Code Description
Refer to Pr. 06-17 ~ Pr. 06-22 for fault record, wherein STO relevant error code is 72 / 76 / 77 / 78, the
definition is as follows and Table 4:
Fault Record 1
Fault Record 2
Fault Record 3
Fault Record 4
Fault Record 5
Fault Record 6
Settings
76: Safe torque off (STo)
Error code Name Description

76
Safe torque off Safe torque off function active
(STO)
72 Channel 1 (S1~DCM)
S1~DCM internal loop detected error
(STL1) safety loop error
77 Channel 2 (S2~DCM)
(STL2) safety loop error
78 S1~DCM and S2~DCM internal loop
Internal loop error
(STL3) detected error
Table 4: Error code description
17-9
17-7-2 Troubleshooting Instructions
Refer to the following instructions for troubleshooting when STO / STL1 / STL2 / STL3 shows on keypad.
(Refer to Chapter 14 Error Codes)
KPMS-LE01
ID No. Descriptions
Keypad displays

Corrective Actions
 Reset emergency switch (ON: activated) and re-power
72
 After make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL1 fault still exists after
Safe torque off function active

Corrective Actions
 Check wiring of S1 and S2 terminal.
76
 Check the wiring of S1/S2 and +24V terminal.
 After make sure all the wiring is correct, if STO fault still exists after
S2~DCM internal loop detected error.

Corrective Actions
77
 After make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL2 fault still exists after
Internal loop detected error.

Corrective Actions
78
17-10
17-8 Test and Fault Confirmation

After wiring in accordance with Section 17-3 Wiring Diagram, please follow the steps below to check
whether STO and related detection function are normal.
1. When the drive is powered on, make sure that S1~DCM and S2~DCM voltage falls between 11
VDC~30 VDC, at this time, the drive should enter standby mode and waits for RUN command.
There is no error displayed on keypad.
2. Press RUN command on the drive, use the emergency button or other methods to make S1~DCM
and S2~DCM voltage falls between 0 VDC~5 VDC simultaneously after the output frequency is
reached, at this time, the drive should enter torque stop mode STO and stop outputting voltage.
Keypad displays STO error, and the response time of S1 and S2 signals to the drive stops
outputting voltage should be ≤ 20 ms. Then restore S1~DCM and S2~DCM voltage to 11 VDC~30
VDC, press RESET button on keypad and STO error will be cleared. The drive should enter
standby mode and waits for RUN command.
3. Press RUN command on the drive, use the emergency button or other methods to make S1~DCM
voltage fall between 0 VDC~5 VDC, and S2~DCM voltage maintain between 11 VDC~30 VDC
after the output frequency is reached, at this time, the drive should enter torque stop mode STL1
and stop outputting voltage. Keypad displays ST1 error, and the response time of S1 signals to the
drive stops outputting voltage should be ≤ 20 ms. Then restore S1~DCM voltage to 11 VDC~30
VDC, however press RESET button on keypad cannot clear STL1 error, the drive needs to be
re-powered. Make sure that S1~DCM and S2~DCM voltage falls between 11 VDC~30 VDC and
then re-power the drive, thus STL1 error will be cleared. The drive should enter standby mode and
waits for RUN command.
4. Press RUN command on the drive, please use the emergency button or other methods to make
S2~DCM voltage fall between 0 VDC~5 VDC, and S1~DCM voltage maintain between 11
VDC~30 VDC after the output frequency is reached, at this time, the drive should enter torque stop
mode STL2 and stop outputting voltage. Keypad displays ST2 error, and the response time of S2
signals to the drive stops outputting voltage should be ≤ 20 ms. Then restore S2~DCM voltage to
11 VDC~30 VDC, however press RESET button on keypad cannot clear STL1 error, the drive
needs to be re-powered. Make sure S1~DCM and S2~DCM voltage falls between 11 VDC~30
VDC and then re-power the drive, thus STL2 error will be cleared. The drive should enter standby
mode and waits for RUN command.
5. If the above four steps can be conducted normally in sequence with no other error, then the safe
torque off function loop is normal, as shown in Table 5 below. However, if there are situations differ
from the above four steps or if STL3 occurs, the safe torque off function loop is abnormal. Please
refer to 17-7 Error Code and Troubleshooting Instructions.
17-11
Signal Status
S1~DCM ON ON OFF OFF
S2~DCM ON OFF ON OFF
STL2 mode STL1 mode STO mode

Drive output Ready to output
(Torque output off) (Torque output off) (Torque output off)
Error displayed on
No error displayed STL2 STL1 STO
keypad
Response time N.A ≤ 20 ms
RESET Can be RESET

N.A Re-power the drive Re-powe` the drive
mechanism directly
Table 5
 STO means channel 1 and 2 operate simultaneously and enter Safe Torque Off.
 STL3 means there is error detected in the internal circuit of channel 1 or channel 2.
 S1~DCM / S2~DCM ON: means S1~ DCM / S2~DCM inputs a power supply > 11 VDC.
 S1~ DCM / S2~DCM OFF: means S1~ DCM / S2~DCM inputs a power supply < 5 VDC.
17-12

Delta Standard Compact Drive MS300 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Standard Compact Drive MS300 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Standard Compact Drive MS300 Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.deltaacdrives.com Email: info@deltaacdrives.

Delta Standard Compact Drive

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.deltaacdrives.com Email: info@deltaacdrives.com

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

CHAPTER 2 DIMENSION ........................................................................................................ 2-1

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 3-1

CHAPTER 4 WIRING ............................................................................................................... 4-1

CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ............................................................................ 5-1

CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ..................................................................................... 6-1

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ............................................................................... 7-1

7-6 EMC Filter.................................................................................................................7-26

CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS..................................................................................................8-1

CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................9-1

CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................10-1

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS SETTINGS .................................................. 11-1

CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS .......................................... 12-00-1

12-1 Description of Parameter Settings……………………..……………………………12-00-1

CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................13-1

CHAPTER 14 ERROR CODES ..............................................................................................14-1

CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ...................................................................................15-1

CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................16-1

CHAPTER 17 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION….………………………..…………………….17-1

17-1 Basic Function Description………….......................................................................17-2

17-3 Wiring Diagram.......................................................................................................17-4

Application Control Board: V 1.0

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 RFI Jumper

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 RFI Jumper

Frame B~F (model with built-in EMC filter)

Isolating main power from ground:

Important points regarding ground connection

Pay particular attention to the following points:

Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

RFI jumper can be used

D1: VFD25AMS23ANSAA; VFD25AMS23ENSAA; VFD13AMS43ANSAA; VFD13AMS43ENSAA;

[ This page intentionally left blank ]

Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation

Minimum mounting clearance

Air flow rate for cooling Power Dissipation

Air flow rate for cooling Power Dissipation

[ This page intentionally left blank ]

4-2 System Wiring Diagram

4-2 System Wiring Diagram

Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

5-1 Main Circuit Diagram

5-2 Main Circuit Terminals

Main power terminals

 R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 have no phase-sequence requirement; they can be

Output terminals for main circuit

 Use a well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.

Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor and DC

Remove the front cover

Press the clip on both sides, and take out by rotating.

Input AC reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1D2 E G1 H MT PE

Input AC reactor A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1D2 E G1 H MT PE